This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Documentation
Page 1 of 206
What Is In The Dictionary ?
This workbook contains 157 worksheets, each explaining the purpose and usage of
particular Excel functions.
There are also a number of sample worksheets which are simple models of common
applications, such as Timesheet and Date Calculations.
Formatting
Each worksheet uses the same type of formatting to indicate the various types of entry.
North Text headings are shown in grey.
100
100 Data is shown as purple text on a yellow background.
100
300 The results of Formula are shown as blue on yellow.
=SUM(C13:C15) The formula used in the calulations is shown as blue text.
The Arial font is used exclusivley throughout the workbook and should display correctly
with any installation of Windows.
Each sheet has been designed to be as simple as possible, with no fancy macros to
accomplish the desrired result.
Printing
Each worksheet is set to print on to A4 portrait.
The printouts will have the column headings of A,B,C... and the row numbers 1,2,3... which
will assist with the reading of the formula.
The ideal printer would be a laser set at 600dpi.
If you are using a dot matrix or inkjet, it may be worth switching off the colours before printing,
as these will print as dark grey. (See the sheet dealing with Colour settings).
Protection
Each sheet is unprotected so that you will be able to change values and experiment
with the calculations.
Macros
There are only a few very simple macros which are used by the various buttons to
naviagte through the sheets. These have been written very simply, and do not make any attempt
to change your current Toolbars and Menus.
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Instructions
Page 2 of 206
What Do The Buttons Do ?
View
View
This button will display the
worksheet containing the function
example.
1. Click on the function name, then
2. Click on the View button.
Sort
This button sorts the list of functions
into alphabetical order.
Sort
Category
This describes the category the
function is a member of.
Click this button to sort alphabetically.
Category
Location
This shows where the function is
stored in Excel.
Builtin indicates that the function
is part of Excel itself.
Analysis ToolPak indicates the
function is stored in the Analysis
ToolPak addin.
Click this button to sort alphabetically.
Location
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Colours
Page 3 of 206
Using Different Monitor Settings
Each sheet has been designed to fit within the visible width of monitors with a low resolution
of 640 x 480. This ensures that you do not need to scroll from left and right to see all the data.
The colours are best suited to monitors capable of 256 colours.
On monitors using just 16 colours the greys may look a bit rough!
You can switch colours off and on using the button below.
This may take a
few minutes on
any computer !
Sample Colour Scheme
North South East West Total
Alan 100 100 100 100 400
Bob 100 100 100 100 400
Carol 100 100 100 100 400
Total 300 300 300 300 1200
Colour On
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Analysis ToolPak
Page 4 of 206
Analysis ToolPak
What Is The Analysis ToolPak ?
The Analysis ToolPak is an addin file containing
extra functions which are not built in to Excel.
The functions cover areas such as Date and
Mathematical operations.
The Analysis ToolPak must be addedin to Excel before
these functions will be available.
Any formula using these functions without the ToolPak loaded will show the #NAME error.
Check For Analysis ToolPak
Analysis ToolPak
Load the Analysis ToolPak
UnLoad the Analysis ToolPak
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FunctionList
Page 5 of 206
Age Calculation Sample Sample
AutoSum shortcut key Sample Sample
Brackets in formula Sample Sample Sample
FileName formula Sample Sample
Instant Charts Sample Sample
Ordering Stock Sample Sample Stock Ordering
Percentages Sample Sample How to calculate various percentages
Project Dates Sample Sample Example using date calculation.
Show all formula Sample Sample
Split ForenameSurname Sample Sample
Time Calculation Sample Sample How to calculate time.
TimeSheet For Flexi Sample Sample Example flexi time sheet.
ABS Mathematical Builtin Returns the absolute value of a number
AND Logical Builtin Returns TRUE if all its arguments are TRUE
AVERAGE Statistical Builtin Returns the average of its arguments
BIN2DEC Engineering Analysis ToolPak Converts a binary number to decimal
CEILING Mathematical Builtin Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance
CELL Information Builtin Returns information about the formatting, location, or contents of a cell
CHAR Text Builtin Returns the character specified by the code number
CHOOSE Lookup Builtin Chooses a value from a list of values
CLEAN Text Builtin Removes all nonprintable characters from text
CODE Text Builtin Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string
COMBIN Mathematical Builtin Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects
CONCATENATE Text Builtin Joins several text items into one text item
CONVERT Engineering Analysis ToolPak Converts a number from one measurement system to another
CORREL Statistical Builtin Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets
COUNT Statistical Builtin Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments
COUNTA Statistical Builtin Counts how many values are in the list of arguments
COUNTBLANK Information Builtin Counts the number of blank cells within a range
COUNTIF Mathematical Builtin Counts the number of nonblank cells within a range that meet the given criteria
DATE Date Builtin Returns the serial number of a particular date
DATEDIF Date Builtin Calculates the difference between two dates. Undocumented in v5/7/97
DATEVALUE Date Builtin Converts a date in the form of text to a serial number
DAVERAGE Database Builtin Returns the average of selected database entries
DAY Date Builtin Converts a serial number to a day of the month
DAYS360 Date Builtin Calculates the number of days between two dates based on a 360day year
DB Financial Builtin Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the fixeddeclining balance method
DCOUNT Database Builtin Counts the cells that contain numbers in a database
DCOUNTA Database Builtin Counts nonblank cells in a database
DEC2BIN Engineering Analysis ToolPak Converts a decimal number to binary
DEC2HEX Engineering Analysis ToolPak Converts a decimal number to hexadecimal
DELTA Engineering Analysis ToolPak Tests whether two values are equal
DGET Database Builtin Extracts from a database a single record that matches the specified criteria
DMAX Database Builtin Returns the maximum value from selected database entries
DMIN Database Builtin Returns the minimum value from selected database entries
DOLLAR Text Builtin Converts a number to text, using currency format
DSUM Database Builtin Adds the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria
EDATE Date Analysis ToolPak Returns the serial number of the date that is the indicated number of months before or after the start date
EOMONTH Date Analysis ToolPak Returns the serial number of the last day of the month before or after a specified number of months
ERROR.TYPE Information Builtin Returns a number corresponding to an error type
EVEN Mathematical Builtin Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer
EXACT Text Builtin Checks to see if two text values are identical
FACT Mathematical Builtin Returns the factorial of a number
FIND Text Builtin Finds one text value within another (casesensitive)
FIXED Text Builtin Formats a number as text with a fixed number of decimals
FLOOR Mathematical Builtin Rounds a number down, toward zero
FORECAST Statistical Builtin Returns a value along a linear trend
FREQUENCY Statistical Builtin Returns a frequency distribution as a vertical array
GCD Mathematical Analysis ToolPak Returns the greatest common divisor
GESTEP Engineering Analysis ToolPak Tests whether a number is greater than a threshold value
GROWTH Statistical Builtin Returns values along an exponential trend
HEX2DEC Engineering Analysis ToolPak Converts a hexadecimal number to decimal
HLOOKUP Lookup Builtin Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell
HOUR Date Builtin Converts a serial number to an hour
IF Logical Builtin Specifies a logical test to perform
INDEX Lookup Builtin Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array
INDIRECT Lookup Builtin Returns a reference indicated by a text value
INFO Information Builtin Returns information about the current operating environment
Using DATEDIF()
Using Alt and =
Using MID() CELL() and FIND()
Using F11
Using Ctrl and `
Using LEFT() RIGHT() FIND() SUBSTITUTE()
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FunctionList
Page 6 of 206
INT Mathematical Builtin Rounds a number down to the nearest integer
ISBLANK Information Builtin Returns TRUE if the value is blank
ISERR Information Builtin Returns TRUE if the value is any error value except #N/A
ISERROR Information Builtin Returns TRUE if the value is any error value
ISEVEN Information Analysis ToolPak Returns TRUE if the number is even
ISLOGICAL Information Builtin Returns TRUE if the value is a logical value
ISNA Information Builtin Returns TRUE if the value is the #N/A error value
ISNONTEXT Information Builtin Returns TRUE if the value is not text
ISNUMBER Information Builtin Returns TRUE if the value is a number
ISODD Information Analysis ToolPak Returns TRUE if the number is odd
ISREF Information Builtin Returns TRUE if the value is a reference
ISTEXT Information Builtin Returns TRUE if the value is text
LARGE Statistical Builtin Returns the kth largest value in a data set
LCM Mathematical Analysis ToolPak Returns the least common multiple
LEFT Text Builtin Returns the leftmost characters from a text value
LEN Text Builtin Returns the number of characters in a text string
LOOKUP (vector) Lookup Builtin Looks up values in a vector or array
LOWER Text Builtin Converts text to lowercase
MATCH Lookup Builtin Looks up values in a reference or array
MAX Statistical Builtin Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments
MEDIAN Statistical Builtin Returns the median of the given numbers
MID Text Builtin Returns a specific number of characters from a text string starting at the position you specify
MIN Statistical Builtin Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments
MINUTE Date Builtin Converts a serial number to a minute
MINVERSE Mathematical Builtin Returns the matrix inverse of an array
MMULT Mathematical Builtin Returns the matrix product of two arrays
MOD Mathematical Builtin Returns the remainder from division
MODE Statistical Builtin Returns the most common value in a data set
MONTH Date Builtin Converts a serial number to a month
MROUND Mathematical Analysis ToolPak Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple
N Information Builtin Returns a value converted to a number
NA Information Builtin Returns the error value #N/A
NETWORKDAYS Date Analysis ToolPak Returns the number of whole workdays between two dates
NOT Logical Builtin Reverses the logic of its argument
NOW Date Builtin Returns the serial number of the current date and time
ODD Mathematical Builtin Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer
OR Logical Builtin Returns TRUE if any argument is TRUE
PERMUT Statistical Builtin Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects
PI Mathematical Builtin Returns the value of Pi
POWER Mathematical Builtin Returns the result of a number raised to a power
PRODUCT Mathematical Builtin Multiplies its arguments
PROPER Text Builtin Capitalises the first letter in each word of a text value
QUARTILE Statistical Builtin Returns the quartile of a data set
QUOTIENT Mathematical Analysis ToolPak Returns the integer portion of a division
RAND Mathematical Builtin Returns a random number between 0 and 1
RANDBETWEEN Mathematical Analysis ToolPak Returns a random number between the numbers you specify
RANK Statistical Builtin Returns the rank of a number in a list of numbers
REPLACE Text Builtin Replaces characters within text
REPT Text Builtin Repeats text a given number of times
RIGHT Text Builtin Returns the rightmost characters from a text value
ROMAN Mathematical Builtin Converts an arabic numeral to roman, as text
ROUND Mathematical Builtin Rounds a number to a specified number of digits
ROUNDDOWN Mathematical Builtin Rounds a number down, toward zero
ROUNDUP Mathematical Builtin Rounds a number up, away from zero
SECOND Date Builtin Converts a serial number to a second
SIGN Mathematical Builtin Returns the sign of a number
SLN Financial Builtin Returns the straightline depreciation of an asset for one period
SMALL Statistical Builtin Returns the kth smallest value in a data set
STDEV Statistical Builtin Estimates standard deviation based on a sample
STDEVP Statistical Builtin Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population
SUBSTITUTE Text Builtin Substitutes new text for old text in a text string
SUBTOTAL Mathematical Builtin Returns a subtotal in a list or database
SUM Mathematical Builtin Adds its arguments
SUM_as_Running_Total Mathematical Builtin Sample
SUM_using_names Sample Sample
SUM_with_OFFSET Lookup Builtin Sample
SUMIF Mathematical Builtin Adds the cells specified by a given criteria
SUMPRODUCT Mathematical Builtin Returns the sum of the products of corresponding array components
Using SUM(jan)
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FunctionList
Page 7 of 206
SYD Financial Builtin Returns the sumofyears' digits depreciation of an asset for a specified period
T Text Builtin Converts its arguments to text
TEXT Text Builtin Formats a number and converts it to text
TIME Date Builtin Returns the serial number of a particular time
Timesheet Sample Sample Sample
TIMEVALUE Date Builtin Converts a time in the form of text to a serial number
TODAY Date Builtin Returns the serial number of today's date
TRANSPOSE Lookup Builtin Returns the transpose of an array
TREND Statistical Builtin Returns values along a linear trend
TRIM Text Builtin Removes spaces from text
TRUNC Mathematical Builtin Truncates a number to an integer
TYPE Information Builtin Returns a number indicating the data type of a value
UPPER Text Builtin Converts text to uppercase
VALUE Text Builtin Converts a text argument to a number
VAR Statistical Builtin Estimates variance based on a sample
VARP Statistical Builtin Calculates variance based on the entire population
VLOOKUP Lookup Builtin Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell
WEEKDAY Date Builtin Converts a serial number to a day of the week
WORKDAY Date Analysis ToolPak Returns the serial number of the date before or after a specified number of workdays
YEAR Date Builtin Converts a serial number to a year
YEARFRAC Date Analysis ToolPak Returns the year fraction representing the number of whole days between start_date and end_date
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Time Calculation
Page 8 of 206
Time Calculation
Excel can work with time very easily.
Time can be entered in various different formats and calculations performed.
There are one or two oddities, but nothing which should put you off working with it.
Typing time
When time is entered into worksheet it should be entered with a colon between
1:30 12:30 20:15 22:45
Excel can cope with either the 24hour system or the am/pm system.
You must leave a space between the number and the text.
1:30 AM 1:30 PM 10:15 AM 10:15 PM
Finding the difference between two times
You can subtract two time values to find the length of time between.
Start End Duration
1:30 2:30 1:00 =D24C24
8:00 17:00 9:00 =D25C25
8:00 AM 5:00 PM 9:00 AM If the result is not shown correctly,
You may need to reformat the answer.
Look at the section about formatting
further in this worksheet.
Adding time
You can add time to find a total time.
This works well until the total time goes above 24 hours.
For totals greater than 24 hours you may need to apply some special formatting.
Start End Duration
1:30 2:30 1:00
8:00 17:00 9:00
7:30 AM 5:45 PM 10:15
20:15
Formatting time
When time is added together the result may go beyond 24 hours.
Usually this gives an incorrect result, as in the example below.
To correct this error, the result needs to be formatted with a Custom format.
Example 1 : Incorrect formatting
Start End Duration
7:00 18:30 11:30
8:00 17:00 9:00
7:30 17:45 10:15
Total 6:45 =SUM(E49:E51)
Example 2 : Correct formatting
Start End Duration
7:00 18:30 11:30
8:00 17:00 9:00
7:30 17:45 10:15
Total 30:45 =SUM(E56:E58)
How To Apply Custom Formatting
The custom format for time use a pair of square brackets [hh] on either side
of the hours indicators.
1. Click on the cell which needs the format.
See the TimeSheet example for an example.
the hour and the minutes, such as 12:30, rather than 12.30
To use the am/pm system you must enter the am or pm after the time.
2. Choose the Format menu.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Time Calculation
Page 9 of 206
3. Choose Cells.
4. Click the Number tag at the top right.
5. Choose Custom.
6. Click inside the Type: box.
7. Type [hh]:mm as the format.
8. Click OK to confirm.
A B C D E F G H I J
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
TimeSheet For Flexi
Page 10 of 206
TimeSheet for Flexi
Week beginning Mon 05Jan98 Normal Hours 37:30
Day Arrive Lunch Out Lunch In Depart Total
Mon 05 8:00 13:00 14:00 17:00 8:00 =(F6C6)(E6D6)
Tue 06 8:45 12:30 13:30 17:00 7:15
Wed 07 9:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 8:00
Thu 08 8:30 13:00 14:00 17:00 7:30
Fri 09 8:00 12:00 13:00 17:00 8:00
Total Hours 38:45 =SUM(G6:G10)
Under worked by  =IF(G3G11>0,G3G11, "")
Over worked by 1:15 =IF(G3G11<0,ABS(G3G11),"")
This is simple example of a timesheet.
Instructions :
Type the week start date in cell C3, the Week beginning.
Use the format dd/mm/yy, the name of the day will appear automatically.
The date is then passed down to the Day column.
Type the amount of hours you are expected to work in G3, the Normal Hours.
This is used later to calculate if have worked over or under the required hours.
Type the times you arrive and leave work in the appropriate columns.
Use the format of hh:mm.
Note
The Total Hours cell has been formatted as [hh]:mm.
This ensures the total hours can be expressed as a value above 24 hours.
If the [hh]:mm format had not been used the Total Hours would show as : 14:45
If the [hh]:mm format does not show in the cell format dialog box
on your computer, it can be created using Format, Cells, Number, Custom.
A B C D E F G H I J K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Split ForenameSurname
Page 11 of 206
Split Forename and Surname
The following formula are useful when you have one cell containing text which needs
to be split up.
One of the most common examples of this is when a persons Forename and Surname
are entered in full into a cell.
The formula use various text functions to accomplish the task.
Each of the techniques uses the space between the names to identify where to split.
Finding the First Name
Full Name First Name
Alan Jones Alan =LEFT(C14,FIND(" ",C14,1))
Bob Smith Bob =LEFT(C15,FIND(" ",C15,1))
Carol Williams Carol =LEFT(C16,FIND(" ",C16,1))
Finding the Last Name
Full Name Last Name
Alan Jones Jones =RIGHT(C22,LEN(C22)FIND(" ",C22))
Bob Smith Smith =RIGHT(C23,LEN(C23)FIND(" ",C23))
Carol Williams Williams =RIGHT(C24,LEN(C24)FIND(" ",C24))
Finding the Last name when a Middle name is present
The formula above cannot handle any more than two names.
If there is also a middle name, the last name formula will be incorrect.
To solve the problem you have to use a much longer calculation.
Full Name Last Name
Alan David Jones Jones
Bob John Smith Smith
Carol Susan Williams Williams
=RIGHT(C37,LEN(C37)FIND("#",SUBSTITUTE(C37," ","#",LEN(C37)LEN(SUBSTITUTE(C37," ","")))))
Finding the Middle name
Full Name Middle Name
Alan David Jones David
Bob John Smith John
Carol Susan Williams Susan
=LEFT(RIGHT(C45,LEN(C45)FIND(" ",C45,1)),FIND(" ",RIGHT(C45,LEN(C45)FIND(" ",C45,1)),1))
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Percentages
Page 12 of 206
Percentages
There are no specific functions for calculating percentages.
You have to use the skills you were taught in your maths class at school!
Finding a percentage of a value
Initial value 120
% to find 25%
Percentage value 30 =D8*D9
Example 1
A company is about to give its staff a pay rise.
The wages department need to calculate the increases.
Staff on different grades get different pay rises.
Grade % Rise
A 10%
B 15%
C 20%
Name Grade Old Salary Increase
Alan A £10,000 £1,000 =E23*LOOKUP(D23,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)
Bob B £20,000 £3,000 =E24*LOOKUP(D24,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)
Carol C £30,000 £6,000 =E25*LOOKUP(D25,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)
David B £25,000 £3,750 =E26*LOOKUP(D26,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)
Elaine C £32,000 £6,400 =E27*LOOKUP(D27,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)
Frank A £12,000 £1,200 =E28*LOOKUP(D28,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)
Finding a percentage increase
Initial value 120
% increase 25%
Increased value 150 =D33*D34+D33
Example 2
A company is about to give its staff a pay rise.
The wages department need to calculate the new salary including the % increase.
Staff on different grades get different pay rises.
Grade % Rise
A 10%
B 15%
C 20%
Name Grade Old Salary Increase
Alan A £10,000 £11,000 =E48*LOOKUP(D48,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)+E48
Bob B £20,000 £23,000 =E49*LOOKUP(D49,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)+E49
Carol C £30,000 £36,000 =E50*LOOKUP(D50,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)+E50
David B £25,000 £28,750 =E51*LOOKUP(D51,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)+E51
Elaine C £32,000 £38,400 =E52*LOOKUP(D52,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)+E52
Frank A £12,000 £13,200 =E53*LOOKUP(D53,$C$18:$C$20,$D$18:$D$20)+E53
Finding one value as percentage of another
Value A 120
Value B 60
A as % of B 50% =D59/D58
You will need to format the result as % by using the % button
on the toolbar.
A B C D E F G H I J K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Percentages
Page 13 of 206
Example 3
An manager has been asked to submit budget requirements for next year.
The manger needs to specify what will be required each quarter.
The manager knows what has been spent by each region in the previous year.
By analysing the past years spending, the manager hopes to predict
what will need to be spent in the next year.
Last years figures
Region Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
North 9,000 2,000 9,000 7,000
South 7,000 4,000 9,000 5,000
East 2,000 8,000 7,000 3,000
West 8,000 9,000 6,000 5,000 Total
Total 26,000 23,000 31,000 20,000 100,000
Last years Quarters as % of last years Total
Region Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
North 9% 2% 9% 7% =G74/$H$78
South 7% 4% 9% 5% =G75/$H$78
East 2% 8% 7% 3% =G76/$H$78
West 8% 9% 6% 5% =G77/$H$78
Total 26% 23% 31% 20% =G78/$H$78
Next years budget 150,000
Next years estimated budget requirements
Region Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
North 13,500 3,000 13,500 10,500 =G82*$E$88
South 10,500 6,000 13,500 7,500 =G83*$E$88
East 3,000 12,000 10,500 4,500 =G84*$E$88
West 12,000 13,500 9,000 7,500 Total
Total 39,000 34,500 46,500 30,000 150,000
Finding an original value after an increase has been applied
Increased value 150
% increase 25%
Original value 120 =D100/(100%+D101)
Example 4
An employ has to submit an expenses claim for travelling and accommodation.
The claim needs to show the VAT tax portion of each receipt.
Unfortunately the receipts held by the employee only show the total amount.
The employee needs to split this total to show the original value and the VAT amount.
VAT rate 17.50%
Receipt Total Actual Value Vat Value
Petrol £10.00 £8.51 £1.49 =D113D113/(100%+$D$110)
Hotel £235.00 £200.00 £35.00
Petrol £117.50 £100.00 £17.50
=D115/(100%+$D$110)
A B C D E F G H I J K
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Show all formula
Page 14 of 206
Show all formula
Press the same combination to see the original view.
10 20 30
30 40 70
50 60 60
70 80 30
You can view all the formula on the worksheet by pressing Ctrl and `.
The ' is the left single quote usually found on the key to left of number 1.
Press Ctrl and ` to see the formula below. (The screen may look a bit odd.)
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SUM_using_names
Page 15 of 206
SUM using names
You can use the names typed at the top of columns or side of rows in calculations
simply by typing the name into the formula.
Try this example:
The result will show.
Jan Feb Mar
North 45 50 50
South 30 25 35
East 35 10 50
West 20 50 5
Total
If it does not work !
The feature may have been switched off on your computer.
Go to cell C16 and then enter the formula =SUM(jan)
This formula can be copied to D16 and E16, and the names change to Feb and Mar.
You can switch it on by using Tools, Options, Calculation, Accept Labels in Formula.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
North South East West
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Jan
Feb
Mar
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Instant Charts
Page 17 of 206
Instant Charts
You can create a chart quickly without having to use the chart button on
Jan Feb Mar
North 45 50 50
South 30 25 35
East 35 10 50
West 20 50 5
Click anywhere inside the table above.
the toolbar by pressing the function key F11 whilst inside a range of data.
Then press F11.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Filename formula
Page 18 of 206
Filename formula
There may be times when you need to insert the name of the current workbook
or worksheet in to a cell.
This can be done by using the CELL() function, shown below.
'file:///opt/scribd/conversion/tmp/scratch2509/41288993.xls'#$ Filename formula
=CELL("filename")
The problem with this is that it gives the complete path including drive letter and folders.
To just pick out the workbook or worksheet name you need to use text functions.
To pick the Path.
#VALUE!
=MID(CELL("filename"),1,FIND("[",CELL("filename"))1)
To pick the Workbook name.
#VALUE!
=MID(CELL("filename"),FIND("[",CELL("filename"))+1,FIND("]",CELL("filename"))FIND("[",CELL("filename"))1)
To pick the Worksheet name.
#VALUE!
=MID(CELL("filename"),FIND("]",CELL("filename"))+1,255)
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Brackets in formula
Page 19 of 206
Brackets in formula
Sometimes you will need to use brackets, (also known as 'braces'), in formula.
This is to ensure that the calculations are performed in the order that you need.
Example 1 : The wrong answer !
10
20
2
50 =C12+C13*C14
You may expect that 10 + 20 would equal 30
And then 30 * 2 would equal 60
But because the * is calculated first Excel sees the
calculation as 20 * 2 resulting in 40
And then 10 + 40 resulting in 50
Example 2 : The correct answer.
10
20
2
60 =(C27+C28)*C29
By placing brackets around (10+20) Excel performs this
part of the calulation first, resulting in 30
Then the 30 is multipled by 2 resulting in 60
The need for brackets occurs when you mix plus or minus with divide or multiply.
Mathematically speaking the * and / are more important than + and  .
The * and / operations will be calculated before + and  .
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Age Calculation
Page 20 of 206
Age Calculation
You can calculate a persons age based on their birthday and todays date.
The DATEDIF() is not documented in Excel 5, 7 or 97, but it is in 2000.
(Makes you wonder what else Microsoft forgot to tell us!)
Birth date : 5Jul84
Years lived : #NAME? =DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"y")
and the months : #NAME? =DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"ym")
and the days : #NAME? =DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"md")
You can put this all together in one calculation, which creates a text version.
#NAME?
="Age is "&DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"y")&" Years, "&DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"ym")&" Months and "&DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"md")&" Days"
Another way to calculate age
This method gives you an age which may potentially have decimal places representing the months.
If the age is 20.5, the .5 represents 6 months.
Birth date : 1Jan60
Age is : 50.76 =(TODAY()C23)/365.25
The calculation uses the DATEDIF() function.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
AutoSum Shortcut Key
Page 21 of 206
AutoSum Shortcut Key
Instead of using the AutoSum button from the toolbar,
Try it here :
or
Jan Feb Mar Total
North 10 50 90
South 20 60 100
East 30 70 200
West 40 80 300
Total
you can press Alt and = to achieve the same result.
Move to a blank cell in the Total row or column, then press Alt and =.
Select a row, column or all cells and then press Alt and =.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ABS
Page 22 of 206
ABS
Number Absolute Value
10 10 =ABS(C4)
10 10 =ABS(C5)
1.25 1.25 =ABS(C6)
1.25 1.25 =ABS(C7)
What Does it Do ?
This function calculates the value of a number, irrespective of whether it is positive or negative.
Syntax
=ABS(CellAddress or Number)
Formatting
The result will be shown as a number, no special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used by a company testing a machine which cuts timber.
The machine needs to cut timber to an exact length.
Three pieces of timber were cut and then measured.
In calculating the difference between the Required Length and the Actual Length it does
not matter if the wood was cut too long or short, the measurement needs to be expressed as
an absolute value.
Table 1 shows the original calculations.
The Difference for Test 3 is shown as negative, which has a knock on effect
when the Error Percentage is calculated.
Whether the wood was too long or short, the percentage should still be expressed
as an absolute value.
Table 1
Difference
Test 1 120 120 0 0%
Test 2 120 90 30 25%
Test 3 120 150 30 25%
=D36E36
Table 2 shows the same data but using the =ABS() function to correct the calculations.
Table 2
Difference
Test 1 120 120 0 0%
Test 2 120 90 30 25%
Test 3 120 150 30 25%
=ABS(D45E45)
Test
Cut
Required
Length
Actual
Length
Error
Percentage
Test
Cut
Required
Length
Actual
Length
Error
Percentage
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ADDRESS
Page 23 of 206
ADDRESS
Type a column number : 2
Type a row number : 3
Type a sheet name : Hello
$B$3 =ADDRESS(F4,F3,1,TRUE)
B$3 =ADDRESS(F4,F3,2,TRUE)
$B3 =ADDRESS(F4,F3,3,TRUE)
B3 =ADDRESS(F4,F3,4,TRUE)
R3C2 =ADDRESS(F4,F3,1,FALSE)
R3C[2] =ADDRESS(F4,F3,2,FALSE)
R[3]C2 =ADDRESS(F4,F3,3,FALSE)
R[3]C[2] =ADDRESS(F4,F3,4,FALSE)
Hello.$B$3 =ADDRESS(F4,F3,1,TRUE,F5)
Hello.B$3 =ADDRESS(F4,F3,2,TRUE,F5)
Hello.$B3 =ADDRESS(F4,F3,3,TRUE,F5)
Hello.B3 =ADDRESS(F4,F3,4,TRUE,F5)
What Does It Do ?
This function creates a cell reference as a piece of text, based on a row and column
numbers given by the user.
This type of function is used in macros rather than on the actual worksheet.
Syntax
=ADDRESS(RowNumber,ColNumber,Absolute,A1orR1C1,SheetName)
The RowNumber is the normal row number from 1 to 16384.
The ColNumber is from 1 to 256, cols A to IV.
The Absolute can be 1,2,3 or 4.
When 1 the reference will be in the form $A$1, column and row absolute.
When 2 the reference will be in the form A$1, only the row absolute.
When 3 the reference will be in the form $A1, only the column absolute.
When 4 the reference will be in the form A1, neither col or row absolute.
The A1orR1C1 is either TRUE of FALSE.
When TRUE the reference will be in the form A1, the normal style for cell addresses.
When FALSE the reference will be in the form R1C1, the alternative style of cell address.
The SheetName is a piece of text to be used as the worksheet name in the reference.
The SheetName does not actually have to exist.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
AND
Page 24 of 206
AND
Items To Test Result
500 800 TRUE =AND(C4>=100,D4>=100)
500 25 FALSE =AND(C5>=100,D5>=100)
25 500 FALSE =AND(C6>=100,D6>=100)
12 TRUE =AND(D7>=1,D7<=52)
What Does It Do?
This function tests two or more conditions to see if they are all true.
It can be used to test that a series of numbers meet certain conditions.
It can be used to test that a number or a date falls between an upper and lower limit.
Normally the AND() function would be used in conjunction with a function such as =IF().
Syntax
=AND(Test1,Test2)
Note that there can be up to 30 possible tests.
Formatting
When used by itself it will show TRUE or FALSE.
Example 1
The following example shows a list of examination results.
The teacher wants to find the pupils who scored above average in all three exams.
The =AND() function has been used to test that each score is above the average.
The result of TRUE is shown for pupils who have scored above average in all three exams.
Name Maths English Physics Passed
Alan 80 75 85 TRUE
Bob 50 30 40 FALSE
Carol 60 70 50 FALSE
David 90 85 95 TRUE
Eric 20 30 Absent FALSE
Fred 40 60 80 FALSE
Gail 10 90 80 FALSE
Harry 80 70 60 TRUE
Ian 30 10 20 FALSE
Janice 10 20 30 FALSE
=AND(C38>=AVERAGE($C$29:$C$38),D38>=AVERAGE($D$29:$D$38),E38>=AVERAGE($E$29:$E$38))
Averages 47 54 60
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
AREAS
Page 25 of 206
AREAS
Pink Name Age Err:504 =AREAS(PeopleLists)
Alan 18
Bob 17
Carol 20
Green Name Age
David 20
Eric 16
Fred 19
What Does It Do?
This function tests a range to determine whether it is a single block of data, or whether
it is a multiple selection.
If it is a single block the result will be 1.
If it is a multiple block the result will be the number of ranges selected.
The function is designed to be used in macros.
Syntax
=AREAS(RangeToTest)
Formatting
The result will be shown as a number.
Example
The example at the top of this page shows two ranges coloured pink and green.
These ranges have been given the name PeopleLists.
The =AREAS(PeopleLists) gives a result of 2 indicating that there are two separate
selections which form the PeopleLists range.
Note
To name multiple ranges the CTRL key must be used.
In the above example the pink range was selected as normal, then the Ctrl key
was held down before selecting the green range.
When a Range Name is created it will consider both Pink and Green as being one range.
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
AVERAGE
Page 26 of 206
AVERAGE
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Average
Temp 30 31 32 29 26 28 27 29 =AVERAGE(D4:J4)
Rain 0 0 0 4 6 3 1 2 =AVERAGE(D5:J5)
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Average
Temp 30 32 29 26 28 27 28.67 =AVERAGE(D8:J8)
Rain 0 0 4 6 3 1 2.33 =AVERAGE(D9:J9)
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Average
Temp 30 No 32 29 26 28 27 28.67 =AVERAGE(D12:J12)
Rain 0 Reading 0 4 6 3 1 2.33 =AVERAGE(D13:J13)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the average from a list of numbers.
If the cell is blank or contains text, the cell will not be used in the average calculation.
If the cell contains zero 0, the cell will be included in the average calculation.
Syntax
=AVERAGE(Range1,Range2,Range3... through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Note
To calculate the average of cells which contain text or blanks use =SUM() to get the total and
then divide by the count of the entries using =COUNTA().
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Average
Temp 30 No 32 29 26 28 27 24.57 =SUM(D31:J31)/COUNTA(D31:J31)
Rain 0 Reading 0 4 6 3 1 2 =SUM(D32:J32)/COUNTA(D32:J32)
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Average
Temp 30 32 29 26 28 27 28.67 =SUM(D35:J35)/COUNTA(D35:J35)
Rain 0 0 4 6 3 1 2.33 =SUM(D36:J36)/COUNTA(D36:J36)
Further Usage
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
BIN2DEC
Page 27 of 206
BIN2DEC
Binary Number Decimal Equivalent
0 0 =BIN2DEC(C4)
1 1 =BIN2DEC(C5)
10 2 =BIN2DEC(C6)
11 3 =BIN2DEC(C7)
111111111 511 =BIN2DEC(C8)
1111111111 1 =BIN2DEC(C9)
1111111110 2 =BIN2DEC(C10)
1111111101 3 =BIN2DEC(C11)
1000000000 512 =BIN2DEC(C12)
11111111111 Err:502 =BIN2DEC(C13)
What Does It Do ?
This function converts a binary number to decimal.
Negative numbers are represented using two'scomplement notation.
Syntax
=BIN2DEC(BinaryNumber)
The binary number has a limit of ten characters.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
CEILING
Page 28 of 206
CEILING
Number Raised Up
2.1 3 =CEILING(C4,1)
1.5 2 =CEILING(C5,1)
1.9 2 =CEILING(C6,1)
20 30 =CEILING(C7,30)
25 30 =CEILING(C8,30)
40 60 =CEILING(C9,30)
What Does It Do ?
This function rounds a number up to the nearest multiple specified by the user.
Syntax
=CEILING(ValueToRound,MultipleToRoundUpTo)
The ValueToRound can be a cell address or a calculation.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example 1
The following table was used by a estate agent renting holiday apartments.
The properties being rented are only available on a weekly basis.
When the customer supplies the number of days required in the property the =CEILING()
function rounds it up by a multiple of 7 to calculate the number of full weeks to be billed.
Days Required
Customer 1 3 7 =CEILING(D28,7)
Customer 2 4 7 =CEILING(D29,7)
Customer 3 10 14 =CEILING(D30,7)
Example 2
The following table was used by a builders merchant delivering products to a construction site.
The merchant needs to hire trucks to move each product.
Each product needs a particular type of truck of a fixed capacity.
Table 1 calculates the number of trucks required by dividing the Units To Be Moved by
the Capacity of the truck.
This results of the division are not whole numbers, and the builder cannot hire just part
of a truck.
Table 1
Item
Bricks 1000 300 3.33 =D45/E45
Wood 5000 600 8.33 =D46/E46
Cement 2000 350 5.71 =D47/E47
Table 2 shows how the =CEILING() function has been used to round up the result of
the division to a whole number, and thus given the exact amount of trucks needed.
Table 2
Days To
Be Billed
Units To
Be Moved
Truck
Capacity
Trucks
Needed
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
CEILING
Page 29 of 206
Item
Bricks 1000 300 4 =CEILING(D54/E54,1)
Wood 5000 600 9 =CEILING(D55/E55,1)
Cement 2000 350 6 =CEILING(D56/E56,1)
Example 3
The following tables were used by a shopkeeper to calculate the selling price of an item.
The shopkeeper buys products by the box.
The cost of the item is calculated by dividing the Box Cost by the Box Quantity.
The shopkeeper always wants the price to end in 99 pence.
Table 1 shows how just a normal division results in varying Item Costs.
Table 1
Item Box Qnty Box Cost Cost Per Item
Plugs 11 £20 1.81818 =D69/C69
Sockets 7 £18.25 2.60714 =D70/C70
Junctions 5 £28.10 5.62000 =D71/C71
Adapters 16 £28 1.75000 =D72/C72
Table 2 shows how the =CEILING() function has been used to raise the Item Cost to
always end in 99 pence.
Table 2
Item In Box Box Cost Cost Per Item Raised Cost
Plugs 11 £20 1.81818 1.99
Sockets 7 £18.25 2.60714 2.99
Junctions 5 £28.10 5.62000 5.99
Adapters 16 £28 1.75000 1.99
=INT(E83)+CEILING(MOD(E83,1),0.99)
Explanation
=INT(E83) Calculates the integer part of the price.
=MOD(E83,1) Calculates the decimal part of the price.
=CEILING(MOD(E83),0.99) Raises the decimal to 0.99
Units To
Be Moved
Truck
Capacity
Trucks
Needed
A B C D E F G H
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
CELL
Page 30 of 206
CELL
This is the cell and contents to test. 17.50%
The cell address. $D$3 =CELL("address",D3)
The column number. 4 =CELL("col",D3)
The row number. 3 =CELL("row",D3)
The actual contents of the cell. 0.18 =CELL("contents",D3)
v =CELL("type",D3)
=CELL("prefix",D3)
The width of the cell. 12 =CELL("width",D3)
P2 =CELL("format",D3)
0 =CELL("parentheses",D3)
0 =CELL("color",D3)
1 =CELL("protect",D3)
The filename containing the cell. 'file:///opt/scribd/conversion/tmp/scratch2509/41288993.xls'#$CELL
=CELL("filename",D3)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a cell and displays information about the contents, position and formatting.
Syntax
=CELL("TypeOfInfoRequired",CellToTest)
The TypeOfInfoRequired is a text entry which must be surrounded with quotes " ".
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Codes used to show the formatting of the cell.
Numeric Format Code
General G
0 F0
#,##0 ,0
0.00 F2
#,##0.00 ,2
$#,##0_);($#,##0) C0
$#,##0_);[Red]($#,##0) C0
$#,##0.00_);($#,##0.00) C2
$#,##0.00_);[Red]($#,##0.00) C2
0% P0
0.00% P2
0.00E+00 S2
# ?/? or # ??/?? G
m/d/yy or m/d/yy h:mm or mm/dd/yy. D4
dmmmyy or ddmmmyy D1
dmmm or ddmmm D2
mmmyy D3
mm/dd D5
h:mm AM/PM D7
h:mm:ss AM/PM D6
h:mm D9
h:mm:ss D8
Example
The following example uses the =CELL() function as part of a formula which extracts the filename.
The name of the current file is : #VALUE!
=MID(CELL("filename"),FIND("[",CELL("filename"))+1,FIND("]",CELL("filename"))FIND("[",CELL("filename"))1)
The type of entry in the cell.
Shown as b for blank, l for text, v for value.
The alignment of the cell.
Shown as ' for left, ^ for centre, " for right.
Nothing is shown for numeric entries.
The number format fo the cell.
(See the table shown below)
Formatted for braces ( ) on positive values.
1 for yes, 0 for no.
Formatted for coloured negatives.
1 for yes, 0 for no.
The type of cell protection.
1 for a locked, 0 for unlocked.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
CHAR
Page 31 of 206
CHAR
ANSI Number Character
65 A =CHAR(G4)
66 B =CHAR(G5)
169 © =CHAR(G6)
What Does It Do?
This function converts a normal number to the character it represent in the ANSI
character set used by Windows.
Syntax
=CHAR(Number)
The Number must be between 1 and 255.
Formatting
The result will be a character with no special formatting.
Example
The following is a list of all 255 numbers and the characters they represent.
Note that most Windows based program may not display some of the special characters,
these will be displayed as a small box.
1
1
26
2
51 3 76 L 101 e 126 ~ 151 ¯ 176 ° 201 É 226 â 251 û
2
2
27
2
52 4 77 M 102 f 127 152 ¯ 177 ± 202 Ê 227 ã 252 ü
3
3
28
2
53 5 78 N 103 g 128 153 a 178 ² 203 Ë 228 ä 253 ý
4
4
29
2
54 6 79 O 104 h 129 154 q 179 ³ 204 Ì 229 å 254 þ
5
5
30
3
55 7 80 P 105 i 130 Q 155 a 180 ´ 205 Í 230 æ 255 ÿ
6
6
31
3
56 8 81 Q 106 j 131 q 156 q 181 µ 206 Î 231 ç
7
7
32 57 9 82 R 107 k 132 o 157 182 ¶ 207 Ï 232 è
8
8
33 ! 58 : 83 S 108 l 133 m 158 183 · 208 Ð 233 é
9
9
34 " 59 ; 84 T 109 m 134 o 159 s 184 ¸ 209 Ñ 234 ê
10 35 # 60 < 85 U 110 n 135 æ 160 185 ¹ 210 Ò 235 ë
11
1
36 $ 61 = 86 V 111 o 136 q 161 ¡ 186 º 211 Ó 236 ì
12
1
37 % 62 > 87 W 112 p 137 o 162 ¢ 187 » 212 Ô 237 í
13
1
38 & 63 ? 88 X 113 q 138 d 163 £ 188 ¼ 213 Õ 238 î
14
1
39 ' 64 @ 89 Y 114 r 139 o 164 ¤ 189 ½ 214 Ö 239 ï
15
1
40 ( 65 A 90 Z 115 s 140 æ 165 ¥ 190 ¾ 215 × 240 ð
16
1
41 ) 66 B 91 [ 116 t 141 166 ¦ 191 ¿ 216 Ø 241 ñ
17
1
42 * 67 C 92 \ 117 u 142 167 § 192 À 217 Ù 242 ò
18
1
43 + 68 D 93 ] 118 v 143 168 ¨ 193 Á 218 Ú 243 ó
19
1
44 , 69 E 94 ^ 119 w 144 169 © 194 Â 219 Û 244 ô
20
2
45  70 F 95 _ 120 x 145 170 ª 195 Ã 220 Ü 245 õ
21
2
46 . 71 G 96 ` 121 y 146 171 « 196 Ä 221 Ý 246 ö
22
2
47 / 72 H 97 a 122 z 147 172 ¬ 197 Å 222 Þ 247 ÷
23
2
48 0 73 I 98 b 123 { 148 173 198 Æ 223 ß 248 ø
24
2
49 1 74 J 99 c 124  149 ¯ 174 ® 199 Ç 224 à 249 ù
25
2
50 2 75 K 100 d 125 } 150 ¯ 175 ¯ 200 È 225 á 250 ú
Note
Number 32 does not show as it is the SPACEBAR character.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
CHOOSE
Page 32 of 206
CHOOSE
Result
1 Alan =CHOOSE(C4,"Alan","Bob","Carol")
3 Carol =CHOOSE(C5,"Alan","Bob","Carol")
2 Bob =CHOOSE(C6,"Alan","Bob","Carol")
3 18% =CHOOSE(C7,10%,15%,18%)
1 10% =CHOOSE(C8,10%,15%,18%)
2 15% =CHOOSE(C9,10%,15%,18%)
What Does It Do?
This function picks from a list of options based upon an Index value given to by the user.
Syntax
=CHOOSE(UserValue, Item1, Item2, Item3 through to Item29)
Formatting
No special formatting is required.
Example
The following table was used to calculate the medals for athletes taking part in a race.
The Time for each athlete is entered.
The =RANK() function calculates the finishing position of each athlete.
The =CHOOSE() then allocates the correct medal.
The =IF() has been used to filter out any positions above 3, as this would cause
the error of #VALUE to appear, due to the fact the =CHOOSE() has only three items in it.
Name Time Position Medal
Alan 1:30 2 Silver =IF(D30<=3,CHOOSE(D30,"Gold","Silver","Bronze"),"unplaced")
Bob 1:15 4 unplaced =IF(D31<=3,CHOOSE(D31,"Gold","Silver","Bronze"),"unplaced")
Carol 2:45 1 Gold =IF(D32<=3,CHOOSE(D32,"Gold","Silver","Bronze"),"unplaced")
David 1:05 5 unplaced =IF(D33<=3,CHOOSE(D33,"Gold","Silver","Bronze"),"unplaced")
Eric 1:20 3 Bronze =IF(D34<=3,CHOOSE(D34,"Gold","Silver","Bronze"),"unplaced")
=RANK(C34,C30:C34)
Index
Value
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
CLEAN
Page 33 of 206
CLEAN
Dirty Text Clean Text
Hello Hello =CLEAN(C4)
Hello Hello =CLEAN(C5)
Hello Hello =CLEAN(C6)
What Does It Do?
This function removes any nonprintable characters from text.
These nonprinting characters are often found in data which has been imported
from other systems such as database imports from mainframes.
Syntax
=CLEAN(TextToBeCleaned)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed. The result will show as normal text.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
CODE
Page 34 of 206
CODE
Letter ANSI Code
A 65 =CODE(C4)
B 66 =CODE(C5)
C 67 =CODE(C6)
a 97 =CODE(C7)
b 98 =CODE(C8)
c 99 =CODE(C9)
Alan 65 =CODE(C10)
Bob 66 =CODE(C11)
Carol 67 =CODE(C12)
What Does It Do?
This function shows the ANSI value of a single character, or the first character in a piece
of text.
The ANSI character set is used by Windows to identify each keyboard character by using
a unique number.
There are 255 characters in the ANSI set.
Syntax
=CODE(Text)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed, the result will be shown as a number between 1 and 255.
Example
See the example for FREQUENCY.
1
1
26
2
51 3 76 L 101 e 126 ~ 151 — 176 ° 201 É 226 â 251 û
2
2
27
2
52 4 77 M 102 f 127 152 ˜ 177 ± 202 Ê 227 ã 252 ü
3
3
28
2
53 5 78 N 103 g 128 € 153 ™ 178 ² 203 Ë 228 ä 253 ý
4
4
29
2
54 6 79 O 104 h 129 154 š 179 ³ 204 Ì 229 å 254 þ
5
5
30
3
55 7 80 P 105 i 130 ‚ 155 › 180 ´ 205 Í 230 æ 255 ÿ
6
6
31
3
56 8 81 Q 106 j 131 ƒ 156 œ 181 µ 206 Î 231 ç
7
7
32 57 9 82 R 107 k 132 „ 157 182 ¶ 207 Ï 232 è
8
8
33 ! 58 : 83 S 108 l 133 … 158 ž 183 · 208 Ð 233 é
9
9
34 " 59 ; 84 T 109 m 134 † 159 Ÿ 184 ¸ 209 Ñ 234 ê
10
1
35 # 60 < 85 U 110 n 135 ‡ 160 185 ¹ 210 Ò 235 ë
11
1
36 $ 61 = 86 V 111 o 136 ˆ 161 ¡ 186 º 211 Ó 236 ì
12
1
37 % 62 > 87 W 112 p 137 ‰ 162 ¢ 187 » 212 Ô 237 í
13
1
38 & 63 ? 88 X 113 q 138 Š 163 £ 188 ¼ 213 Õ 238 î
14
1
39 ' 64 @ 89 Y 114 r 139 ‹ 164 ¤ 189 ½ 214 Ö 239 ï
15
1
40 ( 65 A 90 Z 115 s 140 Œ 165 ¥ 190 ¾ 215 × 240 ð
16
1
41 ) 66 B 91 [ 116 t 141 166 ¦ 191 ¿ 216 Ø 241 ñ
17
1
42 * 67 C 92 \ 117 u 142 Ž 167 § 192 À 217 Ù 242 ò
18
1
43 + 68 D 93 ] 118 v 143 168 ¨ 193 Á 218 Ú 243 ó
19
1
44 , 69 E 94 ^ 119 w 144 169 © 194 Â 219 Û 244 ô
20
2
45  70 F 95 _ 120 x 145 ‘ 170 ª 195 Ã 220 Ü 245 õ
21
2
46 . 71 G 96 ` 121 y 146 ’ 171 « 196 Ä 221 Ý 246 ö
22
2
47 / 72 H 97 a 122 z 147 “ 172 ¬ 197 Å 222 Þ 247 ÷
23
2
48 0 73 I 98 b 123 { 148 ” 173  198 Æ 223 ß 248 ø
24
2
49 1 74 J 99 c 124  149 • 174 ® 199 Ç 224 à 249 ù
25
2
50 2 75 K 100 d 125 } 150 – 175 ¯ 200 È 225 á 250 ú
A B C D E F G H I J K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
COMBIN
Page 35 of 206
COMBIN
Pool Of Items Items In A Group Possible Groups
4 2 6 =COMBIN(C4,D4)
4 3 4 =COMBIN(C5,D5)
26 2 325 =COMBIN(C6,D6)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the highest number of combinations available based upon
a fixed number of items.
The internal order of the combination does not matter, so AB is the same as BA.
Syntax
=COMBIN(HowManyItems,GroupSize)
Formatting
No special formatting is required.
Example 1
This example calculates the possible number of pairs of letters available
from the four characters ABCD.
Total Characters Group Size Combinations
4 2 6 =COMBIN(C25,D25)
The proof ! The four letters : ABCD
Pair 1 AB
Pair 2 AC
Pair 3 AD
Pair 4 BC
Pair 5 BD
Pair 6 CD
Example 2
A decorator is asked to design a colour scheme for a new office.
The decorator is given five colours to work with, but can only use three in any scheme.
How many colours schemes can be created ?
Available Colours Colours Per Scheme Totals Schemes
5 3 10 =COMBIN(C41,D41)
The colours
Red
Green
Blue
Yellow
Black
Scheme 1 Scheme 2 Scheme 3 Scheme 4 Scheme 5
Red Red Red Red Red
Green Green Green Blue Blue
Blue Yellow Black Yellow Black
Scheme 6 Scheme 7 Scheme 8 Scheme 9 Scheme 10
Green Green Green Blue ??????
A B C D E F G
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
COMBIN
Page 36 of 206
Blue Blue Yellow Yellow
Yellow Black Black Black
A B C D E F G
57
58
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
CONCATENATE
Page 37 of 206
CONCATENATE
Name 1 Name 2 Concatenated Text
Alan Jones AlanJones =CONCATENATE(C4,D4)
Bob Williams BobWilliams =CONCATENATE(C5,D5)
Carol Davies CarolDavies =CONCATENATE(C6,D6)
Alan Jones Alan Jones =CONCATENATE(C7," ",D7)
Bob Williams Williams, Bob =CONCATENATE(D8,", ",C8)
Carol Davies Davies, Carol =CONCATENATE(D9,", ",C9)
What Does It Do?
This function joins separate pieces of text into one item.
Syntax
=CONCATENATE(Text1,Text2,Text3...Text30)
Up to thirty pieces of text can be joined.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed, the result will be shown as normal text.
Note
Name 1 Name 2 Concatenated Text
Alan Jones AlanJones =C25&D25
Bob Williams BobWilliams =C26&D26
Carol Davies CarolDavies =C27&D27
Alan Jones Alan Jones =C28&" "&D28
Bob Williams Williams, Bob =D29&", "&C29
Carol Davies Davies, Carol =D30&", "&C30
You can achieve the same result by using the & operator.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
CONVERT
Page 38 of 206
CONVERT
1 in cm 2.54 =CONVERT(C4,D4,E4)
1 ft m 0.3 =CONVERT(C5,D5,E5)
1 yd m 0.91 =CONVERT(C6,D6,E6)
1 yr day 365.25 =CONVERT(C8,D8,E8)
1 day hr 24 =CONVERT(C9,D9,E9)
1.5 hr mn 90 =CONVERT(C10,D10,E10)
0.5 mn sec 30 =CONVERT(C11,D11,E11)
What Does It Do ?
This function converts a value measure in one type of unit, to the same value expressed
in a different type of unit, such as Inches to Centimetres.
Syntax
=CONVERT(AmountToConvert,UnitToConvertFrom,UnitToConvertTo)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used by an Import / Exporting company to convert the weight
and size of packages from old style UK measuring system to European system.
Pounds Ounces Kilograms
Weight 5 3 2.35
=CONVERT(D28,"lbm","kg")+CONVERT(E28,"ozm","kg")
Feet Inches Metres
Height 12 6 3.81
Length 8 3 2.51
Width 5 2 1.57
=CONVERT(D34,"ft","m")+CONVERT(E34,"in","m")
Abbreviations
This is a list of all the possible abbreviations which can be used to denote measuring systems.
Weight & Mass Distance
Gram g Meter m
Kilogram kg Statute mile mi
Slug sg Nautical mile Nmi
Pound mass lbm Inch in
U (atomic mass) u Foot ft
Ounce mass ozm Yard yd
Angstrom ang
Time Pica (1/72 in.) Pica
Year yr
Day day Pressure
Hour hr Pascal Pa
Minute mn Atmosphere atm
Second sec mm of Mercury mmHg
Amount
To Convert
Converting
From
Converting
To
Converted
Amount
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
CONVERT
Page 39 of 206
Temperature Liquid
Degree Celsius C Teaspoon tsp
Degree Fahrenheit F Tablespoon tbs
Degree Kelvin K Fluid ounce oz
Cup cup
Force Pint pt
Newton N Quart qt
Dyne dyn Gallon gal
Pound force lbf Liter l
Energy Power
Joule J Horsepower HP
Erg e Watt W
c
IT calorie cal Magnetism
Electron volt eV Tesla T
Horsepowerhour HPh Gauss ga
Watthour Wh
Footpound flb
BTU BTU
These characters can be used as a prefix to access further units of measure.
Prefix Multiplier Abbreviation Prefix Multiplier Abbreviation
exa 1.00E+18 E deci 1.00E01 d
peta 1.00E+15 P centi 1.00E02 c
tera 1.00E+12 T milli 1.00E03 m
giga 1.00E+09 G micro 1.00E06 u
mega 1.00E+06 M nano 1.00E09 n
kilo 1.00E+03 k pico 1.00E12 p
hecto 1.00E+02 h femto 1.00E15 f
dekao 1.00E+01 e atto 1.00E18 a
Thermodynamic
calorie
Using "c" as a prefix to meters "m" will allow centimetres "cm" to be calculated.
A B C D E F G H
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
CORREL
Page 40 of 206
CORREL
Table 1 Table 2
Month Avg Temp Sales
Jan 20 100 £2,000 £20,000
Feb 30 200 £1,000 £30,000
Mar 30 300 £5,000 £20,000
Apr 40 200 £1,000 £40,000
May 50 400 £8,000 £40,000
Jun 50 400 £1,000 £20,000
Correlation 0.864 Correlation 28%
=CORREL(D5:D10,E5:E10) =CORREL(G5:G10,H5:H10)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines two sets of data to determine the degree of relationship
between the two sets.
The result will be a decimal between 0 and 1.
The larger the result, the greater the correlation.
In Table 1 the Monthly temperature is compared against the Sales of air conditioning units.
The correlation shows that there is an 0.864 realtionship between the data.
In Table 2 the Cost of advertising has been compared to Sales.
It can be formatted as percentage % to show a more meaning full result.
The correlation shows that there is an 28% realtionship between the data.
Syntax
=CORREL(Range1,Range2)
Formatting
The result will normally be shown in decimal format.
Air Cond
Sales
Advertising
Costs
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
COUNT
Page 41 of 206
COUNT
Entries To Be Counted Count
10 20 30 3 =COUNT(C4:E4)
10 0 30 3 =COUNT(C5:E5)
10 20 30 3 =COUNT(C6:E6)
10 1Jan88 30 3 =COUNT(C7:E7)
10 21:30 30 3 =COUNT(C8:E8)
10 0.75 30 3 =COUNT(C9:E9)
10 30 2 =COUNT(C10:E10)
10 Hello 30 2 =COUNT(C11:E11)
10 #DIV/0! 30 2 =COUNT(C12:E12)
What Does It Do ?
This function counts the number of numeric entries in a list.
It will ignore blanks, text and errors.
Syntax
=COUNT(Range1,Range2,Range3... through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used by a builders merchant to calculate the number of sales
for various products in each month.
Item Jan Feb Mar
Bricks £1,000
Wood £5,000
Glass £2,000 £1,000
Metal £1,000
Count 3 2 0
=COUNT(D29:D32)
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
COUNTA
Page 42 of 206
COUNTA
Entries To Be Counted Count
10 20 30 3 =COUNTA(C4:E4)
10 0 30 3 =COUNTA(C5:E5)
10 20 30 3 =COUNTA(C6:E6)
10 1Jan88 30 3 =COUNTA(C7:E7)
10 21:30 30 3 =COUNTA(C8:E8)
10 0.72 30 3 =COUNTA(C9:E9)
10 30 2 =COUNTA(C10:E10)
10 Hello 30 3 =COUNTA(C11:E11)
10 #DIV/0! 30 3 =COUNTA(C12:E12)
What Does It Do ?
This function counts the number of numeric or text entries in a list.
It will ignore blanks.
Syntax
=COUNTA(Range1,Range2,Range3... through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used by a school to keep track of the examinations taken by each pupil.
Each exam passed was graded as 1, 2 or 3.
A failure was entered as Fail.
The school needed to known how many pupils sat each exam.
The school also needed to know how many exams were taken by each pupil.
The =COUNTA() function has been used because of its ability to count text and numeric entries.
Maths English Art History
Alan Fail 1 2
Bob 2 1 3 3
Carol 1 1 1 3
David Fail Fail 2
Elaine 1 3 2 Fail 4
=COUNTA(D39:G39)
How many pupils sat each Exam.
Maths English Art History
4 3 5 2
=COUNTA(D35:D39)
Exams Taken
By Each Pupil
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
COUNTBLANK
Page 43 of 206
COUNTBLANK
Range To Test Blanks
1 2 =COUNTBLANK(C4:C11)
Hello
3
0
1Jan98
5
What Does It Do ?
This function counts the number of blank cells in a range.
Syntax
=COUNTBLANK(RangeToTest)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used by a company which was balloting its workers on whether
the company should have a no smoking policy.
Each of the departments in the various factories were questioned.
The response to the question could be Y or N.
As the results of the vote were collated they were entered in to the table.
The =COUNTBLANK() function has been used to calculate the number of departments which
have no yet registered a vote.
Admin Accounts Production Personnel
Factory 1 Y N
Factory 2 Y Y N
Factory 3
Factory 4 N N N
Factory 5 Y Y
Factory 6 Y Y Y N
Factory 7 N Y
Factory 8 N N Y Y
Factory 9 Y
Factory 10 Y N Y
Votes not vet registered : 16 =COUNTBLANK(C32:F41)
Votes for Yes : 14 =COUNTIF(C32:F41,"Y")
Votes for No : 10 =COUNTIF(C32:F41,"N")
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
COUNTIF
Page 44 of 206
COUNTIF
Item Date Cost
Brakes 1Jan98 80
Tyres 10May98 25
Brakes 1Feb98 80
Service 1Mar98 150
Service 5Jan98 300
Window 1Jun98 50
Tyres 1Apr98 200
Tyres 1Mar98 100
Clutch 1May98 250
How many Brake Shoes Have been bought. 2 =COUNTIF(C4:C12,"Brakes")
How many Tyres have been bought. 3 =COUNTIF(C4:C12,"Tyres")
How many items cost £100 or above. 5 =COUNTIF(E4:E12,">=100")
Type the name of the item to count. service 2 =COUNTIF(C4:C12,E18)
What Does It Do ?
This function counts the number of items which match criteria set by the user.
Syntax
=COUNTIF(RangeOfThingsToBeCounted,CriteriaToBeMatched)
The criteria can be typed in any of the following ways.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
To match a specific number type the number, such as =COUNTIF(A1:A5,100)
To match a piece of text type the text in quotes, such as =COUNTIF(A1:A5,"Hello")
To match using operators surround the expression with quotes, such as =COUNTIF(A1:A5,">100")
A B C D E F G
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DATE
Page 45 of 206
DATE
Day Month Year Date
25 12 99 12/25/99 =DATE(E4,D4,C4)
25 12 99 25Dec99 =DATE(E5,D5,C5)
33 12 99 January 2, 2000 =DATE(E6,D6,C6)
What Does It Do?
This function creates a real date by using three normal numbers typed into separate cells.
Syntax
=DATE(year,month,day)
Formatting
The result will normally be displayed in the dd/mm/yy format.
By using the Format,Cells,Number,Date command the format can be changed.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DATEDIF
Page 46 of 206
DATEDIF
FirstDate SecondDate Interval Difference
1Jan60 10May70 days #NAME? =DATEDIF(C4,D4,"d")
1Jan60 10May70 months #NAME? =DATEDIF(C5,D5,"m")
1Jan60 10May70 years #NAME? =DATEDIF(C6,D6,"y")
1Jan60 10May70 yeardays #NAME? =DATEDIF(C7,D7,"yd")
1Jan60 10May70 yearmonths #NAME? =DATEDIF(C8,D8,"ym")
1Jan60 10May70 monthdays #NAME? =DATEDIF(C9,D9,"md")
What Does It Do?
This function calculates the difference between two dates.
It can show the result in weeks, months or years.
Syntax
=DATEDIF(FirstDate,SecondDate,"Interval")
FirstDate : This is the earliest of the two dates.
SecondDate : This is the most recent of the two dates.
"Interval" : This indicates what you want to calculate.
These are the available intervals.
"d" Days between the two dates.
"m" Months between the two dates.
"y" Years between the two dates.
"yd" Days between the dates, as if the dates were in the same year.
"ym" Months between the dates, as if the dates were in the same year.
"md" Days between the two dates, as if the dates were in the same month and year.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Birth date : 1Jan60
Years lived : #NAME? =DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"y")
and the months : #NAME? =DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"ym")
and the days : #NAME? =DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"md")
You can put this all together in one calculation, which creates a text version.
#NAME?
="Age is "&DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"y")&" Years, "&DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"ym")&" Months and "&DATEDIF(C8,TODAY(),"md")&" Days"
A B C D E F G H I J K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DATEVALUE
Page 47 of 206
DATEVALUE
Date Date Value
25dec99 36519 =DATEVALUE(C4)
25/12/99 Err:502 =DATEVALUE(C5)
25dec99 36519 =DATEVALUE(C6)
25/12/99 Err:502 =DATEVALUE(C7)
What Does It Do?
The function is used to convert a piece of text into a date which can be used in calculations.
Dates expressed as text are often created when data is imported from other programs, such as
exports from mainframe computers.
Syntax
=DATEVALUE(text)
Formatting
The result will normally be shown as a number which represents the date. This number can
be formatted to any of the normal date formats by using Format,Cells,Number,Date.
Example
The example uses the =DATEVALUE and the =TODAY functions to calculate the number of
days remaining on a property lease.
The =DATEVALUE function was used because the date has been entered in the cell as
a piece of text, probably after being imported from an external program.
Property Ref. Expiry Date
BC100 25dec99 3936
FG700 10july/99 Err:502
TD200 13sep98 4404
HJ900 30/5/2000 Err:502
=DATEVALUE(E32)TODAY()
Days Until
Expiry
A B C D E F G
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DAVERAGE
Page 48 of 206
DAVERAGE
Product Wattage Brand Unit Cost
Bulb 200 3000 Horizon £4.50 4 3 £54.00
Neon 100 2000 Horizon £2.00 15 2 £60.00
Spot 60 £0.00
Other 10 8000 Sunbeam £0.80 25 6 £120.00
Bulb 80 1000 Horizon £0.20 40 3 £24.00
Spot 100 unknown Horizon £1.25 10 4 £50.00
Spot 200 3000 Horizon £2.50 15 0 £0.00
Other 25 unknown Sunbeam £0.50 10 3 £15.00
Bulb 200 3000 Sunbeam £5.00 3 2 £30.00
Neon 100 2000 Sunbeam £1.80 20 5 £180.00
Bulb 100 unknown Sunbeam £0.25 10 5 £12.50
Bulb 10 800 Horizon £0.20 25 2 £10.00
Bulb 60 1000 Sunbeam £0.15 25 0 £0.00
Bulb 80 1000 Sunbeam £0.20 30 2 £12.00
Bulb 100 2000 Horizon £0.80 10 5 £40.00
Bulb 40 1000 Horizon £0.10 20 5 £10.00
To calculate the Average cost of a particular Brand of bulb.
Brand
Type the brand name : sunbeam
The Average cost of sunbeam is : £1.24 =DAVERAGE(B3:I19,F3,E23:E24)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a list of information and produces and average.
Syntax
=DAVERAGE(DatabaseRange,FieldName,CriteriaRange)
field names at the top of the columns.
The first set of information is the name, or names, of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis
for selecting the records, such as the category Brand or Wattage.
The second set of information is the actual record, or records, which are to be selected, such
as Horizon as a brand name, or 100 as the wattage.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Examples
The average Unit Cost of a particular Product of a particular Brand.
Product Brand
Bulb Horizon
This is the Database range.
Life
Hours
Box
Quantity
Boxes In
Stock
Value Of
Stock
These two cells are the Criteria range.
The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine, including the
The FieldName is the name, or cell, of the values to be averaged, such as "Unit Cost" or F3.
The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DAVERAGE
Page 49 of 206
The average of Horizon Bulb is : £1.16 =DAVERAGE(B3:I19,F3,E49:F50)
This is the same calculation but using the actual name "Unit Cost" instead of the cell address.
£1.16 =DAVERAGE(B3:I19,"Unit Cost",E49:F50)
The average Unit Cost of a Bulb equal to a particular Wattage.
Product Wattage
Bulb 100
Average of Bulb 100 is : £0.53 =DAVERAGE(B3:I19,"Unit Cost",E60:F61)
The average Unit Cost of a Bulb less then a particular Wattage.
Product Wattage
Bulb <100
Average of Bulb <100 is : £0.17 =DAVERAGE(B3:I19,"Unit Cost",E67:F68)
A B C D E F G H I J
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DAY
Page 50 of 206
DAY
Full Date The Day
25Dec98 25 =DAY(C4)
4Oct10 Wed 3 =DAY(C5)
4Oct10 4 =DAY(C6)
What Does It Do?
This function extracts the day of the month from a complete date.
Syntax
=DAY(value)
Formatting
Normally the result will be a number, but this can be formatted to show the actual
day of the week by using Format,Cells,Number,Custom and using the code ddd or dddd.
Example
The =DAY function has been used to calculate the name of the day for your birthday.
Please enter your date of birth in the format dd/mm/yy : 3/25/1962
You were born on : Wednesday 24 =DAY(F21)
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DAYS360
Page 51 of 206
DAYS360
StartDate EndDate Days Between * See the Note below.
1Jan98 5Jan98 4 =DAYS360(C4,D4,TRUE)
1Jan98 1Feb98 30 =DAYS360(C5,D5,TRUE)
1Jan98 31Mar98 89 =DAYS360(C6,D6,TRUE)
1Jan98 31Dec98 359 =DAYS360(C7,D7,TRUE)
What Does It Do?
Shows the number of days between two dates based on a 360day year (twelve 30day months).
Use this function if your accounting system is based on twelve 30day months.
Syntax
=DAYS360(StartDate,EndDate,TRUE of FALSE)
TRUE : Use this for European accounting systems.
FALSE : Use this for USA accounting systems.
Formatting
The result will be shown as a number.
Note
The calculation does not include the last day. The result of using 1Jan98 and 5Jan98 will
give a result of 4. To correct this add 1 to the result. =DAYS360(Start,End,TRUE)+1
A B C D E F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DB
Page 52 of 206
DB
Purchase Price : £5,000
Life in Years : 5
Salvage value : £200
Year Deprecation
1 £2,375.00 =DB(E3,E5,E4,D8)
2 £1,246.88 =DB(E3,E5,E4,D9)
3 £654.61 =DB(E3,E5,E4,D10)
4 £343.67 =DB(E3,E5,E4,D11)
5 £180.43 =DB(E3,E5,E4,D12)
Total Depreciation : £4,800.58 * See example 4 below.
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates deprecation based upon a fixed percentage.
The first year is depreciated by the fixed percentage.
The second year uses the same percentage, but uses the original value of the item less
the first years depreciation.
Any subsequent years use the same percentage, using the original value of the item less
the depreciation of the previous years.
The percentage used in the depreciation is not set by the user, the function calculates
the necessary percentage, which will be vary based upon the values inputted by the user.
An additional feature of this function is the ability to take into account when the item was
originally purchased.
If the item was purchased part way through the financial year, the first years depreciation
will be based on the remaining part of the year.
Syntax
=DB(PurchasePrice,SalvageValue,Life,PeriodToCalculate,FirstYearMonth)
The FirstYearMonth is the month in which the item was purchased during the
first financial year. This is an optional value, if it not used the function will assume 12 as
the value.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example 1
This example shows the percentage used in the depreciation.
Year 1 depreciation is based upon the original Purchase Price alone.
Year 2 depreciation is based upon the original Purchase Price minus Year 1 deprecation.
Year 3 deprecation is based upon original Purchase Price minus Year 1 + Year 2 deprecation.
The % Deprc has been calculated purely to demonstrate what % is being used.
Purchase Price : £5,000
Salvage value : £1,000
Life in Years : 5
Year Deprecation % Deprc
1 £1,375.00 27.50%
2 £996.88 27.50%
3 £722.73 27.50%
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DB
Page 53 of 206
4 £523.98 27.50%
5 £379.89 27.50%
=DB(E47,E48,E49,D56)
Total Depreciation : £3,998.48
Example 2
This example is similar to the previous, with the exception of the deprecation being calculated
on a monthly basis. This has been done by multiplying the years by 12.
Purchase Price : £5,000
Life in Years : £5
Salvage value : 100
Month Deprecation
56 £8.79
57 £8.24
58 £7.72
59 £7.23
60 £6.78
=DB(E66,E68,E67*12,D75)
Example 3
This example shows how the length of the first years ownership has been taken into account.
Purchase Price : £5,000
Life in Years : 5
Salvage value : £1,000
First Year Ownership In Months : 6
Year Deprecation % Deprc
1 £687.50 13.75%
2 £1,185.94 27.50%
3 £859.80 27.50%
4 £623.36 27.50%
5 £451.93 27.50%
=DB(E74,E76,E75,D84,E77)
Total Depreciation : £3,808.54
Why Is The Answer Wrong ?
In all of the examples above the total depreceation may not be exactly the expected value.
This is due to the way in which the percentage value for the depreceation has been calculated
by the =DB() fumction.
The percentage rate is calculated by Execl using the formula = 1  ((salvage / cost) ^ (1 / life)).
The result of this calculation is then rounded to three decimal places.
Although this rounding may only make a minor change to the percentage rate, when applied
to large values, the differnce is compounded resulting in what could be considered as
approximate values for the the depreceation.
Example 4
A B C D E F G H I
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DB
Page 54 of 206
This example has been created with both the Excel calculated percentage and the 'real'
percentage calculated manually.
The Excel Deprecation uses the =DB() function.
The Real Deprecation uses a manual calculation.
This is the 'real' deprecation percentage, calculated manually : 27.522034%
=1((E117/E116)^(1/E118))
Purchase Price : £5,000 = 1  ((salvage / cost) ^ (1 / life)).
Salvage value : £1,000
Life in Years : 5
Year
1 £1,375.0000 £1,376.1017 27.500%
2 £996.8750 £997.3705 27.500%
3 £722.7344 £722.8739 27.500%
4 £523.9824 £523.9243 27.500%
5 £379.8873 £379.7297 27.500%
Total Depreciation : £3,998.48 £4,000.00
Error difference : £1.52
Excel
Deprecation
Real
Depreciation
Excel
% Deprc
A B C D E F G H I
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DCOUNT
Page 55 of 206
DCOUNT
Product Wattage Brand Unit Cost
Bulb 200 3000 Horizon £4.50 4 3 £54.00
Neon 100 2000 Horizon £2.00 15 2 £60.00
Spot 60 £0.00
Other 10 8000 Sunbeam £0.80 25 6 £120.00
Bulb 80 1000 Horizon £0.20 40 3 £24.00
Spot 100 unknown Horizon £1.25 10 4 £50.00
Spot 200 3000 Horizon £2.50 15 1 £37.50
Other 25 unknown Sunbeam £0.50 10 3 £15.00
Bulb 200 3000 Sunbeam £5.00 3 2 £30.00
Neon 100 2000 Sunbeam £1.80 20 5 £180.00
Bulb 100 unknown Sunbeam £0.25 10 5 £12.50
Bulb 10 800 Horizon £0.20 25 2 £10.00
Bulb 60 1000 Sunbeam £0.15 25 1 £3.75
Bulb 80 1000 Sunbeam £0.20 30 2 £12.00
Bulb 100 2000 Horizon £0.80 10 5 £40.00
Bulb 40 1000 Horizon £0.10 20 5 £10.00
Count the number of products of a particular Brand which have a Life Hours rating.
Brand
Type the brand name : Horizon
The COUNT value of Horizon is : 7 =DCOUNT(B3:I19,D3,E23:E24)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a list of information and counts the values in a specified column.
It can only count values, the text items and blank cells are ignored.
Syntax
=DCOUNT(DatabaseRange,FieldName,CriteriaRange)
field names at the top of the columns.
The first set of information is the name, or names, of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis
for selecting the records, such as the category Brand or Wattage.
The second set of information is the actual record, or records, which are to be selected, such
as Horizon as a brand name, or 100 as the wattage.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Examples
The count of a particular product, with a specific number of boxes in stock.
This is the Database range.
Life
Hours
Box
Quantity
Boxes In
Stock
Value Of
Stock
These two cells are the Criteria range.
The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine, including the
The FieldName is the name, or cell, of the values to Count, such as "Value Of Stock" or I3.
The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DCOUNT
Page 56 of 206
Product
Bulb 5
The number of products is : 3 =DCOUNT(B3:I19,H3,E50:F51)
This is the same calculation but using the name "Boxes In Stock" instead of the cell address.
3 =DCOUNT(B3:I19,"Boxes In Stock",E50:F51)
The count of the number of Bulb products equal to a particular Wattage.
Product Wattage
Bulb 100
The count is : 2 =DCOUNT(B3:I19,"Boxes In Stock",E61:F62)
The count of Bulb products between two Wattage values.
Product Wattage Wattage
Bulb >=80 <=100
The count is : 4 =DCOUNT(B3:I19,"Boxes In Stock",E68:G69)
Boxes In
Stock
A B C D E F G H I J
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DCOUNTA
Page 57 of 206
DCOUNTA
Product Wattage Brand Unit Cost
Bulb 200 3000 Horizon £4.50 4 3 £54.00
Neon 100 2000 Horizon £2.00 15 2 £60.00
Spot 60 £0.00
Other 10 8000 Sunbeam £0.80 25 6 £120.00
Bulb 80 1000 Horizon £0.20 40 3 £24.00
Spot 100 unknown Horizon £1.25 10 4 £50.00
Spot 200 3000 Horizon £2.50 15 1 £37.50
Other 25 unknown Sunbeam £0.50 10 3 £15.00
Bulb 200 3000 Sunbeam £5.00 3 2 £30.00
Neon 100 2000 Sunbeam £1.80 20 5 £180.00
Bulb 100 unknown Sunbeam £0.25 10 5 £12.50
Bulb 10 800 Horizon £0.20 25 2 £10.00
Bulb 60 1000 Sunbeam £0.15 25 1 £3.75
Bulb 80 1000 Sunbeam £0.20 30 2 £12.00
Bulb 100 2000 Horizon £0.80 10 5 £40.00
Bulb 40 1000 Horizon £0.10 20 5 £10.00
Count the number of products of a particular Brand.
Brand
Type the brand name : Horizon
The COUNT value of Horizon is : 8 =DCOUNTA(B3:I19,E3,E23:E24)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a list of information and counts the non blank cells in a specified column.
It counts values and text items, but blank cells are ignored.
Syntax
=DCOUNTA(DatabaseRange,FieldName,CriteriaRange)
field names at the top of the columns.
The first set of information is the name, or names, of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis
for selecting the records, such as the category Brand or Wattage.
The second set of information is the actual record, or records, which are to be selected, such
as Horizon as a brand name, or 100 as the wattage.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Examples
The count of a product with an unknown Life Hours value.
This is the Database range.
Life
Hours
Box
Quantity
Boxes In
Stock
Value Of
Stock
These two cells are the Criteria range.
The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine, including the
The FieldName is the name, or cell, of the values to Count, such as "Value Of Stock" or I3.
The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DCOUNTA
Page 58 of 206
Product Life Hours
Bulb unknown
The number of products is : 1 =DCOUNTA(B3:I19,D3,E50:F51)
This is the same calculation but using the name "Life Hours" instead of the cell address.
1 =DCOUNTA(B3:I19,"Life Hours",E50:F51)
The count of the number of particular product of a specific brand.
Product Brand
Bulb Horizon
The count is : 5 =DCOUNTA(B3:I19,"Product",E61:F62)
The count of particular products from specific brands.
Product Brand
Spot Horizon
Neon Sunbeam
The count is : 3 =DCOUNTA(B3:I19,"Product",E68:F70)
A B C D E F G H I J
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DEC2BIN
Page 59 of 206
DEC2BIN
Decimal Number Binary Equivalent
0 0 =DEC2BIN(C4)
1 1 =DEC2BIN(C5)
2 10 =DEC2BIN(C6)
3 11 =DEC2BIN(C7)
511 111111111 =DEC2BIN(C8)
512 Err:502 =DEC2BIN(C9)
1 1111111111 =DEC2BIN(C10)
2 1111111110 =DEC2BIN(C11)
3 1111111101 =DEC2BIN(C12)
511 1000000001 =DEC2BIN(C13)
512 1000000000 =DEC2BIN(C14)
Decimal Number Places To Pad Binary Equivalent
1 1 1 =DEC2BIN(C17,D17)
1 2 01 =DEC2BIN(C18,D18)
1 3 001 =DEC2BIN(C19,D19)
1 9 000000001 =DEC2BIN(C20,D20)
1 1 1111111111 =DEC2BIN(C21,D21)
What Does It Do ?
This function converts a decimal number to its binary equivalent.
It can only cope with decimals ranging from 512 to 511.
The result can be padded with leading 0 zeros, although this is ignored for negatives.
Syntax
=DEC2BIN(DecimalNumber,PlacesToPad)
The PlacesToPad is optional.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DEC2HEX
Page 60 of 206
DEC2HEX
Decimal Number Hexadecimal
0 0 =DEC2HEX(C4)
1 1 =DEC2HEX(C5)
2 2 =DEC2HEX(C6)
3 3 =DEC2HEX(C7)
25 19 =DEC2HEX(C8)
26 1A =DEC2HEX(C9)
27 1B =DEC2HEX(C10)
28 1C =DEC2HEX(C11)
1 FFFFFFFFFF =DEC2HEX(C12)
2 FFFFFFFFFE =DEC2HEX(C13)
3 FFFFFFFFFD =DEC2HEX(C14)
2 FFFFFFFFFE =DEC2HEX(C15)
1 FFFFFFFFFF =DEC2HEX(C16)
549,755,813,887 7FFFFFFFFF =DEC2HEX(C17)
549,755,813,888 8000000000 =DEC2HEX(C18)
549,755,813,888 8000000000 =DEC2HEX(C19)
549,755,813,889 7FFFFFFFFF =DEC2HEX(C20)
Decimal Number Places To Pad Hexadecimal
1 1 1 =DEC2HEX(C23,D23)
1 2 01 =DEC2HEX(C24,D24)
26 3 01A =DEC2HEX(C25,D25)
26 9 00000001A =DEC2HEX(C26,D26)
26 1 FFFFFFFFE6 =DEC2HEX(C27,D27)
What Does It Do ?
This function converts a decimal number to its hexadecimal equivalent.
It can only cope with decimals ranging from 549,755,813,888 to 549,755,813,887.
The result can be padded with leading 0 zeros, although this is ignored for negatives.
Syntax
=DEC2HEX(DecimalNumber,PlacesToPad)
The PlacesToPad is optional.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DELTA
Page 61 of 206
DELTA
Number1 Number2 Delta
10 20 0 =DELTA(C4,D4)
50 50 1 =DELTA(C5,D5)
17.5 17.5 1 =DELTA(C6,D6)
17.5 18 1 =DELTA(C7,D7)
17.50% 0.18 1 =DELTA(C8,D8)
Hello Hello Err:502 =DELTA(C9,D9)
1 =DELTA(C10,D10)
What Does It Do ?
This function compares two values and tests whether they are exactly the same.
If the numbers are the same the result will be 1, otherwise the result is 0.
It only works with numbers, text values produce a result of #VALUE.
The formatting of the number is not significant, so numbers which appear rounded due
to the removal of decimal places will still match correctly with non rounded values.
Syntax
=DELTA(FirstNumber,SecondNumber)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table is used to determine how may pairs of similar numbers are in a list.
The =DELTA() function tests each pair and then the =SUM() function totals them.
Number1 Number2 Delta
10 20 0 =DELTA(C30,D30)
50 50 1 =DELTA(C31,D31)
30 30 1 =DELTA(C32,D32)
17.5 18 1 =DELTA(C33,D33)
12 8 0 =DELTA(C34,D34)
100 100 1 =DELTA(C35,D35)
150 125 0 =DELTA(C36,D36)
Total Pairs 4 =SUM(E30:E36)
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DGET
Page 62 of 206
DGET
Product Wattage Brand Unit Cost
Bulb 200 3000 Horizon £4.50 4 3 £54.00
Neon 100 2000 Horizon £2.00 15 2 £60.00
Spot 60 £0.00
Other 10 8000 Sunbeam £0.80 25 6 £120.00
Bulb 80 1000 Horizon £0.20 40 3 £24.00
Spot 100 unknown Horizon £1.25 10 4 £50.00
Spot 200 3000 Horizon £2.50 15 1 £37.50
Other 25 unknown Sunbeam £0.50 10 3 £15.00
Bulb 200 3000 Sunbeam £5.00 3 2 £30.00
Neon 100 2000 Sunbeam £1.80 20 5 £180.00
Bulb 100 unknown Sunbeam £0.25 10 5 £12.50
Bulb 10 800 Horizon £0.20 25 2 £10.00
Bulb 60 1000 Sunbeam £0.15 25 1 £3.75
Bulb 80 1000 Sunbeam £0.20 30 2 £12.00
Bulb 100 2000 Horizon £0.80 10 5 £40.00
Bulb 40 1000 Horizon £0.10 20 5 £10.00
How many boxes of a particular item do we have in stock?
Product Wattage Brand
Bulb 100 Horizon
The number in stock is : 5 =DGET(B3:I19,H3,C23:F24)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a list of information and produces one result.
If more than one record matches the criteria the error #NUM is shown.
If no records match the criteria the error #VALUE is shown.
Syntax
=DGET(DatabaseRange,FieldName,CriteriaRange)
field names at the top of the columns.
The first set of information is the name, or names, of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis
for selecting the records, such as the category Brand or Wattage.
The second set of information is the actual record which needs to be selected, such
as Horizon as a brand name, or 100 as the wattage.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example 1
This example extracts information from just one record.
How many boxes of a particular item do we have in stock?
This is the Database range.
Life
Hours
Box
Quantity
Boxes In
Stock
Value Of
Stock
Life
Hours
The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine, including the
The FieldName is the name, or cell, of the values to Get, such as "Value Of Stock" or I3.
The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DGET
Page 63 of 206
Product Wattage Brand
Bulb 100 Horizon
The number in stock is : 5 =DGET(B3:I19,H3,C51:F52)
Example 2
How many boxes of a particular item do we have in stock?
Product Wattage Brand
Bulb 100
The number in stock is : Err:502 =DGET(B3:I19,H3,C63:F64)
Example 3
This example extracts information from no records and therefore shows the #VALUE error.
How many boxes of a particular item do we have in stock?
Product Wattage Brand
Bulb 9999
The number in stock is : #VALUE! =DGET(B3:I19,H3,C64:F65)
Example 4
This example uses the =IF() function to display a message when an error occurs.
How many boxes of a particular item do we have in stock?
Product Wattage Brand
Bulb 9999
The number in stock is : #VALUE! =DGET(B3:I19,H3,C85:F86)
Err:502
=IF(ISERR(F88),CHOOSE(ERROR.TYPE(F88)/3,"No such product.","Duplicates products found."),"One product found.")
Life
Hours
This example extracts information from multiple records and therefore shows the #NUM error.
Life
Hours
Life
Hours
Life
Hours
A B C D E F G H I J
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DMAX
Page 64 of 206
DMAX
Product Wattage Brand Unit Cost
Bulb 200 3000 Horizon £4.50 4 3 £54.00
Neon 100 2000 Horizon £2.00 15 2 £60.00
Spot 60 £0.00
Other 10 8000 Sunbeam £0.80 25 6 £120.00
Bulb 80 1000 Horizon £0.20 40 3 £24.00
Spot 100 unknown Horizon £1.25 10 4 £50.00
Spot 200 3000 Horizon £2.50 15 0 £0.00
Other 25 unknown Sunbeam £0.50 10 3 £15.00
Bulb 200 3000 Sunbeam £5.00 3 2 £30.00
Neon 100 2000 Sunbeam £1.80 20 5 £180.00
Bulb 100 unknown Sunbeam £0.25 10 5 £12.50
Bulb 10 800 Horizon £0.20 25 2 £10.00
Bulb 60 1000 Sunbeam £0.15 25 0 £0.00
Bulb 80 1000 Sunbeam £0.20 30 2 £12.00
Bulb 100 2000 Horizon £0.80 10 5 £40.00
Bulb 40 1000 Horizon £0.10 20 5 £10.00
To calculate largest Value Of Stock of a particular Brand of bulb.
Brand
Type the brand name : Horizon
The MAX value of Horizon is : £60.00 =DMAX(B3:I19,I3,E23:E24)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a list of information and produces the largest value from a specified column.
Syntax
=DMAX(DatabaseRange,FieldName,CriteriaRange)
field names at the top of the columns.
The first set of information is the name, or names, of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis
for selecting the records, such as the category Brand or Wattage.
The second set of information is the actual record, or records, which are to be selected, such
as Horizon as a brand name, or 100 as the wattage.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Examples
The largest Value Of Stock of a particular Product of a particular Brand.
Product Brand
Bulb sunbeam
The largest value is : £30.00 =DMAX(B3:I19,I3,E49:F50)
This is the same calculation but using the name "Value Of Stock" instead of the cell address.
£30.00 =DMAX(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E49:F50)
This is the Database range.
Life
Hours
Box
Quantity
Boxes In
Stock
Value Of
Stock
These two cells are the Criteria range.
The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine, including the
The FieldName is the name or cell, of the values to pick the Max from, such as "Value Of Stock" or I3.
The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.
A B C D E F G H I J K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DMAX
Page 65 of 206
The largest Value Of Stock of a Bulb equal to a particular Wattage.
Product Wattage
Bulb 100
The largest Value Of Stock is : £40.00 =DMAX(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E60:F61)
The largest Value Of Stock of a Bulb less than a particular Wattage.
Product Wattage
Bulb <100
The largest Value Of Stock is : £24.00 =DMAX(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E67:F68)
A B C D E F G H I J K
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DMIN
Page 66 of 206
DMIN
Product Wattage Brand Unit Cost
Bulb 200 3000 Horizon £4.50 4 3 £54.00
Neon 100 2000 Horizon £2.00 15 2 £60.00
Spot 60 £0.00
Other 10 8000 Sunbeam £0.80 25 6 £120.00
Bulb 80 1000 Horizon £0.20 40 3 £24.00
Spot 100 unknown Horizon £1.25 10 4 £50.00
Spot 200 3000 Horizon £2.50 15 1 £37.50
Other 25 unknown Sunbeam £0.50 10 3 £15.00
Bulb 200 3000 Sunbeam £5.00 3 2 £30.00
Neon 100 2000 Sunbeam £1.80 20 5 £180.00
Bulb 100 unknown Sunbeam £0.25 10 5 £12.50
Bulb 10 800 Horizon £0.20 25 2 £10.00
Bulb 60 1000 Sunbeam £0.15 25 1 £3.75
Bulb 80 1000 Sunbeam £0.20 30 2 £12.00
Bulb 100 2000 Horizon £0.80 10 5 £40.00
Bulb 40 1000 Horizon £0.10 20 5 £10.00
To calculate lowest Value Of Stock of a particular Brand of bulb.
Brand
Type the brand name : Horizon
The MIN value of Horizon is : £10.00 =DMIN(B3:I19,I3,E23:E24)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a list of information and produces smallest value from a specified column.
Syntax
=DMIN(DatabaseRange,FieldName,CriteriaRange)
field names at the top of the columns.
The first set of information is the name, or names, of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis
for selecting the records, such as the category Brand or Wattage.
The second set of information is the actual record, or records, which are to be selected, such
as Horizon as a brand name, or 100 as the wattage.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Examples
The lowest Value Of Stock of a particular Product of a particular Brand.
Product Brand
Bulb sunbeam
The lowest value is : £3.75 =DMIN(B3:I19,I3,E49:F50)
This is the same calculation but using the name "Value Of Stock" instead of the cell address.
£3.75 =DMIN(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E49:F50)
This is the Database range.
Life
Hours
Box
Quantity
Boxes In
Stock
Value Of
Stock
These two cells are the Criteria range.
The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine, including the
The FieldName is the name, or cell, of the values to pick the Min from, such as "Value Of Stock" or I3.
The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.
A B C D E F G H I J K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DMIN
Page 67 of 206
The lowest Value Of Stock of a Bulb equal to a particular Wattage.
Product Wattage
Bulb 100
The lowest Value Of Stock is : £12.50 =DMIN(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E60:F61)
The lowest Value Of Stock of a Bulb between two Wattage values.
Product Wattage Wattage
Bulb >=80 <=100
The lowest Value Of Stock is : £12.00 =DMIN(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E67:G68)
A B C D E F G H I J K
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DOLLAR
Page 68 of 206
DOLLAR
10 $10.00 =DOLLAR(C4)
10 $10 =DOLLAR(C5,0)
10 $10.0 =DOLLAR(C6,1)
10 $10.00 =DOLLAR(C7,2)
10.25 $10.25 =DOLLAR(C8)
10.25 $10 =DOLLAR(C9,0)
10.25 $10.3 =DOLLAR(C10,1)
10.25 $10.25 =DOLLAR(C11,2)
What Does It Do?
This function converts a number into a piece of text formatted as currency.
Syntax
=DOLLAR(Number,DecimalPlaces)
Number : This is the number which needs to be converted.
DecimalPlaces : This is the amount of decimal places needed in the converted number.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
The result will be shown as a text entry.
Original
Number
Converted
To Text
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DSUM
Page 69 of 206
DSUM
Product Wattage Brand Unit Cost
Bulb 200 3000 Horizon £4.50 4 3 £54.00
Neon 100 2000 Horizon £2.00 15 2 £60.00
Spot 60 £0.00
Other 10 8000 Sunbeam £0.80 25 6 £120.00
Bulb 80 1000 Horizon £0.20 40 3 £24.00
Spot 100 unknown Horizon £1.25 10 4 £50.00
Spot 200 3000 Horizon £2.50 15 0 £0.00
Other 25 unknown Sunbeam £0.50 10 3 £15.00
Bulb 200 3000 Sunbeam £5.00 3 2 £30.00
Neon 100 2000 Sunbeam £1.80 20 5 £180.00
Bulb 100 unknown Sunbeam £0.25 10 5 £12.50
Bulb 10 800 Horizon £0.20 25 2 £10.00
Bulb 60 1000 Sunbeam £0.15 25 0 £0.00
Bulb 80 1000 Sunbeam £0.20 30 2 £12.00
Bulb 100 2000 Horizon £0.80 10 5 £40.00
Bulb 40 1000 Horizon £0.10 20 5 £10.00
To calculate the total Value Of Stock of a particular Brand of bulb.
Brand
Type the brand name : Horizon
The stock value of Horizon is : £248.00 =DSUM(B3:I19,I3,E23:E24)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a list of information and produces the total.
Syntax
=DSUM(DatabaseRange,FieldName,CriteriaRange)
field names at the top of the columns.
The first set of information is the name, or names, of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis
for selecting the records, such as the category Brand or Wattage.
The second set of information is the actual record, or records, which are to be selected, such
as Horizon as a brand name, or 100 as the wattage.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Examples
The total Value Of Stock of a particular Product of a particular Brand.
Product Brand
Bulb sunbeam
This is the Database range.
Life
Hours
Box
Quantity
Boxes In
Stock
Value Of
Stock
These two cells are the Criteria range.
The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine, including the
The FieldName is the name, or cell, of the values to be totalled, such as "Value Of Stock" or I3.
The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
DSUM
Page 70 of 206
Total stock value is : £54.50 =DSUM(B3:I19,I3,E49:F50)
This is the same calculation but using the name "Value Of Stock" instead of the cell address.
£54.50 =DSUM(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E49:F50)
The total Value Of Stock of a Bulb equal to a particular Wattage.
Product Wattage
Bulb 100
Total Value Of Stock is : £52.50 =DSUM(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E60:F61)
The total Value Of Stock of a Bulb less than a particular Wattage.
Product Wattage
Bulb <100
Total Value Of Stock is : £56.00 =DSUM(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E67:F68)
A B C D E F G H I J
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
EAST
Page 71 of 206
Eastern data.
Used by the example for the =INDIRECT() function.
Jan Feb Mar Total
Alan 1000 2000 3000 6000
Bob 4000 5000 6000 15000
Carol 7000 8000 9000 24000
Total 12000 15000 18000 45000
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
EDATE
Page 72 of 206
EDATE
Start Date Plus Months End Date
1Jan98 3 1Apr98 =EDATE(C4,D4)
2Jan98 3 2Apr98 =EDATE(C5,D5)
2Jan98 3 2Oct97 =EDATE(C6,D6)
What Does It Do?
This function is used to calculate a date which is a specific number of months in the past or
in the future.
Syntax
=EDATE(StartDate,Months)
Formatting
The result will normally be expressed as a number, this can be formatted to represent
a date by using the Format,Cells,Number,Date command.
Example
This example was used by a company hiring contract staff.
The company needed to know the end date of the employment.
The Start date is entered.
The contract Duration is entered as months.
The =EDATE() function has been used to calculate the end of the contract.
Start Duration End
Tue 06Jan98 3 Mon 06Apr98 =EDATE(C27,D27)
Mon 12Jan98 3 Sun 12Apr98 =EDATE(C28,D28)
Fri 09Jan98 4 Sat 09May98 =EDATE(C29,D29)
Fri 09Jan98 3 Thu 09Apr98 =EDATE(C30,D30)
Mon 19Jan98 3 Sun 19Apr98 =EDATE(C31,D31)
Mon 26Jan98 3 Sun 26Apr98 =EDATE(C32,D32)
Mon 12Jan98 3 Sun 12Apr98 =EDATE(C33,D33)
The company decide not to end contracts on Saturday or Sunday.
The =WEEKDAY() function has been used to identify the actaul weekday number of the end date.
If the week day number is 6 or 7, (Sat or Sun), then 5 is subtracted from the =EDATE() to
ensure the end of contract falls on a Friday.
Start Duration End
Tue 06Jan98 3 Mon 06Apr98
Mon 12Jan98 3 Fri 10Apr98
Fri 09Jan98 4 Fri 08May98
Fri 09Jan98 3 Thu 09Apr98
Mon 19Jan98 3 Fri 17Apr98
Mon 26Jan98 3 Fri 24Apr98
Mon 12Jan98 3 Fri 10Apr98
=EDATE(C48,D48)IF(WEEKDAY(EDATE(C48,D48),2)>5,WEEKDAY(EDATE(C48,D48),2)5,0)
A B C D E F G
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
EOMONTH
Page 73 of 206
EOMONTH
StartDate Plus Months End Of Month
5Jan98 2 35885 =EOMONTH(C4,D4)
5Jan98 2 31Mar98 =EOMONTH(C5,D5)
5Jan98 2 30Nov97 =EOMONTH(C6,D6)
What Does It Do?
This function will show the last day of the month which is a specified number of months
before or after a given date.
Syntax
=EOMONTH(StartDate,Months)
Formatting
The result will normally be expressed as a number, this can be formatted to represent
a date by using the Format,Cells,Number,Date command.
A B C D E F G
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ERROR.TYPE
Page 74 of 206
ERROR.TYPE
Data The Error Error Type
10 0 #DIV/0! 532 =ERROR.TYPE(E4)
10 3 Err:508 508 =ERROR.TYPE(E5)
10 3 #VALUE! 519 =ERROR.TYPE(E6)
10:00 13:00 21:00 #N/A =ERROR.TYPE(E7)
What Does It Do?
This function will show a number which corresponds to an error produced by a formula.
Syntax
=ERROR.TYPE(Error)
Error is the cell reference where the error occurred.
Formatting
The result will be formatted as a normal number.
Example
See Example 4 in the =DGET() function.
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
EVEN
Page 75 of 206
EVEN
Original Value Evenly Rounded
1 2 =EVEN(C4)
1.2 2 =EVEN(C5)
2.3 4 =EVEN(C6)
25 26 =EVEN(C7)
What Does It Do ?
This function round a number up the nearest even whole number.
Syntax
=EVEN(Number)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table is used by a garage which repairs cars.
The garage is repairing a fleet of cars from three manufactures.
Each manufacturer uses a different type of windscreen wiper which are only supplied in pairs.
Table 1 was used to enter the number of wipers required for each type of car
and then show how many pairs need to be ordered.
Table 1
Car Wipers To Order Pairs to Order
Vauxhall 5 3 =EVEN(D28)/2
Ford 9 5 =EVEN(D29)/2
Peugeot 7 4 =EVEN(D30)/2
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
EXACT
Page 76 of 206
EXACT
Text1 Text2 Result
Hello Hello TRUE =EXACT(C4,D4)
Hello hello FALSE =EXACT(C5,D5)
Hello Goodbye FALSE =EXACT(C6,D6)
What Does It Do?
This function compares two items of text and determine whether they are exactly the same.
The case of the characters is taken into account, only words which are spelt the same and
which have upper and lower case characters in the same position will be considered as equal.
Syntax
=EXACT(Text1,Text2)
Only two items of text can be compared.
Formatting
If the two items of text are exactly the same the result of TRUE will be shown.
If there is any difference in the two items of text the result of FALSE will be shown.
Example
Here is a simple password checking formula.
You need to guess the correct password.
The password is the name of a colour, either red blue or green.
The case of the password is important.
The =EXACT() function is used to check your guess.
Guess the password : red
Is it correct : No
(To stop you from cheating, the correct password has been entered as a series of =CHAR()
functions, which use the ANSI number of the characters rather than the character itself!)
Its still very easy though.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FACT
Page 77 of 206
FACT
Number Factorial
3 6 =FACT(C4)
3.5 6 =FACT(C5)
5 120 =FACT(C6)
10 3,628,800 =FACT(C7)
20 2,432,902,008,176,640,000 =FACT(C8)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the factorial of a number.
The factorial is calculated as 1*2*3*4..etc.
The factorial of 5 is calculated as 1*2*3*4*5, which results in 120.
Decimal fractions of the number are ignored.
Syntax
=FACT(Number)
Formatting.
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FIND
Page 78 of 206
FIND
Text Letter To Find Position Of Letter
Hello e 2 =FIND(D4,C4)
Hello H 1 =FIND(D5,C5)
Hello o 5 =FIND(D6,C6)
Alan Williams a 3 =FIND(D7,C7)
Alan Williams a 11 =FIND(D8,C8,6)
Alan Williams T #VALUE! =FIND(D9,C9)
What Does It Do?
This function looks for a specified letter inside another piece of text.
When the letter is found the position is shown as a number.
If the text contains more than one reference to the letter, the first occurrence is used.
An additional option can be used to start the search at a specific point in the text, thus
enabling the search to find duplicate occurrences of the letter.
If the letter is not found in the text, the result #VALUE is shown.
Syntax
=FIND(LetterToLookFor,TextToLookInside,StartPosition)
LetterToLookFor : This needs to be a single character.
TextToLookInside : This is the piece of text to be searched through.
StartPosition : This is optional, it specifies at which point in the text the search should begin.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed, the result will be shown as a number.
A B C D E F G
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FIXED
Page 79 of 206
FIXED
10 10.00 =FIXED(C4)
10 10 =FIXED(C5,0)
10 10.0 =FIXED(C6,1)
10 10.00 =FIXED(C7,2)
10.25 10.25 =FIXED(C8)
10.25 10 =FIXED(C9,0)
10.25 10.3 =FIXED(C10,1)
10.25 10.25 =FIXED(C11,2)
1000 1,000.00 =FIXED(C12)
1000.23 1,000 =FIXED(C13,0)
1000.23 1000 =FIXED(C14,0,TRUE)
What Does It Do ?
This function converts a numeric value to text.
During the conversion the value can be rounded to a specific number of decimal places,
and commas can be inserted at the 1,000's.
Syntax
=FIXED(NumberToConvert,DecimalPlaces,Commas)
If DecimalPlaces places is not specified the function will assume 2.
The Commas option can be TRUE for commas or FALSE for no commas.
If the Commas is not specified the function will assume TRUE.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Note that any further formatting with the Format, Cells, Number command will not have any effect.
Original
Number
Converted
To Text
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FLOOR
Page 80 of 206
FLOOR
Number Rounded Down
1.5 1 =FLOOR(C4,1)
2.3 2 =FLOOR(C5,1)
2.9 2 =FLOOR(C6,1)
123 100 =FLOOR(C7,50)
145 100 =FLOOR(C8,50)
175 150 =FLOOR(C9,50)
What Does It Do ?
This function rounds a value down to the nearest multiple specified by the user.
Syntax
=FLOOR(NumberToRound,SignificantValue)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used to calculate commission for members of a sales team.
Commission is only paid for every £1000 of sales.
The =FLOOR() function has been used to round down the Actual Sales to the
nearest 1000, which is then used as the basis for Commission.
Name Actual Sales Relevant Sales Commission
Alan £23,500 £23,000 £230
Bob £56,890 £56,000 £560
Carol £18,125 £18,000 £180
=FLOOR(D29,1000)
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FORECAST
Page 81 of 206
FORECAST
Month Sales
1 £1,000
2 £2,000
3 £2,500
4 £3,500
5 £3,800
6 £4,000
Type the month number to predict : 12
The Forecast sales figure is : £7,997 =FORECAST(E11,F4:F9,E4:E9)
What Does It Do ?
This function uses two sets of values to predict a single value.
The predicted value is based on the relationship between the two original sets of values.
If the values are sales figures for months 1 to 6, (Jan to Jun), you can use the function
to predict what the sales figure will be in any other month.
The way in which the prediction is calculated is based upon the assumption of a Linear Trend.
Syntax
=FORECAST(ItemToForeCast,RangeY,RangeX)
ItemToForecast is the point in the future, (or past), for which you need the forecast.
RangeY is the list of values which contain the historical data to be used as the basis
of the forecast, such as Sales figures.
RangeX is the intervals used when recording the historical data, such as Month number.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used by a company considering expansion of their sales team.
The Size and Performance of the previous teams over a period of three years were entered.
The size of the New Sales team is entered.
The =FORECAST() function is used to calculate the predicted performance for the new sales
team based upon a linear trend.
Year
1996 10 £5,000
1997 20 £8,000
1998 30 £8,500
Size Of The New Sales Team : 40
Estimated Forecast Of Performance : £10,667 =FORECAST(E43,E39:E41,D39:D41)
Size Of
Sales Team
Known
Performance
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FREQUENCY
Page 82 of 206
FREQUENCY
Jan Feb Mar
North £5,000 £6,000 £4,500
South £5,800 £7,000 £3,000
East £3,500 £2,000 £10,000
West £12,000 £4,000 £6,000
Sales £4,000 and below. £4,000 4 {=FREQUENCY(D4:F7,E9:E11)}
Sales above £4,000 up to £6,000 £6,000 5 {=FREQUENCY(D4:F7,E9:E11)}
Sales above £6,000 £999,999 3 {=FREQUENCY(D4:F7,E9:E11)}
What Does It Do ?
This function compares a range of data against a list of intervals.
The result shows how many items in the range of data fall between the intervals.
The function is entered in the cells as an array, that is why it is enclosed in { } braces.
Syntax
=FREQUENCY(RangeOfData,ListOfIntervals)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example 1
The following tables were used to record the weight of a group of children.
The =FREQUENCY() function was then used to calculate the number of children whose
weights fell between specified intervals.
Weight Kg Number Of Children:
Child 1 20.47 Between 0  15 Kg 2
Child 2 22.83 Above 15 but less than or equal to 20 Kg 4
Child 3 15.74 Above 20 Kg 3
Child 4 10.80 {=FREQUENCY(C30:C38,C41:C43)}
Child 5 8.28 {=FREQUENCY(C30:C38,C41:C43)}
Child 6 20.66 {=FREQUENCY(C30:C38,C41:C43)}
Child 7 17.36
Child 8 16.67
Child 9 18.01
Kg Weight Intervals
15
20
100
Example 2
This example uses characters instead of values.
A restaurant has asked 40 customers for their rating of the food in the restaurant.
The ratings were entered into a table as a single letter, E, V, A, P or D.
The manager now wants to calculate how many responses fell into each category.
Unfortunately, the =FREQUENCY() function ignores text entries, so how can the frequency
of text be calculated?
The answer is to use the =CODE() and =UPPER() functions.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FREQUENCY
Page 83 of 206
The =UPPER() forces all the text entries to be considered as capital letters.
The =CODE() function calculates the unique ANSI code for each character.
As this code is a numeric value, the =FREQUENCY() function can then be used!
Rating Frequency
Excellent E 6 {=FREQUENCY(CODE(UPPER(B67:I71)),CODE(UPPER(C60:C64)))}
Very Good V 8 {=FREQUENCY(CODE(UPPER(B67:I71)),CODE(UPPER(C60:C64)))}
Average A 9 {=FREQUENCY(CODE(UPPER(B67:I71)),CODE(UPPER(C60:C64)))}
Poor P 8 {=FREQUENCY(CODE(UPPER(B67:I71)),CODE(UPPER(C60:C64)))}
Disgusting D 9 {=FREQUENCY(CODE(UPPER(B67:I71)),CODE(UPPER(C60:C64)))}
Customer Ratings
V D V A p A D D
V P a D A P V d
A V E P p E D A
A E d V D P a E
V e P P A V E D
A B C D E F G H I
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FREQUENCY 2
Page 84 of 206
FREQUENCY 2
This example shows how the =FREQUENCY() function has been used to calculate
how often certain numbers appear in the Lottery results.
Table 1 is a record of all the results from the past seven weeks.
Table 1
Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7
1st Number 3 36 5 3 2 41 45
2nd Number 6 3 19 37 23 15 4
3rd Number 15 44 35 20 47 29 44
4th Number 32 15 32 46 6 45 23
5th Number 37 31 13 22 49 13 43
6th Number 5 22 30 8 49 11 46
Bonus Ball 17 13 15 25 18 17 1
Table 2 is the list of possible number from 1 to 49, and how many appearances
each number has made during the past seven weeks.
Table 2
1 1 {=FREQUENCY(C10:I16,B24:B72)}
2 1 {=FREQUENCY(C10:I16,B24:B72)}
3 3 {=FREQUENCY(C10:I16,B24:B72)}
4 1 {=FREQUENCY(C10:I16,B24:B72)}
5 2
6 2
7 0
8 1
9 0 Special tip!
10 0 To count how many unique numbers in a range
11 1 use the following formula. It has to be entered,
12 0 as an array, so press Ctrl+Shift+Enter rather than,
13 3 just Enter alone.
14 0
15 4 Unique values. 31
16 0
17 2 =SUM(1/COUNTIF(C10:I16,C10:I16))
18 1
19 1
20 1
21 0
22 2
23 2
24 0
25 1
26 0
27 0
28 0
29 1
Lottery
Number
How Many
Appearances
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
FREQUENCY 2
Page 85 of 206
30 1
31 1
32 2
33 0
34 0
35 1
36 1
37 2
38 0
39 0
40 0
41 1
42 0
43 1
44 2
45 2
46 2
47 1
48 0
49 2
A B C D E F G H I
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
GCD
Page 86 of 206
GCD
Numbers
6 15 3 =GCD(C4,D4)
28 49 7 =GCD(C5,D5)
5 99 1 =GCD(C6,D6)
Numbers
18 72 96 6 =GCD(C9,D9,E9)
300 500 200 100 =GCD(C10,D10,E10)
2.5 4 6 0.5 =GCD(C11,D11,E11)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the largest number which can be used to divided all the
values specified.
The result is always a whole number.
Where there is no common divisor the value of 1 is used.
Decimal fractions are ignored.
Syntax
=GCD(Number1,Number2,Number3... through to Number29)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Greatest
Divisor
Greatest
Divisor
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
GESTEP
Page 87 of 206
GESTEP
Number1 Number2 GESTEP
10 20 0 =GESTEP(C4,D4)
50 20 1 =GESTEP(C5,D5)
99 100 0 =GESTEP(C6,D6)
100 100 1 =GESTEP(C7,D7)
101 100 1 =GESTEP(C8,D8)
2 1 =GESTEP(C9,D9)
2 0 =GESTEP(C10,D10)
What Does It Do ?
This function test a number to see if it is greater than or equal to another number.
If the number is greater than or equal, the result of 1 will be shown, otherwise 0 is shown.
Syntax
=GESTEP(NumberToTest,NumberToTestAgainst)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used to calculate how many sales staff achieved their targets.
The =GESTEP() function compares the Sales with Target, and the results are totalled.
Name Sales Target GESTEP
Alan £3,000 £4,000 0 =GESTEP(D27,E27)
Bob £5,000 £4,000 1 =GESTEP(D28,E28)
Carol £1,000 £2,000 0 =GESTEP(D29,E29)
David £2,000 £2,000 1 =GESTEP(D30,E30)
Eric £8,000 £7,000 1 =GESTEP(D31,E31)
Targets Achieved 3 =SUM(F27:F31)
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
HEX2DEC
Page 88 of 206
HEX2DEC
Hexadecimal Decimal Number
0 0 =HEX2DEC(C4)
1 1 =HEX2DEC(C5)
2 2 =HEX2DEC(C6)
3 3 =HEX2DEC(C7)
1A 26 =HEX2DEC(C8)
1B 27 =HEX2DEC(C9)
7FFFFFFFFF 549,755,813,887 =HEX2DEC(C10)
8000000000 549,755,813,888 =HEX2DEC(C11)
FFFFFFFFFF 1 =HEX2DEC(C12)
FFFFFFFFFE 2 =HEX2DEC(C13)
FFFFFFFFFD 3 =HEX2DEC(C14)
What Does It Do ?
This function converts a hexadecimal number to its decimal equivalent.
Syntax
=HEX2DEC(HexaDecimalNumber)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used to add two hexadecimal values together.
Hexadecimal
Value 1 F
Value 2 1A
Result 29 =DEC2HEX(HEX2DEC(C29)+HEX2DEC(C30))
A B C D E F G
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
HLOOKUP
Page 89 of 206
HLOOKUP
Jan Feb Mar row 1 The row numbers are not needed.
10 80 97 row 2 they are part of the illustration.
20 90 69 row 3
30 100 45 row 4
40 110 51 row 5
50 120 77 row 6
Type a month to look for : Feb
Which row needs to be picked out : 4
The result is : 100 =HLOOKUP(F10,D3:F10,F11,FALSE)
What Does It Do ?
This function scans across the column headings at the top of a table to find a specified item.
When the item is found, it then scans down the column to pick a cell entry.
Syntax
=HLOOKUP(ItemToFind,RangeToLookIn,RowToPickFrom,SortedOrUnsorted)
The ItemToFind is a single item specified by the user.
The RangeToLookIn is the range of data with the column headings at the top.
The RowToPickFrom is how far down the column the function should look to pick from.
The Sorted/Unsorted is whether the column headings are sorted. TRUE for yes, FALSE for no.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example 1
This table is used to find a value based on a specified month and name.
The =HLOOKUP() is used to scan across to find the month.
The problem arises when we need to scan down to find the row adjacent to the name.
To solve the problem the =MATCH() function is used.
The =MATCH() looks through the list of names to find the name we require. It then calculates
the position of the name in the list. Unfortunately, because the list of names is not as deep
as the lookup range, the =MATCH() number is 1 less than we require, so and extra 1 is
added to compensate.
The =HLOOKUP() now uses this =MATCH() number to look down the month column and
picks out the correct cell entry.
The =HLOOKUP() uses FALSE at the end of the function to indicate to Excel that the
column headings are not sorted, even though to us the order of Jan,Feb,Mar is correct.
Jan Feb Mar
Bob 10 80 97
Eric 20 90 69
Alan 30 100 45
Carol 40 110 51
David 50 120 77
Type a month to look for : feb
If they were sorted alphabetically they would have read as Feb,Jan,Mar.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
HLOOKUP
Page 90 of 206
Type a name to look for : alan
The result is : 100
=HLOOKUP(F54,D47:F54,MATCH(F55,C48:C52,0)+1,FALSE)
Example 2
This example shows how the =HLOOKUP() is used to pick the cost of a spare part for
different makes of cars.
The =HLOOKUP() scans the column headings for the make of car specified in column B.
When the make is found, the =HLOOKUP() then looks down the column to the row specified
by the =MATCH() function, which scans the list of spares for the item specified in column C.
The function uses the absolute ranges indicated by the dollar symbol $. This ensures that
when the formula is copied to more cells, the ranges for =HLOOKUP() and =MATCH() do
not change.
Maker Spare Cost
Vauxhall Ignition £50 Vauxhall Ford VW
VW GearBox £600 GearBox 500 450 600
Ford Engine £1,200 Engine 1000 1200 800
VW Steering £275 Steering 250 350 275
Ford Ignition £70 Ignition 50 70 45
Ford CYHead £290 CYHead 300 290 310
Vauxhall GearBox £500
Ford Engine £1,200
=HLOOKUP(B79,G72:I77,MATCH(C79,F73:F77,0)+1,FALSE)
Example 3
In the following example a builders merchant is offering discount on large orders.
The Unit Cost Table holds the cost of 1 unit of Brick, Wood and Glass.
The Discount Table holds the various discounts for different quantities of each product.
The Orders Table is used to enter the orders and calculate the Total.
All the calculations take place in the Orders Table.
The name of the Item is typed in column C.
The Unit Cost of the item is then looked up in the Unit Cost Table.
The FALSE option has been used at the end of the function to indicate that the product
names across the top of the Unit Cost Table are not sorted.
Using the FALSE option forces the function to search for an exact match. If a match is
not found, the function will produce an error.
=HLOOKUP(C127,E111:G112,2,FALSE)
The discount is then looked up in the Discount Table
If the Quantity Ordered matches a value at the top of the Discount Table the =HLOOKUP will
look down the column to find the correct discount.
The TRUE option has been used at the end of the function to indicate that the values
across the top of the Discount Table are sorted.
Using TRUE will allow the function to make an approximate match. If the Quantity Ordered does
not match a value at the top of the Discount Table, the next lowest value is used.
Trying to match an order of 125 will drop down to 100, and the discount from
the 100 column is used.
=HLOOKUP(D127,E115:G118,MATCH(C127,D116:D118,0)+1,TRUE)
A B C D E F G H I J
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
HLOOKUP
Page 91 of 206
Unit Cost Table
Brick Wood Glass
£2 £1 £3
Discount Table
1 100 300
Brick 0% 6% 8%
Wood 0% 3% 5%
Glass 0% 12% 15%
Orders Table
Item Units Unit Cost Discount Total
Brick 100 £2 6% £188
Wood 200 £1 3% £194
Glass 150 £3 12% £396
Brick 225 £2 6% £423
Wood 50 £1 0% £50
Glass 500 £3 15% £1,275
Unit Cost =HLOOKUP(C127,E111:G112,2,FALSE)
Discount =HLOOKUP(D127,E115:G118,MATCH(C127,D116:D118,0)+1,TRUE)
A B C D E F G H I J
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
HOUR
Page 92 of 206
HOUR
Number Hour
21:15 21 =HOUR(C4)
0.25 6 =HOUR(C5)
What Does It Do?
The function will show the hour of the day based upon a time or a number.
Syntax
=HOUR(Number)
Formatting
The result will be shown as a normal number between 0 and 23.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
IF
Page 93 of 206
IF
Name Sales Target Result
Alan 1000 5000 Not Achieved =IF(C4>=D4,"Achieved","Not Achieved")
Bob 6000 5000 Achieved =IF(C5>=D5,"Achieved","Not Achieved")
Carol 2000 4000 Not Achieved =IF(C6>=D6,"Achieved","Not Achieved")
What Does It Do?
This function tests a condition.
If the condition is met it is considered to be TRUE.
If the condition is not met it is considered as FALSE.
Depending upon the result, one of two actions will be carried out.
Syntax
=IF(Condition,ActionIfTrue,ActionIfFalse)
The Condition is usually a test of two cells, such as A1=A2.
The ActionIfTrue and ActionIfFalse can be numbers, text or calculations.
Formatting
No special formatting is required.
Example 1
The following table shows the Sales figures and Targets for sales reps.
Each has their own target which they must reach.
The =IF() function is used to compare the Sales with the Target.
If the Sales are greater than or equal to the Target the result of Achieved is shown.
If the Sales do not reach the target the result of Not Achieved is shown.
Note that the text used in the =IF() function needs to be placed in double quotes "Achieved".
Name Sales Target Result
Alan 1000 5000 Not Achieved =IF(C31>=D31,"Achieved","Not Achieved")
Bob 6000 5000 Achieved =IF(C32>=D32,"Achieved","Not Achieved")
Carol 2000 4000 Not Achieved =IF(C33>=D33,"Achieved","Not Achieved")
Example 2
The following table is similar to that in Example 1.
This time the Commission to be paid to the sales rep is calculated.
If the Sales are greater than or equal to the Target, the Commission is 10% of Sales.
If the Sales do not reach Target, the Commission is only 5% of Sales.
Name Sales Target Commission
Alan 1000 5000 50 =IF(C43>=D43,C43*10%,C43*5%)
Bob 6000 5000 600 =IF(C44>=D44,C44*10%,C44*5%)
Carol 2000 4000 100 =IF(C45>=D45,C45*10%,C45*5%)
Example 3
This example uses the =AND() within the =IF() function.
A builders merchant gives 10% discount on certain product lines.
The discount is only given on products which are on Special Offer, when the Order Value
is £1000 or above.
the value of the order is above £1000.
Special Order
Product Offer Value Discount Total
Wood Yes £2,000 £200 £1,800
The =AND() function is used with the =IF() to check that the product is on offer and that
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
IF
Page 94 of 206
Glass No £2,000 £ £2,000
Cement Yes £500 £ £500
Turf Yes £3,000 £300 £2,700
=IF(AND(C61="Yes",D61>=1000),D61*10%,0)
A B C D E F G H I J
59
60
61
62
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
INDEX
Page 95 of 206
INDEX
Holiday booking price list.
People
Weeks 1 2 3 4
1 £500 £300 £250 £200
2 £600 £400 £300 £250
3 £700 £500 £350 £300
How many weeks required : 2
How many people in the party : 4
Cost per person is : 250 =INDEX(D7:G9,G11,G12)
What Does It Do ?
This function picks a value from a range of data by looking down a specified number
of rows and then across a specified number of columns.
It can be used with a single block of data, or noncontinuos blocks.
Syntax
There are various forms of syntax for this function.
Syntax 1
=INDEX(RangeToLookIn,Coordinate)
This is used when the RangeToLookIn is either a single column or row.
The Coordinate indicates how far down or across to look when picking the data from the range.
Both of the examples below use the same syntax, but the Coordinate refers to a row when
the range is vertical and a column when the range is horizontal.
Colours
Red
Green
Blue Size Large Medium Small
Type either 1, 2 or 3 : 2 Type either 1, 2 or 3 : 2
The colour is : Green The size is : Medium
=INDEX(D32:D34,D36) =INDEX(G34:I34,H36)
Syntax 2
=INDEX(RangeToLookIn,RowCoordinate,ColumnColumnCordinate)
This syntax is used when the range is made up of rows and columns.
Country Currency Population Capitol
England Sterling 50 M London
France Franc 40 M Paris
Germany DM 60 M Bonn
Spain Peseta 30 M Barcelona
Type 1,2,3 or 4 for the country : 2
Type 1,2 or 3 for statistics : 3
The result is : Paris =INDEX(D45:F48,F50,F51)
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
INDEX
Page 96 of 206
Syntax 3
=INDEX(NamedRangeToLookIn,RowCoordinate,ColumnColumnCordinate,AreaToPickFrom)
Using this syntax the range to look in can be made up of multiple areas.
The easiest way to refer to these areas is to select them and give them a single name.
The AreaToPickFrom indicates which of the multiple areas should be used.
In the following example the figures for North and South have been named as one
range called NorthAndSouth.
NORTH Qtr1 Qtr2 Qtr3 Qtr4
Bricks £1,000 £2,000 £3,000 £4,000
Wood £5,000 £6,000 £7,000 £8,000
Glass £9,000 £10,000 £11,000 £12,000
SOUTH Qtr1 Qtr2 Qtr3 Qtr4
Bricks £1,500 £2,500 £3,500 £4,500
Wood £5,500 £6,500 £7,500 £8,500
Glass £9,500 £10,500 £11,500 £12,500
Type 1, 2 or 3 for the product : 1
Type 1, 2, 3 or 4 for the Qtr : 3
Type 1 for North or 2 for South : 2
The result is : Err:504 =INDEX(NorthAndSouth,F76,F77,F78)
Example
This is an extended version of the previous example.
It allows the names of products and the quarters to be entered.
The =MATCH() function is used to find the row and column positions of the names entered.
These positions are then used by the =INDEX() function to look for the data.
EAST Qtr1 Qtr2 Qtr3 Qtr4
Bricks £1,000 £2,000 £3,000 £4,000
Wood £5,000 £6,000 £7,000 £8,000
Glass £9,000 £10,000 £11,000 £12,000
WEST Qtr1 Qtr2 Qtr3 Qtr4
Bricks £1,500 £2,500 £3,500 £4,500
Wood £5,500 £6,500 £7,500 £8,500
Glass £9,500 £10,500 £11,500 £12,500
Type 1, 2 or 3 for the product : wood
Type 1, 2, 3 or 4 for the Qtr : qtr2
Type 1 for North or 2 for South : west
The result is : Err:504
=INDEX(EastAndWest,MATCH(F100,C91:C93,0),MATCH(F101,D90:G90,0),IF(F102=C90,1,IF(F102=C95,2)))
A B C D E F G H I
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
INDIRECT
Page 97 of 206
INDIRECT
Jan Feb Mar
North 10 20 30
South 40 50 60
East 70 80 90
West 100 110 120
Type address of any of the cells in the above table, such as G6 : G6
The value in the cell you typed is : 80 =INDIRECT(H9)
What Does It Do ?
This function converts a plain piece of text which looks like a cell address into a usable
cell reference.
The address can be either on the same worksheet or on a different worksheet.
Syntax
=INDIRECT(Text)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example 1
This example shows how data can be picked form other worksheets by using
the worksheet name and a cell address.
The example uses three other worksheets named NORTH, SOUTH and EAST.
The data on these three sheets is laid out in the same cells on each sheet.
When a reference to a sheet is made the exclamation symbol ! needs to be placed
between the sheet name and cell address acting as punctuation.
North
C8
The contents of the cell C8 on North is : 120 =INDIRECT(G33&"!"&G34)
The =INDIRECT() created a reference to =NORTH!C8
Example 2
This example uses the same data as above, but this time the =SUM() function is
used to calculate a total from a range of cells.
South
C5
C7
The sum of the range C5:C7 on South is : 1200
=SUM(INDIRECT(G44&"!"&G45&":"&G46))
The =INDIRECT() created a reference to =SUM(SOUTH!C5:C7)
Type the name of the sheet, such as North :
Type the cell to pick data from, such as C8 :
Type the name of the sheet, such as South :
Type the start cell of the range, such as C5 :
Type the end cell of the range, such as C7 :
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
INFO
Page 98 of 206
INFO
System Information
Current directory Err:502 =INFO("directory")
Available bytes of memory Err:502 =INFO("memavail")
Memory in use Err:502 =INFO("memused")
Total bytes of memory Err:502 =INFO("totmem")
Number of active worksheets 1 =INFO("numfile")
Cell currently in the top left of the window Err:502 =INFO("origin")
Operating system Windows (32bit) NT 5.01 =INFO("osversion")
Recalculation mode Automatic =INFO("recalc")
Excel version 310m19(Build:9420) =INFO("release")
Name of system. (PC or Mac) LINUX =INFO("system")
What Does It Do?
This function provides information about the operating environment of the computer.
Syntax
=INFO(text)
text : This is the name of the item you require information about.
Formatting
The results will be shown as text or a number depending upon what was requested.
A B C D E F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
INT
Page 99 of 206
INT
Number Integer
1.5 1 =INT(C4)
2.3 2 =INT(C5)
10.75 10 =INT(C6)
1.48 2 =INT(C7)
What Does It Do ?
This function rounds a number down to the nearest whole number.
Syntax
=INT(Number)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used by a school to calculate the age a child when the
school year started.
A child can only be admitted to school if they are over 8 years old.
The Birth Date and the Term Start date are entered and the age calculated.
Table 1 shows the age of the child with decimal places
Table 1
Birth Date Term Start Age
1Jan80 1Sep88 8.67 =(D27C27)/365.25
5Feb81 1Sep88 7.57
20Oct79 1Sep88 8.87
1Mar81 1Sep88 7.5
Table 2 shows the age of the child with the Age formatted with no decimal places.
This has the effect of increasing the child age.
Table 2
Birth Date Term Start Age
1Jan80 1Sep88 9 =(D38C38)/365.25
5Feb81 1Sep88 8
20Oct79 1Sep88 9
1Mar81 1Sep88 8
Table 3 shows the age of the child with the Age calculated using the =INT() function to
remove the decimal part of the number to give the correct age.
Table 3
Birth Date Term Start Age
1Jan80 1Sep88 8 =INT((D49C49)/365.25)
5Feb81 1Sep88 7
20Oct79 1Sep88 8
1Mar81 1Sep88 7
Note
The age is calculated by subtracting the Birth Date from the Term Start to find the
age of the child in days.
The number of days is then divided by 365.25
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
INT
Page 100 of 206
The reason for using 365.25 is to take account of the leap years.
A B C D E F G H I J
59
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ISBLANK
Page 101 of 206
ISBLANK
Data Is The Cell Blank
1 FALSE =ISBLANK(C4)
Hello FALSE =ISBLANK(C5)
TRUE =ISBLANK(C6)
25Dec98 FALSE =ISBLANK(C7)
What Does It Do?
This function will determine if there is an entry in a particular cell.
It can be used when a spreadsheet has blank cells which may cause errors, but which
will be filled later as the data is received by the user.
Usually the function is used in conjunction with the =IF() function which can test the result
of the =ISBLANK()
Syntax
=ISBLANK(CellToTest)
Formatting
Used by itself the result will be shown as TRUE or FALSE.
Example
The following example shows a list of cheques received by a company.
When the cheque is cleared the date is entered.
Until the Cleared date is entered the Cleared column is blank.
While the Cleared column is blank the cheque will still be Outstanding.
When the Cleared date is entered the cheque will be shown as Banked.
The =ISBLANK() function is used to determine whether the Cleared column is empty or not.
Cheques Received Date Date
Num From Received Amount Cleared Banked Outstanding
chq1 ABC Ltd 1Jan98 £100 2Jan98 100 0
chq2 CJ Design 1Jan98 £200 7Jan98 200 0
chq3 J Smith 2Jan98 £50 0 50
chq4 Travel Co. 3Jan98 £1,000 0 1000
chq5 J Smith 4Jan98 £250 6Jan98 250 0
=IF(ISBLANK(F36),0,E36)
=IF(ISBLANK(F36),E36,0)
Totals 550 1050
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ISERR
Page 102 of 206
ISERR
Cell to test Result
3 FALSE =ISERR(D4)
#DIV/0! TRUE =ISERR(D5)
Err:508 TRUE =ISERR(D6)
#VALUE! TRUE =ISERR(D7)
Err:502 TRUE =ISERR(D8)
Err:502 TRUE =ISERR(D9)
#N/A FALSE =ISERR(D10)
What Does It Do ?
This function tests a cell and shows TRUE if there is an error value in the cell.
It will show FALSE if the contents of the cell calculate without an error, or if the error
is the #NA message.
Syntax
=ISERR(CellToTest)
The CellToTest can be a cell reference or a calculation.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following tables were used by a publican to calculate the cost of a single bottle
of champagne, by dividing the cost of the crate by the quantity of bottles in the crate.
Table 1 shows what happens when the value zero 0 is entered as the number of bottles.
The #DIV/0 indicates that an attempt was made to divide by zero 0, which Excel does not do.
Table 1
Cost Of Crate : £24
Bottles In Crate : 0
Cost of single bottle : #DIV/0! =E32/E33
Table 2 shows how this error can be trapped by using the =ISERR() function.
Table 2
Cost Of Crate : £24
Bottles In Crate : 0
Cost of single bottle : Try again! =IF(ISERR(E40/E41),"Try again!",E40/E41)
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ISERROR
Page 103 of 206
ISERROR
Cell to test Result
3 FALSE =ISERROR(D4)
#DIV/0! TRUE =ISERROR(D5)
Err:508 TRUE =ISERROR(D6)
#VALUE! TRUE =ISERROR(D7)
Err:502 TRUE =ISERROR(D8)
Err:502 TRUE =ISERROR(D9)
#N/A TRUE =ISERROR(D10)
What Does It Do ?
This function tests a cell or calculation to determine whether an error has been generated.
It will show TRUE for any type of error and FALSE if no error is found.
Syntax
=ISERROR(CellToTest)
The CellToTest can be a cell reference or a formula.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following tables was used to calculate the difference between two dates.
Table 1 shows an error due to the fact that the first entry was entered using an inappropriate
date format.
Table 1
Start date : Jan 01 98
End date : 5Jan98
Difference : 3Jan00 =D31D30
Table 2 shows how the =ISERROR() function has been used to trap the error and inform the
user that there has been an error in the data entry.
Table 2
Start date : Jan 01 98
End date : 5Jan98
Difference : 3Jan00
=IF(ISERROR(D40D39),"Error in data entry",D40D39)
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ISEVEN
Page 104 of 206
ISEVEN
Number Is it Even
1 0 =ISEVEN(C4)
2 1 =ISEVEN(C5)
2.5 1 =ISEVEN(C6)
2.6 1 =ISEVEN(C7)
3.5 0 =ISEVEN(C8)
3.6 0 =ISEVEN(C9)
Hello 1 =ISEVEN(C10)
1Feb98 0 =ISEVEN(C11)
1Feb96 1 =ISEVEN(C12)
What Does It Do ?
This function tests a number to determine whether it is even.
An even number is shown as TRUE an odd number is shown as FALSE.
Note that decimal fractions are ignored.
Note that dates can be even or odd.
Note that text entries result in the #VALUE! error.
Syntax
=ISEVEN(CellToTest)
Formatting
No special formatting is required.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ISLOGICAL
Page 105 of 206
ISLOGICAL
Cell To Test Result
FALSE TRUE =ISLOGICAL(D4)
TRUE TRUE =ISLOGICAL(D5)
FALSE =ISLOGICAL(D6)
20 FALSE =ISLOGICAL(D7)
1Jan98 FALSE =ISLOGICAL(D8)
Hello FALSE =ISLOGICAL(D9)
#DIV/0! FALSE =ISLOGICAL(D10)
What Does It Do ?
This function tests a cell to determine whether the cell contents are logical.
The logical values can only be TRUE or FALSE.
If the cell does contain a logical value, the result TRUE is shown.
If the cell does not contain a logical value, the result FALSE is shown.
Syntax
=ISLOGICAL(CellToTest)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ISNA
Page 106 of 206
ISNA
Number Result
1 FALSE =ISNA(C4)
Hello FALSE =ISNA(C5)
FALSE =ISNA(C6)
1Jan98 FALSE =ISNA(C7)
#N/A TRUE =ISNA(C8)
What Does It Do?
This function tests a cell to determine whether it contains the Not Available error #N/A.
The #N/A is generated when a function cannot work properly because of missing data.
The #N/A can also be typed in to a cell by the user to indicate the cell is currently empty,
but will be used for data entry in the future.
The function is normally used with other functions such as the =IF() function.
Syntax
=ISNA(CellToTest)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ISNONTEXT
Page 107 of 206
ISNONTEXT
Item To Test Is It A Number?
10 TRUE =ISNONTEXT(C4)
Hello FALSE =ISNONTEXT(C5)
TRUE =ISNONTEXT(C6)
1Jan98 TRUE =ISNONTEXT(C7)
1OO FALSE =ISNONTEXT(C8)
What Does It Do?
This functions tests an entry to determine whether it is a number, rather than text.
It would be used to ensure that only numeric entries are used in calculations, rather
than text which looks like a number, such as typing the letter O instead of zero 0.
The function is normally used with other function such as the =IF() function.
Syntax
=ISNONTEXT(CellToTest)
Formatting
No special formatting.
Examples
The following table is used by an electrical retailer to calculate the selling price
of an item based on the buying price and the shop markup.
Table 1 shows the #VALUE! error generated when a number, 300, is entered
using the letter O instead of the zero 0.
Table 1
Item Buying Price Markup Profit
Radio 400 150% 600
TV 800 200% 1600
Video 3OO 150% #VALUE! =D32*E32
Table 2 shows how the error is trapped using the =ISNONTEXT function and
the =IF() function in the calculation.
Table 2
Item Buying Price Markup Profit
Radio 400 150% 600
TV 800 200% 1600
Video 3OO 150% Retype the Price
=IF(ISNONTEXT(D40),D40*E40,"Retype the Price")
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ISNUMBER
Page 108 of 206
ISNUMBER
Cell Entry Result
1 TRUE =ISNUMBER(D4)
1Jan98 TRUE =ISNUMBER(D5)
FALSE =ISNUMBER(D6)
#DIV/0! FALSE =ISNUMBER(D7)
Hello FALSE =ISNUMBER(D8)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a cell or calculation to determine whether it is a numeric value.
If the cell or calculation is a numeric value the result TRUE is shown.
If the cell or calculation is not numeric, or is blank, the result FALSE is shown.
Syntax
=ISNUMBER(CellToTest)
The cell to test can be a cell reference or a calculation.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used by a personnel department to lookup the salary of an employee.
The employee can be entered as a Name or as a Numeric value.
The =ISNUMBER() function has been used to identify the type of entry made, and then
the =IF() decides which VLOOKUP to perform.
ID No. Name Salary
1 Alan £10,000
2 Eric £12,000
3 Carol £8,000
4 Bob £15,000
5 David £12,000
Type Employee Name or ID : eric
The Salary is : £12,000
=IF(ISNUMBER(E35),VLOOKUP(E35,C29:E33,3,FALSE),VLOOKUP(E35,D29:E33,2,FALSE))
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ISODD
Page 109 of 206
ISODD
Number Is it Odd
1 1 =ISODD(C4)
2 0 =ISODD(C5)
2.5 0 =ISODD(C6)
2.6 0 =ISODD(C7)
3.5 1 =ISODD(C8)
3.6 1 =ISODD(C9)
Hello 0 =ISODD(C10)
1Feb98 1 =ISODD(C11)
1Feb96 0 =ISODD(C12)
What Does It Do ?
This function tests a number to determine whether it is odd.
An odd number is shown as TRUE an even number is shown as FALSE.
Note that decimal fractions are ignored.
Note that dates can be odd or even.
Note that text entries result in the #VALUE! error.
Syntax
=ISODD(CellToTest)
Formatting
No special formatting is required.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ISREF
Page 110 of 206
ISREF
TRUE =ISREF(A1)
FALSE =ISREF(B99)
Err:508 =ISREF(Hello)
FALSE =ISREF(10)
FALSE =ISREF(NOW())
FALSE =ISREF("A1")
Err:508 =ISREF(XX99)
What Does It Do ?
This function shows TRUE if given a cell address, or FALSE for any other type of value.
Its a bit of an odd one, and is normally used in macros rather than on the worksheet.
Syntax
=ISREF(ValueToTest)
The ValueToTest can be any type of data, but when used on the worksheet, it cannot be a
reference to the contents of another cell, as the reference will itself be evaluated by the function.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ISTEXT
Page 111 of 206
ISTEXT
Cell To Test Result
Hello TRUE =ISTEXT(D4)
1 FALSE =ISTEXT(D5)
25Dec98 FALSE =ISTEXT(D6)
FALSE =ISTEXT(D7)
What Does It Do ?
This functions tests an entry to determine whether it is text.
If the entry is text is shows TRUE.
If the entry is any other type it shows FALSE.
Syntax
=ISTEXT(CellToTest)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used by a personnel department to lookup the salary of an employee.
The employee can be entered as a Name or as a Numeric value.
The =ISTEXT() function has been used to identify the type of entry made, and then
the =IF() decides which VLOOKUP to perform.
ID No. Name Salary
1 Alan £10,000
2 Eric £12,000
3 Carol £8,000
4 Bob £15,000
5 David £12,000
Type Employee Name or ID : 3
The Salary is : £8,000
=IF(ISTEXT(E33),VLOOKUP(E33,D27:E31,2,FALSE),VLOOKUP(E33,C27:E31,3,FALSE))
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
LARGE
Page 112 of 206
LARGE
Values Highest Value 800 =LARGE(C4:C8,1)
120 2nd Highest Value 250 =LARGE(C4:C8,2)
800 3rd Highest Value 120 =LARGE(C4:C8,3)
100 4th Highest Value 120 =LARGE(C4:C8,4)
120 5th Highest Value 100 =LARGE(C4:C8,5)
250
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a list of values and picks the value at a user specified position
in the list.
Syntax
=LARGE(ListOfNumbersToExamine,PositionToPickFrom)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used to calculate the top 3 sales figures between Jan, Feb and Mar.
Sales Jan Feb Mar
North £5,000 £6,000 £4,500
South £5,800 £7,000 £3,000
East £3,500 £2,000 £10,000
West £12,000 £4,000 £6,000
Highest Value £12,000 =LARGE(D24:F27,1)
2nd Highest Value £10,000 =LARGE(D24:F27,2)
3rd Highest Value £7,000 =LARGE(D24:F27,3)
Note
Another way to find the Highest and Lowest values would have been to use
the =MAX() and =MIN() functions.
Highest £12,000 =MAX(D24:F27)
Lowest £2,000 =MIN(D24:F27)
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
LCM
Page 113 of 206
LCM
Numbers
6 20 60 =LCM(C4,D4)
12 18 36 =LCM(C5,D5)
34 96 1632 =LCM(C6,D6)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculate the Least Common Multiple, which is the smallest number
that can be divided by each of the given numbers.
Syntax
=LCM(Number1,Number2,Number3... through to Number29)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Least
Common
Multiple
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
LEFT
Page 114 of 206
LEFT
Text Left String
Alan Jones 1 A =LEFT(C4,D4)
Alan Jones 2 Al =LEFT(C5,D5)
Alan Jones 3 Ala =LEFT(C6,D6)
Cardiff 6 Cardif =LEFT(C7,D7)
ABC123 4 ABC1 =LEFT(C8,D8)
What Does It Do ?
This function displays a specified number of characters from the left hand side of a
piece of text.
Syntax
=LEFT(OriginalText,NumberOfCharactersRequired)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used to extract the first name of a person from their full name.
The =FIND() function was used to locate position of the space between the first and second name.
The length of the first name is therefore the position of the space minus one character.
The =LEFT() function can now extract the first name based on the position of the space.
Full Name First Name
Alan Jones Alan =LEFT(C27,FIND(" ",C27)1)
Bob Smith Bob =LEFT(C28,FIND(" ",C28)1)
Carol Williams Carol =LEFT(C29,FIND(" ",C29)1)
Number Of
Characters
Required
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
LEN
Page 115 of 206
LEN
Text Length
Alan Jones 10 =LEN(C4)
Bob Smith 9 =LEN(C5)
Carol Williams 14 =LEN(C6)
Cardiff 7 =LEN(C7)
ABC123 6 =LEN(C8)
What Does It Do ?
This function counts the number of characters, including spaces and numbers, in a piece of text.
Syntax
=LEN(Text)
Formatting
No Special formatting is needed.
Example
This example shows how the =LEN() function is used in a formula which extracts the
second name from a text entry containing both first and second names.
Original Text
Carol Williams 6 =FIND(" ",C24)
This is the position of the space.
Carol Williams 8 =LEN(C24)FIND(" ",C24)
This is the length of the second name.
Calculated by taking the overall length of the complete
name and subtracting the position of the space.
=RIGHT(C24,LEN(C24)FIND(" ",C24))
This is just the second name.
Calculated by using the =RIGHT() function to extract
the rightmost characters up to the length of
the second name.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
LOOKUP (Array)
Page 116 of 206
LOOKUP (Array)
Name Jan Feb Mar
Alan 10 80 97
Bob 20 90 69
Carol 30 100 45
David 40 110 51
Eric 50 120 77
Francis 60 130 28
Gail 70 140 73
Type a Name in this cell : Eric
77 =LOOKUP(F12,D4:G10)
What Does It Do ?
This function looks for a piece of information in a list, and then picks an item from the
last cell in the adjacent row or column.
It always picks the data from the end of the row or column, so it is no good if you need
to pick data from part way across a list, (use VLOOKUP or HLOOKUP).
The way in which the function decides whether to pick from the row or column is based
on the size of the table.
trying to find a match for the piece of information
you asked it to look for.
When a match is found, the function will look
across to the right most column to pick the
last entry on the row.
work in just the same way as if the table had more
rows than columns, as in the description above.
to find a match for the piece of information you
have asked it to look for.
When a match is found, the function will then look
down to the bottom cell of the column to pick
the last entry of the column.
Syntax
=LOOKUP(WhatToLookFor,RangeToLookIn)
The WhatToLookFor should be a single item.
The RangeToLook in can be either horizontal or vertical.
Be careful not to include unnecessary heading in the range as these will cause errors.
Example 1 Example 2
In this table there are more In this table there are more columns than rows, so
rows than columns, so the the row heading of Jan is not included in the
The March value for this person is :
If the table has more rows than columns : the function will look down the left most column
If the table has the same amount of rows and columns :
the function will look down the left most column and
If the table has more columns than rows : the function will look across the top row trying
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
LOOKUP (Array)
Page 117 of 206
column heading of Jan is lookup range.
not included in the lookup
range. Alan Bob Carol David
Jan Jan 100 100 100 100
Alan 100
Bob 100
Carol 100
David 100
Eric 100
Fred 100
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Problems
The list of information to be looked through must be sorted in ascending order, otherwise errors
will occur, either as #N/A or incorrect results.
Table 1 shows the Name column sorted alphabetically, the results of using =LOOKUP() will
be correct.
Table 2 shows the same data, but not sorted. Sometimes the results will be correct, but other
times the result will be an #N/A error or incorrect figure.
Table 1 Table 2
Name Jan Feb Mar Name Jan Feb Mar
Alan 10 80 97 David 40 110 51
Bob 20 90 69 Eric 50 120 77
Carol 30 100 45 Alan 10 80 97
David 40 110 51 Bob 20 90 69
Eric 50 120 77 Carol 30 100 45
Francis 60 130 28 Francis 60 130 28
Gail 70 140 73 Gail 70 140 73
Name : Eric Name : Eric
Value : 77 Value : 77
=LOOKUP(C88,B80:E86) =LOOKUP(H88,G80:J86)
A B C D E F G H I J
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
LOOKUP (Vector)
Page 118 of 206
LOOKUP (Vector)
Name Jan Feb Mar
Alan 10 80 97
Bob 20 90 69
Carol 30 100 45
David 40 110 51
Eric 50 120 77
Francis 60 130 28
Gail 70 140 73
Type a Name in this cell : Eric
120 =LOOKUP(F12,D4:G10,F4:F10)
What Does It Do ?
This function looks for a piece of information in a list, and then picks an item from
a second range of cells.
Syntax
=LOOKUP(WhatToLookFor,RangeToLookIn,RangeToPickFrom)
The WhatToLookFor should be a single item.
The RangeToLook in can be either horizontal or vertical.
The RangeToPickFrom must have the same number of cells in it as the RangeToLookin.
Be careful not to include unnecessary heading in the ranges as these will cause errors.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following example shows how the =LOOKUP() function was used to match a name typed
in cell G41 against the list of names in C38:C43. When a match is found the =LOOKUP() then
picks from the second range E38:J38.
If the name Carol is used, the match is made in the third cell of the list of names, and then
the function picks the third cell from the list of values.
RangeToLookIn RangeToPickFrom
Alan 5 10 15 20 25 30
Bob
Carol
David Type a name : Carol
Eric Value : 15
Fred =LOOKUP(G41,C38:C43,E38:J38)
Problems
The list of information to be looked through must be sorted in ascending order, otherwise errors
will occur, either as #N/A or incorrect results.
The Feb value for this person is :
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
LOWER
Page 119 of 206
LOWER
Upper Case Text Lower Case
ALAN JONES alan jones =LOWER(C4)
BOB SMITH bob smith =LOWER(C5)
CAROL WILLIAMS carol williams =LOWER(C6)
CARDIFF cardiff =LOWER(C7)
ABC123 abc123 =LOWER(C8)
What Does It Do ?
This function converts all characters in a piece of text to lower case.
Syntax
=LOWER(TextToConvert)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MATCH
Page 120 of 206
MATCH
Names Values
Bob 250
Alan 600
David 1000
Carol 4000
Type a name to look for : Alan Type a value : 1000
The position of Alan is : 2 Value position : 3
=MATCH(E9,E4:E7,0) =MATCH(I9,I4:I7,1)
What Does It Do ?
This function looks for an item in a list and shows its position.
It can be used with text and numbers.
It can look for an exact match or an approximate match.
Syntax
=MATCH(WhatToLookFor,WhereToLook,TypeOfMatch)
The TypeOfMatch either 0, 1 or 1.
Using 0 will look for an exact match. If no match is found the #NA error will be shown.
Using 1 will look for an exact match, or the next lowest number if no exact match exists.
If there is no match or next lowest number the error #NA is shown.
The list of values being examined must be sorted for this to work correctly.
Using 1 will look for an exact match, or the next highest number if no exact match exists.
If there is no exact match or next highest number the error #NA is shown.
The list must be sorted for this to work properly.
Examples 1
Using the 0 option suitable for an exact match.
Ascending Descending Wrong Value
10 40 10
20 30 20
30 20 30
40 10 40
20 20 25
2 3 #N/A
=MATCH(G45,G40:G43,0)
Example 2
Using the 1 option suitable for a ascending list to find an exact or next lowest match.
The Ascending list gives the exact match.
The Descending list gives the exact match.
The Wrong Value list cannot find an exact match, so the #NA is shown.
The Ascending list gives the exact match.
The Descending list gives the #NA error.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MATCH
Page 121 of 206
Ascending Descending Wrong Value
10 40 10
20 30 20
30 20 30
40 10 40
20 20 25
2 #N/A 2
=MATCH(G62,G57:G60,1)
Example 3
Using the 1 option suitable for a descending list to find an exact or next highest match.
Ascending Descending Wrong Value
10 40 40
20 30 30
30 20 20
40 10 10
20 20 25
2 3 2
=MATCH(G79,G74:G77,1)
Example 4
The tables below were used to by a bus company taking booking for bus tours.
They need to allocate a bus with enough seats for the all the passengers.
The list of bus sizes has been entered in a list.
The number of passengers on the tour is then entered.
The =MATCH() function looks down the list to find the bus with enough seats.
If the number of passengers is not an exact match, the next biggest bus will be picked.
After the =MATCH() function has found the bus, the =INDEX() function has been used
to look down the list again and pick out the actual bus size required.
Bus Size Passengers on the tour : 23
Bus 1 54 Bus size needed : 50
Bus 2 50 =INDEX(D95:D99,MATCH(H94,D95:D99,1),0)
Bus 3 22
Bus 4 15
Bus 5 6
Example 5
The tables below were used by a school to calculate the exam grades for pupils.
The list of grade breakpoints was entered in a list.
The pupils scores were entered in another list.
The pupils scores are compared against the breakpoints.
The Wrong Value list finds the next lowest number..
The Ascending list gives the #NA error.
The Descending list gives the exact match.
The Wrong Value list finds the next highest number.
A B C D E F G H I
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MATCH
Page 122 of 206
If an exact match is not found, the next lowest breakpoint is used.
The =INDEX() function then looks down the Grade list to find the grade.
Exam Score Grade Pupil Score Grade
0 Fail Alan 60 Pass
50 Pass Bob 6 Fail
90 Merit Carol 97 Distinction
95 Distinction David 89 Pass
=INDEX(D111:D114,MATCH(G114,C111:C114,1),0)
A B C D E F G H I
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MAX
Page 123 of 206
MAX
Values Maximum
120 800 100 120 250 800 =MAX(C4:G4)
Dates Maximum
1Jan98 25Dec98 31Mar98 27Dec98 4Jul98 27Dec98 =MAX(C7:G7)
What Does It Do ?
This function picks the highest value from a list of data.
Syntax
=MAX(Range1,Range2,Range3... through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
In the following example the =MAX() function has been used to find the highest value for
each region, month and overall.
Sales Jan Feb Mar Region Max
North £5,000 £6,000 £4,500 £6,000 =MAX(C23:E23)
South £5,800 £7,000 £3,000 £7,000
East £3,500 £2,000 £10,000 £10,000
West £12,000 £4,000 £6,000 £12,000
Month Max £12,000 £7,000 £10,000
=MAX(E23:E26)
Overall Max £12,000
=MAX(C23:E26)
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MEDIAN
Page 124 of 206
MEDIAN
Value1 Value2 Value3 Value4 Value5 Median
20 50 10 30 40 30 =MEDIAN(C4:G4)
2000 1000 10 20 8000 1000 =MEDIAN(C6:G6)
10 20 40 40 40 40 =MEDIAN(C8:G8)
Value1 Value2 Value3 Value4 Median
20 40 30 10 25 =MEDIAN(C11:F11)
20 20 40 20 20 =MEDIAN(C13:F13)
What Does It Do ?
This function finds the median value of a group of values.
The median is not the average, it is the half way point where half the numbers in the group are
larger than it and half the numbers are less than it.
If there is no exact median number in the group, the two nearest the half way point are
added and their average is used as the median.
Syntax
=MEDIAN(Range1,Range2,Range3... through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MID
Page 125 of 206
MID
Text Mid String
ABCDEDF 1 3 ABC =MID(C4,D4,E4)
ABCDEDF 2 3 BCD =MID(C5,D5,E5)
ABCDEDF 5 2 ED =MID(C6,D6,E6)
ABC100DEF 100 =MID(C8,5,3)
ABC200DEF 200 =MID(C9,5,3)
ABC300DEF 300 =MID(C10,5,3)
Item Size: Large Large =MID(C12,12,99)
Item Size: Medium Medium =MID(C13,12,99)
Item Size: Small Small =MID(C14,12,99)
What Does It Do ?
This function picks out a piece of text from the middle of a text entry.
The function needs to know at what point it should start, and how many characters to pick.
If the number of characters to pick exceeds what is available, only the available characters
will be picked.
Syntax
=MID(OriginalText,PositionToStartPicking,NumberOfCharactersToPick)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example 1
The following table uses the =MID() function to extract a post code from a branch ID used
by a company.
It is assumed that all branch ID's follow the same format with the letters identifying the
postal region being in the 5th and 6th positions.
Branch ID Postal Region
DRSCF476 CF =MID(C35,5,2)
DRSWA842 WA =MID(C36,5,2)
HLTNP190 NP =MID(C37,5,2)
Example 2
This example shows how to extract an item which is of variable length, which is inside
a piece of text which has no standard format, other than the required text is always
between two slash / symbols.
Full Branch Code Postal Region
DRS/STC/872 STC
HDRS/FC/111 FC
S/NORTH/874 NORTH
HQ/K/875 K
SPECIAL/UK & FR/876 UK & FR
Start
Position
How Many
Characters
=MID(C50,FIND("/",C50)+1,FIND("/",C50,FIND("/",C50)+1)FIND("/",C50)1)
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MID
Page 126 of 206
Find the first /, plus 1 for the Start of the code.
Find the second /, occurring after the first /
Calculate the length of the text to extract, by subtracting the position
of the first / from the position of the second /
A B C D E F G H
53
54
55
56
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MIN
Page 127 of 206
MIN
Values Minimum
120 800 100 120 250 100 =MIN(C4:G4)
Dates Maximum
1Jan98 25Dec98 31Mar98 27Dec98 4Jul98 1Jan98 =MIN(C7:G7)
What Does It Do ?
This function picks the lowest value from a list of data.
Syntax
=MIN(Range1,Range2,Range3... through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
In the following example the =MIN() function has been used to find the lowest value for
each region, month and overall.
Sales Jan Feb Mar Region Min
North £5,000 £6,000 £4,500 £4,500 =MIN(C23:E23)
South £5,800 £7,000 £3,000 £3,000
East £3,500 £2,000 £10,000 £2,000
West £12,000 £4,000 £6,000 £4,000
Month MIN £3,500 £2,000 £3,000
=MIN(E23:E26)
Overall MIN £2,000
=MIN(C23:E26)
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MINUTE
Page 128 of 206
MINUTE
Number Minute
10/4/2010 6:31 31 =MINUTE(D4)
9:15:00 PM 15 =MINUTE(D5)
0.02 28 =MINUTE(D6)
0.52 28 =MINUTE(D7)
1.52 28 =MINUTE(D8)
What Does It Do?
The function will show the minute of the hour based upon a time or a number.
Only the fraction part of the number is used as it is this which relates to time of day.
Syntax
=MINUTE(Number)
Formatting
The result will be shown as a normal number between 0 and 59.
Example
The =REPT() function has been used to make a digital display for the current time.
The time functions of =HOUR(), =MINUTE() and =SECOND() have been used in conjunction
with the =NOW() as the basis for the number of repeats.
To update the clock press the function key F9.
Clock
Hour  06
Minute  28
Second  35
=REPT("",HOUR(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(HOUR(NOW()),"00")
=REPT("",MINUTE(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(MINUTE(NOW()),"00")
=REPT("",SECOND(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(SECOND(NOW()),"00")
Related Information
To convert a time in hh:mm format to decimal format.
Enter a time in hh:mm format : 2:45
The same time converted to a decimal : 2.75 =F38*24
To extract the hours as a decimal : 2 =INT(F38*24)
To extract the minutes as a decimal : 0.75 =MOD(F38*24,1)
To convert a time in decimal format to hh:mm format.
Enter a time in decimal format : 3.75
The same time converted to hh:mm format is : 3:45 =F49/24
To extract the hours in hh:mm format : 3:00 =INT(F49)/24
To extract the minutes in hh:mm format : 0:45 =MOD(F49,1)/24
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MINUTE
Page 129 of 206
The three formula above have also been formatted as hh:mm using
the Format, Cells, Number, Time command.
A B C D E F G H I
57
58
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MMULT
Page 130 of 206
MMULT
What Does It Do ?
This function multiplies one range of values with another range of values.
The ranges do not have to be of equal size.
The dimensions of the result range is in direct proportion to dimensions of the two input ranges.
It is an Array function and must be entered using the Ctrl+Shift+Enter combination.
Syntax
=MMULT(Range1,Range2)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following tables were used by a company producing boxes of chocolates.
The types of chocolate produced were Milk, Dark and White.
The company boxed the chocolates in three differing mixtures of Milk, Dark and White.
In the run up to Christmas customers ordered various quantities of each box.
The chocolate company now needed to know what quantity of each type of chocolate to produce.
The =MMULT() function was used to multiply the contents of boxes by the customer orders.
The result of the =MMULT() is the total number of each type of chocolate to produce.
Chocolates in the box
Size Milk Dark White
Giant 50 50 50
Standard 30 20 10
Economy 20 5 5
Customers Orders
Giant Standard Economy
300 400 500
Quantity To Produce
Milk Dark White
37,000 25,500 21,500
{=MMULT(C32:E32,C26:E28)}
In all three cells
How It Was Done
Cells C36 to E36 were selected.
The formula =MMULT(C32:E32,C26:E28) was typed, (but not yet entered).
The keys Ctrl+Shift+Enter were pressed to confirm the entry as an array.
The formula then showed the correct result.
Getting The Dimensions Correct
The dimensions of the Result range are directly related to the two input ranges.
The number of rows in the Result should be equal to the rows in Range1.
The number of columns in the Result should be equal to the columns in Range2.
Example 2
The following tables were used by the chocolate company to calculate the amount of
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MMULT
Page 131 of 206
ingredients needed to produce batches of chocolate.
The company has four factories, each of which has to order enough Butter, Eggs and Sugar
to ensure they can meet production targets.
Range 1 contains the planned production of Milk and Dark chocolate for each factory.
Range 2 contains the amount Butter, Eggs and Sugar needed to make 1 unit of Milk or Plain.
The Result range shows the quantities of each ingredient that will have to be ordered to
meet the production target.
Note the depth of the Result is the same as the depth of Range 1, and the width of
the Result is the same as the width of Range 2.
Range 1 Range 2
Production Milk Dark Ingredients Butter Eggs Sugar
Factory 1 20 0 Milk 1 3 10
Factory 2 20 1 Dark 2 2 5
Factory 3 10 5
Factory 4 20 10
Result
Ingredients To Order Butter Eggs Sugar
Factory 1 20 60 200
Factory 2 22 62 205
Factory 3 20 40 125
Factory 4 40 80 250
{=MMULT(C69:D72,G69:I70)}
In all cells
Hint
To get a feel for how the =MMULT() function operates, set all values in Range1 and Range2
to zero 0, then change a single value in each.
A B C D E F G H I J
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MOD
Page 132 of 206
MOD
Number Divisor Remainder
12 5 2 =MOD(C4,D4)
20 7 6 =MOD(C5,D5)
18 3 0 =MOD(C6,D6)
9 2 1 =MOD(C7,D7)
24 7 3 =MOD(C8,D8)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the remainder after a number has been divided by another number.
Syntax
=MOD(Number,Divisor)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MODE
Page 133 of 206
MODE
Value1 Value2 Value3 Value4 Value5 Mode
20 50 10 10 40 10 =MODE(C4:G4)
40 20 40 10 40 40 =MODE(C6:G6)
10 10 99 20 20 10 =MODE(C8:G8)
20 20 99 10 10 10 =MODE(C9:G9)
10 20 20 99 10 10 =MODE(C10:G10)
10 20 30 40 50 #VALUE! =MODE(C12:G12)
What Does It Do ?
This function displays the most frequently occurring number in a group of numbers.
For it to work correctly there must be at least two numbers which are the same.
If all the values in the group are unique the function shows the error #N/A.
When there is more than one set of duplicates, the number closest to the beginning
of the group will be used. (Which is not really an accurate answer!)
Syntax
=MODE(Range1,Range2,Range3... through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table shows garments sold in a clothes shop.
The shopkeeper wants to keep track of the most commonly sold size.
The =MODE() function has been used to calulate this.
Order Garmet Size
001 Blouse 10 Most frequently ordered size : 10
002 Skirt 10 =MODE(D33:D52)
003 Shirt 8
004 Blouse 10
005 Skirt 12 Count of size 8 : 6
006 Dress 8 =COUNTIF(D33:D52,"8")
007 Shirt 10
008 Blouse 10 Count of size 10 : 11
009 Dress 8 =COUNTIF(D33:D52,"10")
010 Shirt 10
011 Dress 12 Count of size 12 : 3
012 Skirt 12 =COUNTIF(D33:D52,"12")
013 Skirt 10
014 Shirt 10
015 Dress 8
016 Shirt 10
017 Blouse 10
018 Blouse 8
019 Dress 10
020 Skirt 8
Note
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MODE
Page 134 of 206
If the =AVERAGE() function had been used the answer would have been : 9.7
This figure is of no benefit to the shopkeeper as there are no garmets of this size!
A B C D E F G H I J
55
56
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MONTH
Page 135 of 206
MONTH
Original Date Month
1Jan98 1 =MONTH(C4)
1Jan98 December =MONTH(C5)
What Does It Do?
This function extracts the month from a complete date.
Syntax
=MONTH(Date)
Formatting
Normally the result will be a number, but this can be formatted to show the actual
month by using Format,Cells,Number,Custom and using the code mmm or mmmm.
Example
The =MONTH function has been used to calculate the name of the month for your birthday.
Please enter your date of birth in the format dd/mm/yy 3/25/1962
You were born in January =MONTH(F20)
A B C D E F G
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
MROUND
Page 136 of 206
MROUND
Number Multiple
110 50 100 =MROUND(C4,D4)
120 50 100 =MROUND(C5,D5)
150 50 150 =MROUND(C6,D6)
160 50 150 =MROUND(C7,D7)
170 50 150 =MROUND(C8,D8)
What Does It Do ?
This function rounds a number up or down to the nearest multiple specified by the user.
Syntax
=MROUND(NumberToRound,MultipleToUse)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Rounded
Value
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
N
Page 137 of 206
N
Original Converted
1 1 =N(C4)
3 1/2 3.5 =N(C5)
3.5 3.5 =N(C6)
3.50% 0.04 =N(C7)
25Dec98 36154 =N(C8)
TRUE 1 =N(C9)
FALSE 0 =N(C10)
Hello 0 =N(C11)
0 =N(C12)
What Does It Do ?
This function converts a numeric entry to its mathematical value.
Anything which will not convert is shown as 0 zero.
Excel does not really need this function, due to the fact that Excel calculates in this way
naturally. The function is included for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.
Syntax
=N(NumericEntry)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
NA
Page 138 of 206
NA
#N/A =NA()
Value Test
10 11 =IF(ISBLANK(C6),NA(),C6+1)
#N/A =IF(ISBLANK(C7),NA(),C7+1)
30 31 =IF(ISBLANK(C8),NA(),C8+1)
Sales
North 100
South #N/A =NA()
East #N/A =NA()
West 200
Total #N/A =SUM(D11:D14)
What Does It Do ?
This function is a place marker used to indicate that required information is Not Available.
It can be type directly in to a cell as =NA() or it can be used as part of a calculation.
When the =NA() is used, any calculations which depend upon the cell will also show #NA.
It is used to indicate that all the data has not yet been entered in to the spreadsheet.
Syntax
=NA()
Formatting
No special formatting is required.
Example
The following table was used by a company to calculate the monthly Wage of an employee.
The Salary and Tax percentage are entered.
The Tax is then deducted from the Salary to calculate the Wage.
Table 1 shows that when the Tax is not entered, the Wage is still calculated.
On a large spreadsheet this may go unnoticed and the wrong Wage paid.
Table 1
Salary Tax % Pay
Alan 1000 25% 750 =C39C39*D39
Bob 1000 1000 =C40C40*D40
Carol 1000 20% 800 =C41C41*D41
Table 2 shows how the =NA() has been inserted in the unknown Tax to act as a
reminder that the Tax still needs to be entered.
Table 2
Salary Tax % Pay
Alan 1000 25% 750 =C49C49*D49
Bob 1000 #N/A #N/A =C50C50*D50
Carol 1000 20% 800 =C51C51*D51
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
NETWORKDAYS
Page 139 of 206
NETWORKDAYS
Start Date End Date Work Days
1Mar98 7Mar98 5 =NETWORKDAYS(C4,D4)
25Apr98 30Jul98 69 =NETWORKDAYS(C5,D5)
24Dec98 5Jan99 9 =NETWORKDAYS(C6,D6)
What Does It Do?
This function will calculate the number of working days between two dates.
It will exclude weekends and any holidays.
Syntax
=NETWORKDAYS(StartDate,EndDate,Holidays)
Holidays : This is a list of dates which will be excluded from the calculation, such as Xmas
and Bank holidays.
Formatting
The result will be shown as a number.
Note
The calculation does not include the last day. The result of using 1Jan98 and 5Jan98 will
give a result of 4. To correct this add 1 to the result. =NETWORKDAYS(Start,End,Holidays)+1
Example
The following example shows how a list of Holidays can be created.
Start Date End Date Work Days
Mon 02Mar98 Fri 06Mar98 5 =NETWORKDAYS(B28,C28,C33:C37)
Mon 02Mar98 Fri 13Mar98 10 =NETWORKDAYS(B29,C29,C33:C37)
Mon 27Apr98 Fri 01May98 4 =NETWORKDAYS(B30,C30,C33:C37)
Holidays
Bank Holiday 1May98
Xmas 25Dec98
New Year 1Jan97
New Year 1Jan98
New Year 1Jan99
A B C D E F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
NORTH
Page 140 of 206
Northern data.
Used by the example for the =INDIRECT() function.
Alan
Jan Feb Mar Total
Alan 10 20 30 60
Bob 40 50 60 150
Carol 70 80 90 240
Total 120 150 180 450
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
NOT
Page 141 of 206
NOT
Cells To Test Result
10 20 TRUE =NOT(C4>D4)
10 20 TRUE =NOT(C5=D5)
10 20 FALSE =NOT(C6<D6)
1Jan98 1Feb98 TRUE =NOT(C7>D7)
Hello Goodbye TRUE =NOT(C8=D8)
Hello Hello FALSE =NOT(C9=D9)
What Does It Do ?
This function performs a test to see if the test fails. (A type of reverse logic).
If the test fails, the result is TRUE.
If the test is met, then the result is FALSE.
Syntax
=NOT(TestToPerform)
The TestToPerform can be reference to cells or another calculation.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used by a library to track books borrowed.
The date the book was Taken out is entered.
The period of the Loan is entered.
The date the book was returned is entered.
The =NOT() function has been used to calculate whether the book was returned within
the correct time, by adding the Loan value to the Taken date.
If the book was not returned on time the result Overdue is shown, otherwise OK is shown.
Taken Loan Returned Status
1Jan98 14 5Jan98 OK =IF(NOT(D33<=B33+C33),"Overdue","OK")
1Jan98 14 15Jan98 OK =IF(NOT(D34<=B34+C34),"Overdue","OK")
1Jan98 14 20Jan98 Overdue =IF(NOT(D35<=B35+C35),"Overdue","OK")
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
NOW
Page 142 of 206
NOW
The current Date and Time
10/4/2010 6:32 =NOW()
10/04/10 06:32 AM =NOW()
What Does It Do?
This function shows the current date and time. The result will be updated each time the
worksheet is opened and every time an entry is made anywhere on the worksheet.
Syntax
=NOW()
Formatting
The result will be shown as a date and time. If it is formatted to show as a number
the integer part is used for the date and the decimal portion represent the time.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ODD
Page 143 of 206
ODD
Number
2 3 =ODD(C4)
2.4 3 =ODD(C5)
2.9 3 =ODD(C6)
3 3 =ODD(C7)
3.4 5 =ODD(C8)
3.9 5 =ODD(C9)
What Does It Do ?
This function rounds a number up to the next highest whole odd number.
Syntax
=ODD(NumberToBeRounded)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Rounded To
Next Odd
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
OR
Page 144 of 206
OR
Order No. Cost
AB001 1000 Cash £ =IF(OR(E4="Visa",E4="Delta"),5,0)
AB002 1000 Visa £5 =IF(OR(E5="Visa",E5="Delta"),5,0)
AB003 2000 Cheque £ =IF(OR(E6="Visa",E6="Delta"),5,0)
AB004 5000 Delta £5 =IF(OR(E7="Visa",E7="Delta"),5,0)
What Does It Do?
This function tests two or more conditions to see if any of them are true.
It can be used to test that at least one of a series of numbers meets certain conditions.
Normally the OR() function would be used in conjunction with a function such as =IF().
Syntax
=OR(Test1,Test2)
Note that there can be up to 30 possible tests.
Formatting
When used by itself it will show TRUE or FALSE.
Example
The following table shows a list of orders taken by a company.
A handling charge of £5 is made on all orders paid by Visa or Delta cards.
The =OR() function has been used to determine whether the charge needs to be applied.
Order No. Cost
AB001 1000 Cash £ =IF(OR(E27="Visa",E27="Delta"),5,0)
AB002 1000 Visa £5
AB003 2000 Cheque £
AB004 5000 Delta £5
Payment
Type
Handling
Charge
Payment
Type
Handling
Charge
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Ordering Stock
Page 145 of 206
Ordering Stock
This is an example of a spreadsheet to calculate the best time interval to order stock.
Scenario
A garage fits exhaust systems.
The manager orders the exhausts on a regular basis.
Each time an order is made for new stock, there is a fixed administrative cost.
The exhausts are kept in stock until needed.
Keeping the exhausts in stock incurs a cost due to capital tied up and warehouse costs.
The supplier of the Exhausts gives a discount on large orders.
Objective
Find the time interval to order stock which will result in the lowest Admin and Warehouse costs.
Input Data
Cost of a single Exhaust system : £75
Cost of keeping Exhaust in stock. (As a % of the stock value) : 12%
Quantity of Exhausts used per day : 10
Admin cost each time new Exhausts are ordered : £25
Average quantity of Exhausts in stock (As % of ordered quantity) : 0.5
Ordering Intervals to evaluate. (Expressed in Days) : 2
Suppliers first Price Break and Discount% offered : 200 1%
Suppliers second Price Break and Discount% offered : 750 5%
Output
1 10 £750 £ 365 £9,125 £45 £9,170 
2 20 £1,500 £ 183 £4,575 £90 £4,665 
4 40 £3,000 £ 92 £2,300 £180 £2,480 
6 60 £4,500 £ 61 £1,525 £270 £1,795 
8 80 £6,000 £ 46 £1,150 £360 £1,510 
10 100 £7,500 £ 37 £925 £450 £1,375 
12 120 £9,000 £ 31 £775 £540 £1,315 
14 140 £10,500 £ 27 £675 £630 £1,305 
16 160 £12,000 £ 23 £575 £720 £1,295 
18 180 £13,500 £ 21 £525 £810 £1,335 
20 200 £15,000 £150 19 £475 £900 £1,225 Best
22 220 £16,500 £165 17 £425 £990 £1,250 
24 240 £18,000 £180 16 £400 £1,080 £1,300 
26 260 £19,500 £195 15 £375 £1,170 £1,350 
28 280 £21,000 £210 14 £350 £1,260 £1,400 
30 300 £22,500 £225 13 £325 £1,350 £1,450 
32 320 £24,000 £240 12 £300 £1,440 £1,500 
34 340 £25,500 £255 11 £275 £1,530 £1,550 
36 360 £27,000 £270 11 £275 £1,620 £1,625 
38 380 £28,500 £285 10 £250 £1,710 £1,675 
40 400 £30,000 £300 10 £250 £1,800 £1,750 
42 420 £31,500 £315 9 £225 £1,890 £1,800 
44 440 £33,000 £330 9 £225 £1,980 £1,875 
Ordering
Interval
In Days
Quantity
Per Order
Order
Value
Order
Discount
Orders
Per Year
Annual
Admin
Cost
Annual
Ware
house
Costs
Annual
Total
The Best
Ordering
Interval
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Ordering Stock
Page 146 of 206
46 460 £34,500 £345 8 £200 £2,070 £1,925 
48 480 £36,000 £360 8 £200 £2,160 £2,000 
50 500 £37,500 £375 8 £200 £2,250 £2,075 
52 520 £39,000 £390 8 £200 £2,340 £2,150 
54 540 £40,500 £405 7 £175 £2,430 £2,200 
56 560 £42,000 £420 7 £175 £2,520 £2,275 
58 580 £43,500 £435 7 £175 £2,610 £2,350 
60 600 £45,000 £450 7 £175 £2,700 £2,425 
Things To Try
Change the Discount % to 0% and 0%.
Change the Ordering Interval to 1 or 30.
Change the Cost of the Exhaust making it cheaper or more expensive.
Change the Quantity used per day to a larger or smaller number.
Explanation
Column A Ordering Interval In Days
The first of these cells has the value 1 entered in it.
This is the smallest ordering period, which would require stock to be ordered every day.
The second cell picks the ordering interval from the Input Data table.
The third and subsequent cells add the ordering interval to the previous cell to create
a list of values of the same interval.
Column B Quantity Per Order
This is the number of Exhausts which will need to be ordered.
Calculation : OrderingInterval * QuantityUsedPerDay
Column C Order Value
This is the value of the Order before any discount.
Calculation : QuantityOrdered * CostOfExhaust
Column D Order Discount
The discount which can be subtracted from the order value.
The discount is only given on orders which are equal to or greater than the
Price Break values set by the supplier.
Calculation : OrderValue * SupplierDiscount
The supplier discount is calculated using the =IF() and the =AND() functions.
If the OrderQuantity is equal to or above the first Price Break, but below
the second Price Break, then the first Price Break discount is used.
If the OrderQuantity is equal to or above the second Price Break,
the second Price Break discount is used.
If the OrderQuantity does not qualify for a discount, zero discount is used.
Column E Orders Per Year
This is how many orders will need to be made based upon the ordering interval.
=C29*IF(AND(B29>=$G$24,B29<$G$25),$H$24,IF(B29>=$G$25,$H$25,0))
=C29*IF(AND(B29>=$G$24,B29<$G$25),$H$24,IF(B29>=$G$25,$H$25,0))
=C29*IF(AND(B29>=$G$24,B29<$G$25),$H$24,IF(B29>=$G$25,$H$25,0))
A B C D E F G H I
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Ordering Stock
Page 147 of 206
With an interval of 1, there will have to be 365 orders.
Calculation : 365/OrderingInterval
This calculation may give results which are decimal, such as 2.3
This decimal will cause problems, due to the fact that the number of
orders must always be a whole number.
The =CEILING() function has been used to 'round up' any decimals to
the next highest whole number.
=CEILING(365/A29,1)
Column F Annual Admin Costs
This is the administration costs involved in making the orders.
Calculation : OrdersPerYear * AdminCost
=E29*$G$20
Column G Annual Warehouse Costs
This is the cost of keeping the stock in the warehouse.
It is based on the managers knowledge that on average the stock level is 50% of the
quantity ordered.
Calculation : QuantityOrdered * AverageStockLevel) * ExhaustCost * WarehousingCost
=(B29*$G$21)*$G$17*$G$18
Column H Annual Total
This is the full yearly cost of ordering the Exhausts, based upon how frequently the
orders are made.
It does not take in to account the actual costs of the Exhausts, as the manager only
wants to know what the lowest values for the overheads associated with ordering and
storing the exhaust systems.
However, the Discount figure is taken into account as this can be used to offset some
of the overheads.
Calculation : AnnualAdminCosts + AnnualWarehouseCosts  OrderDiscount
=F29+G29D29
Column I The Best Ordering Interval
This shows the Best ordering interval, giving the lowest annual overheads.
It compares the value in column H against the minimum value for all of column H.
If the two values match the word Best is shown, otherwise a dash is shown.
=IF(H29=MIN($H$29:$H$59),"Best","")
A B C D E F G H I
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
PACKERS
Page 148 of 206
Box size Sample Packer1 Packer2 Packer3 Packer4
Small 1 10 10 10 10
Medium 1 20 20 20 21
Large 1 30 28 35 30
Small 2 11 9 10 10
Medium 2 21 20 0 20
Large 2 31 28 30 30
Small 3 8 10 12 10
Medium 3 22 20 20 19
Large 3 32 28 30 30
Box size Sample Packer1 Packer2 Packer3 Packer4
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
PERMUT
Page 149 of 206
PERMUT
Pool Of Items Items In A Group Permutations
4 2 12 =PERMUT(C4,D4)
4 3 24 =PERMUT(C5,D5)
10 4 5040 =PERMUT(C6,D6)
26 6 165,765,600 =PERMUT(C7,D7)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the maximum number of permutations given a fixed number of items.
The internal order is significant, so AB and BA will be considered as two possible permutations.
It could be used to calculate the possible number of 4 digit passwords from the digits 0 to 9.
Syntax
=PERMUT(PoolToPickFrom,ItemsInAGroup)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used to calculate the total number of 8 letter passwords which can
be created by using all 26 letters of the alphabet.
Letter In Alphabet 26
Password Size 8
Permutations 62,990,928,000
In the case of a two letter password made from the letter A, B, C and D, the following
twelve permutations would be possible.
ABCD
Password 1 AB Password 7 BA
Password 2 AC Password 8 CA
Password 3 AD Password 9 DA
Password 4 BC Password 10 CB
Password 5 BD Password 11 DB
Password 6 CD Password 12 DC
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
PI
Page 150 of 206
PI
π
3.14159265358979 =PI()
What Does It Do ?
This function is equal to the value of Pi.
It is correct to 15 decimal places.
It does not need any input, it is a self contained function.
Syntax
=PI()
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
To calculate the area of a circle.
Radius Area
5 78.54 =PI()*(C21^2)
25 1963.50
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
POWER
Page 151 of 206
POWER
Number Power Result
3 2 9 =POWER(C4,D4)
3 4 81 =POWER(C5,D5)
5 2 25 =POWER(C6,D6)
5 4 625 =POWER(C7,D7)
What Does It Do ?
This function raises a number to a user specified power.
It is the same as using the ^ operator, such as 3^4, which result is 81.
Both the POWER() function and the ^ operator are the same as using 3*3*3*3.
Syntax
=POWER(NumberToBeRaised,Power)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
To calculate the area of a circle.
Radius Area
5 78.54 =PI()*POWER(C22,2)
25 1963.50
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
PRODUCT
Page 152 of 206
PRODUCT
Numbers Product
2 3 6 =PRODUCT(C4,D4)
5 10 50 =PRODUCT(C5:D5)
3 7 210 =PRODUCT(C6:D6,10)
6300 =PRODUCT(C4:D6)
What Does It Do ?
This function multiples a group of numbers together.
It is the same as using 2*3*5*10*3*7, which results in 6300.
Syntax
=PRODUCT(Number1,Number2,Number3... through to Number30)
or
=PRODUCT(RangeOfNumbers)
or
=PRODUCT(Number1,Range,Number2...)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
PROPER
Page 153 of 206
PROPER
Original Text Proper
alan jones Alan Jones =PROPER(C4)
bob smith Bob Smith =PROPER(C5)
caRol wILLIAMS Carol Williams =PROPER(C6)
cardiff Cardiff =PROPER(C7)
ABC123 Abc123 =PROPER(C8)
What Does It Do ?
This function converts the first letter of each word to uppercase, and all subsequent letters
are converted to lower case.
Syntax
=PROPER(TextToConvert)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
QUARTILE
Page 154 of 206
QUARTILE
Values Quarter No. Quartile
1 0 1 =QUARTILE(C4:C8,E4)
25 1 25 =QUARTILE(C4:C8,E5)
50 2 50 =QUARTILE(C4:C8,E6)
75 3 75 =QUARTILE(C4:C8,E7)
100 4 100 =QUARTILE(C4:C8,E8)
Values Quarter No. Quartile
817 104 640 767 0 104 =QUARTILE(C12:F16,H12)
748 756 369 703 1 285.75 =QUARTILE(C12:F16,H13)
372 993 294 261 2 489 =QUARTILE(C12:F16,H14)
487 384 185 491 3 750 =QUARTILE(C12:F16,H15)
140 607 894 182 4 993 =QUARTILE(C12:F16,H16)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a group of values and then shows the values which are of the
upper limits of the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th quarters of the data.
The Quartile of 0 (zero) is actually lowest value, which can be obtained using the =MIN() function.
The Quartile of 4 is actually highest value, which can be obtained using the =MAX() function.
Syntax
=QUARTILE(RangeToBeExamined,QuartileValue)
The QuartileValue can only be 0,1,2,3 or 4.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I J K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
QUOTIENT
Page 155 of 206
QUOTIENT
Number Divisor Result
12 5 2 =QUOTIENT(C4,D4)
20 3 6 =QUOTIENT(C5,D5)
46 15 3 =QUOTIENT(C6,D6)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the number of times a number can be divided by another number.
It ignores any remainder, only showing the whole number.
Syntax
=QUOTIENT(NumberToBeDivided,Divisor)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following example was used by a drinks merchant to calculate the number of
crates which could be packed using bottles in stock.
The merchant can only sell full crates.
Table 1 calculates the crates by simple division. This however shows
decimal fractions which are not needed.
Table 1
Item Crates Needed
Wine 126 12 10.5 =D28/E28
Champagne 200 8 25
Rum 15 4 3.75
Beer 250 20 12.5
Table 2 uses the =QUOTIENT() function to remove the decimal fraction to
give the correct result.
Table 2
Item Crates Needed
Wine 126 12 10 =QUOTIENT(D39,E39)
Champagne 200 8 25
Rum 15 6 2
Beer 250 20 12
Bottles
To Pack
Bottles
Per Crate
Bottles
To Pack
Bottles
Per Crate
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
RAND
Page 156 of 206
RAND
Random greater than or equal to 0 but less than 1.
0.69 =RAND()
Random greater than or equal to 0 but less than 10
8.71 =RAND()*10
Random between 5 and 10.
7.74 =RAND()*(105)+5
What Does It Do ?
This function creates a random number >=0 but <1.
The number will change each time the worksheet recalculates, or when F9 is pressed.
Syntax
=RAND()
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Examples
The following examples show how the =RAND() function has been used to randomly
sort list of information.
A list of cards has been entered in column C, and =RAND() in column D.
By clicking inside the random numbers and then using Data, Sort or the Sort button
the cards will be shuffled.
The same technique has been used to generate a list of six winning lottery numbers.
Card Random Lottery Random
Clubs 8 0.67 29 0.9
Clubs 6 0.21 34 0.83
Diamond 9 0.09 30 0.56
Spades 13 0.77 41 0.71
Clubs 9 0.71 40 0.83
Diamond 7 0.28 37 0.17
Diamond 4 0.46 26 0.44
Clubs 10 0.9 32 0.17
Spades 3 0.03 21 0.33
Hearts 6 0.18 19 0.41
Hearts 4 0.14 7 0.37
Diamond 8 0.25 10 0.5
Hearts 11 0.76 16 0.89
Clubs 3 0 8 0.06
Clubs 13 0.65 48 0.21
Spades 5 0.05 43 0.71
Diamond 3 0.66 44 0.06
Spades 2 0.67 4 0.66
Diamond 6 0.19 3 0.64
Clubs 5 0.43 45 0.13
Spades 1 0.72 47 0.49
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
RAND
Page 157 of 206
Clubs 12 0.58 49 0.06
Hearts 10 0.81 35 0.04
Hearts 13 0.69 27 0.12
Spades 7 0.27 1 0.17
Spades 6 0.02 13 0.64
Diamond 12 0.29 31 0.59
Hearts 3 0.32 5 0.68
Hearts 5 0.71 18 0.57
Hearts 8 0.16 39 0.03
Hearts 1 0.87 23 0.05
Diamond 13 0.38 12 0.47
Hearts 9 0.37 11 0.86
Clubs 4 0.96 20 0.62
Diamond 5 0.14 33 0.18
Spades 4 0.08 42 0.69
Clubs 1 0.23 24 0.79
Spades 8 0.6 2 0.62
Hearts 7 0.98 14 0.87
Diamond 1 0.26 25 0.12
Clubs 2 0.78 9 0.03
Hearts 2 0.12 38 0.24
Diamond 11 0.51 15 0.61
Clubs 7 0.54 28 0.92
Spades 12 0.13 17 0.3
Spades 10 0.17 6 0.82
Clubs 11 0.59 22 0.63
Diamond 2 0.79 46 0.36
Diamond 10 0.84 36 0.49
Spades 9 0.27
Spades 11 0.5
Hearts 12 0.98
A B C D E F G H I
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
RANDBETWEEN
Page 158 of 206
RANDBETWEEN
Low High Random
5 10 9 =RANDBETWEEN(C4,D4)
1 49 11 =RANDBETWEEN(C5,D5)
What Does It Do ?
This function produces a random whole number between two specified numbers.
The random number will change each time the spreadsheet is recalculated or F9 is pressed.
Syntax
=RANDOMBETWEEN(LowLimit,HighLimit)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table shows how the =RANDBETWEEN() has been used to generate six
numbers to use for the National Lottery.
Note that the function does not check to ensure all numbers are unique, the same number
could be generated twice or more.
Lottery Numbers
1 49 17 =RANDBETWEEN($C$24,$D$24) Number 1
27 =RANDBETWEEN($C$24,$D$24) Number 2
Press function Key 5 =RANDBETWEEN($C$24,$D$24) Number 3
F9 to recalculate. 25 =RANDBETWEEN($C$24,$D$24) Number 4
10 =RANDBETWEEN($C$24,$D$24) Number 5
34 =RANDBETWEEN($C$24,$D$24) Number 6
10 =RANDBETWEEN($C$24,$D$24) Bonus ball
Duplicates! Spin again
{=IF(SUM(1/COUNTIF(E24:E30,E24:E30))<>7,"Duplicates! Spin again","All OK")}
This formula is used to determine whether all the numbers are different.
It is entered as an array using Ctrl+Shift+Enter.
The Winning
Ticket!
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
RANK
Page 159 of 206
RANK
Values
7 4 =RANK(C4,C4:C8)
4 5 =RANK(C5,C4:C8)
25 1 =RANK(C6,C4:C8)
8 3 =RANK(C7,C4:C8)
16 2 =RANK(C8,C4:C8)
Values
7 2 =RANK(C11,C11:C15,1)
4 1 =RANK(C12,C11:C15,1)
25 5 =RANK(C13,C11:C15,1)
8 3 =RANK(C14,C11:C15,1)
16 4 =RANK(C15,C11:C15,1)
Values
10 5 =RANK(C18,C18:C22)
30 2 =RANK(C19,C18:C22)
20 4 =RANK(C20,C18:C22)
30 2 =RANK(C21,C18:C22)
40 1 =RANK(C22,C18:C22)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the position of a value in a list relative to the other values in the list.
A typical usage would be to rank the times of athletes in a race to find the winner.
The ranking can be done on an ascending (low to high) or descending (high to low) basis.
If there are duplicate values in the list, they will be assigned the same rank. Subsequent ranks
would not follow on sequentially, but would take into account the fact that there were duplicates.
If the numbers 30, 20, 20 and 10 were ranked, 30 is ranked as 1, both 20's are ranked as 2, and
the 10 would be ranked as 4.
Value Rank
30 1 =RANK(B34,B34:B37)
20 2 =RANK(B35,B34:B37)
20 2 =RANK(B36,B34:B37)
10 4 =RANK(B37,B34:B37)
Syntax
=RANK(NumberToRank,ListOfNumbers,RankOrder)
The RankOrder can be 0 zero or 1.
Using 0 will rank larger numbers at the top. (This is optional, leaving it out has the same effect).
Using 1 will rank small numbers at the top.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
Ranking Position
High to Low
Ranking Position
Low to High
Ranking Position
High to Low
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
RANK
Page 160 of 206
The following table was used to record the times for athletes competing in a race.
The =RANK() function was then used to find their race positions based upon the finishing times.
Athlete Time Race Position
John 1:30 4 =RANK(C53,C53:C58,1)
Alan 1:45 6 =RANK(C54,C53:C58,1)
David 1:02 1 =RANK(C55,C53:C58,1)
Brian 1:36 5 =RANK(C56,C53:C58,1)
Sue 1:27 3 =RANK(C57,C53:C58,1)
Alex 1:03 2 =RANK(C58,C53:C58,1)
A B C D E F G H I
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
REPLACE
Page 161 of 206
REPLACE
Original Text
ABCDEFGH 2 1 x AxCDEFGH =REPLACE(C4,D4,E4,F4)
ABCDEFGH 2 5 x AxGH =REPLACE(C5,D5,E5,F5)
ABCDEFGH 2 1 hello AhelloCDEFGH =REPLACE(C6,D6,E6,F6)
ABCDEFGH 2 5 hello AhelloGH =REPLACE(C7,D7,E7,F7)
What Does It Do ?
This function replaces a portion of text with a new piece of text.
You need to specify where the replacement should start, how many characters to
remove and what the new replacement text should be.
Syntax
=REPLACE(OriginalText,StartPosition,NumberOfCharactersToReplace,NewText)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Start
Position
Characters
To Replace
New
Character
Modified
Text
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
REPT
Page 162 of 206
REPT
A 3 AAA =REPT(C4,D4)
AB 3 ABABAB =REPT(C5,D5)
 10  =REPT(C6,D6)
 10  =REPT(C7,D7)
What Does It Do ?
This function repeats a piece of text a specified number of times.
You need to specify the text to be repeated and how many times to repeat it.
Syntax
=REPT(TextToRepeat,Repetitions)
The maximum number of repetitions is 200.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example 1
The following table was used to display a simple histogram of sales figures.
The =REPT() function uses the value of Sales, but this is divided by 100 to scale down the
number of repetitions to below the maximum of 200.
Month Sales
Jan £1,000 
Feb £5,000 
Mar £3,000 
Apr £2,000 
=REPT("",D29/100)
Example 2
The =REPT() function has been used to make a digital display for the current time.
The time functions of =HOUR(), =MINUTE() and =SECOND() have been used in conjunction
with the =NOW() as the basis for the number of repeats.
To update the clock press the function key F9.
Clock
Hour  06
Minute  28
Second  51
=REPT("",HOUR(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(HOUR(NOW()),"00")
=REPT("",MINUTE(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(MINUTE(NOW()),"00")
=REPT("",SECOND(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(SECOND(NOW()),"00")
Text To
Repeat
Number Of
Repeats
Repeated
Text
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
RIGHT
Page 163 of 206
RIGHT
Alan Jones 1 s =RIGHT(C4,D4)
Alan Jones 2 es =RIGHT(C5,D5)
Alan Jones 3 nes =RIGHT(C6,D6)
Cardiff 6 ardiff =RIGHT(C7,D7)
ABC123 4 C123 =RIGHT(C8,D8)
What Does It Do ?
This function displays a specified number of characters from the right hand side of a
piece of text.
Syntax
=RIGHT(OriginalText,NumberOfCharactersRequired)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used to extract the second name of a person from their full name.
The =FIND() function locates the position of the space between the first and second name.
The length of the second name is calculated by subtracting the position of the space from
the overall length of the full name.
The =RIGHT() function can then extract the second name.
Full Name Second Name
Alan Jones Jones =RIGHT(C28,LEN(C28)FIND(" ",C28))
Bob Smith Smith =RIGHT(C29,LEN(C29)FIND(" ",C29))
Carol Williams Williams =RIGHT(C30,LEN(C30)FIND(" ",C30))
Original
Text
Number Of
Characters
Required
Right
String
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ROMAN
Page 164 of 206
ROMAN
Number Roman
1 I =ROMAN(C4)
2 II =ROMAN(C5)
3 III =ROMAN(C6)
5 V =ROMAN(C7)
10 X =ROMAN(C8)
1998 MCMXCVIII =ROMAN(C9)
1998 MCMXCVIII =ROMAN(C10,0)
1998 MLMVLIII =ROMAN(C11,1)
1998 MXMVIII =ROMAN(C12,2)
1998 MVMIII =ROMAN(C13,3)
1998 MVMIII =ROMAN(C14,4)
1998 MLMVLIII =ROMAN(C15,TRUE)
1998 MCMXCVIII =ROMAN(C16,FALSE)
What Does It Do ?
This function produces a number shown as Roman numerals in various formats.
Syntax
=ROMAN(NormalNumber,RomanNumberFormat)
The RomanNumberFormat can be any of the following.
0 is Classic. This is used if no format is specified.
1 is more Concise.
2 is even more Concise.
3 is even more Concise still.
4 is Simplified.
TRUE is Classic
FALSE is Simplified
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Note
There is no function to do the opposite calculation of Roman to normal.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ROUND
Page 165 of 206
ROUND
Number
1.48 0 1 =ROUND(C4,D4)
1.48 1 1.5 =ROUND(C5,D5)
1.48 2 1.48 =ROUND(C6,D6)
13643.48 1 13640 =ROUND(C7,D7)
13643.48 2 13600 =ROUND(C8,D8)
13643.48 3 14000 =ROUND(C9,D9)
What Does It Do ?
This function rounds a number to a specified amount od decimal places.
If 0 is used the number is rounded to the nearest whole number.
If a negative amount of rounding is used the figures to the left of the decimal point are rounded.
Syntax
=ROUND(NumberToRound,DecimalPlacesToUse)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Places To
Round
Rounded
Number
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ROUNDDOWN
Page 166 of 206
ROUNDDOWN
Number
1.48 0 1 =ROUNDDOWN(C4,D4)
1.48 1 1.4 =ROUNDDOWN(C5,D5)
1.48 2 1.47 =ROUNDDOWN(C6,D6)
13643.48 1 13640 =ROUNDDOWN(C7,D7)
13643.48 2 13600 =ROUNDDOWN(C8,D8)
13643.48 3 13000 =ROUNDDOWN(C9,D9)
What Does It Do ?
This function rounds a number down to a specified amount of decimal places.
If 0 is used the number is rounded down to the nearest whole number.
If a negative amount of rounding is used the figures to the left of the decimal point are rounded.
Syntax
=ROUNDDOWN(NumberToRound,DecimalPlacesToUse)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Places To
Round
Rounded
Down
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
ROUNDUP
Page 167 of 206
ROUNDUP
Number
1.48 0 2 =ROUNDUP(C4,D4)
1.48 1 1.5 =ROUNDUP(C5,D5)
1.48 2 1.48 =ROUNDUP(C6,D6)
13643.48 1 13650 =ROUNDUP(C7,D7)
13643.48 2 13700 =ROUNDUP(C8,D8)
13643.48 3 14000 =ROUNDUP(C9,D9)
What Does It Do ?
This function rounds a number up to a specified amount of decimal places.
If 0 is used the number is rounded up to the nearest whole number.
If a negative amount of rounding is used the figures to the left of the decimal point are rounded.
Syntax
=ROUNDUPNumberToRound,DecimalPlacesToUse)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Places To
Round
Rounded
Up
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SECOND
Page 168 of 206
SECOND
Number Second
04/Oct/10 06:32:42 42 =SECOND(C4)
12:00:00 PM 0 =SECOND(C5)
0.50 0 =SECOND(C6)
0.51 24 =SECOND(C7)
1.51 24 =SECOND(C8)
What Does It Do?
The function will show the second of the minute based upon a time or a number.
Only the fraction part of the number is used as it is this which relates to time of day.
Syntax
=SECOND(Number)
Formatting
The result will be shown as a normal number between 0 and 59.
Example
The following table was used by a telephone compnay to calculate the cost of a call.
The telephone company only deals in seconds which are a multiple of 5.
The seconds in a call are rounded up to the nearest multiple of 5 before the bill is calculated.
The Duration of the call is entered.
The =MINUTES() function calculates the total number of minutes.
The =SECOND() function calculates the total number of seconds.
The =CEILING() function rounds the seconds up to the nearest muliple of 5.
The Cost of the call is then calculated.
Cost Per Second : £0.01
Billed Duration
Duration Minutes Seconds Cost
0:01:08 1 10 £0.70
0:02:03 2 5 £1.25
0:01:47 1 50 £1.10
=CEILING(SECOND(C36),5)
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SIGN
Page 169 of 206
SIGN
Value
10 1 =SIGN(C4)
20 1 =SIGN(C5)
0 0 =SIGN(C6)
10 1 =SIGN(C7)
20 1 =SIGN(C8)
What Does It Do ?
This function tests a value to determine whether it is positive or negative.
If the value is positive the result is 1.
If the value is negative the result is 1.
If the value is zero 0 the result is 0.
Syntax
=SIGN(CellToTest)
The CellToTest can be a cell or a calculation.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Positive or
Negative
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SLN
Page 170 of 206
SLN
Cost £12,000
Salvage £2,000
Life 4
Straight Line Depreciation £2,500 =SLN(F3,F4,F5)
Purchase Value Of A New Car £20,000
Second Hand Value £8,000
Number Of Years Ownership 6
Annual Straight Line Depreciation £2,000 =SLN(F9,F10,F11)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the Straight Line Depreciation of an item.
(Also known as Fixed Instalment method).
The Straight Line Depreciation is how much the value of an item reduced during a specific
period of time. The result is a uniform depreciation value.
An example would be if you bought a new car for £20,000, then kept it for 6 years.
At the end of your ownership you sell the car for £8,000.
The difference between the original and the trade in price is £20,000  £8,000 which is £12,000.
Because you owned the car for 6 years, the SLN is calculated as £12,000 / 6 which is £2,000.
Syntax
=SLN(OriginalCost,SellingPrice,LengthOfOwnership)
The LengthOfOwnership can be any time period, days, months or years.
However, the SLN which is calculated will, be for that time, specifying 2 years ownership
as 24 months will give an SLN per month.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SMALL
Page 171 of 206
SMALL
Values Lowest Value 100 =SMALL(C4:C8,1)
120 2nd Lowest Value 120 =SMALL(C4:C8,2)
800 3rd Lowest Value 120 =SMALL(C4:C8,3)
100 4th Lowest Value 250 =SMALL(C4:C8,4)
120 5th Lowest Value 800 =SMALL(C4:C8,5)
250
What Does It Do ?
This function examines a list of values and picks the value at a user specified position
in the list.
Syntax
=SMALL(ListOfNumbersToExamine,PositionToPickFrom)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used to calculate the bottom 3 sales figures between Jan, Feb and Mar.
Sales Jan Feb Mar
North £5,000 £6,000 £4,500
South £5,800 £7,000 £3,000
East £3,500 £2,000 £10,000
West £12,000 £4,000 £6,000
Lowest Value £2,000 =SMALL(D24:F27,1)
2nd Lowest Value £3,000 =SMALL(D24:F27,2)
3rd Lowest Value £3,500 =SMALL(D24:F27,3)
Note
Another way to find the Highest and Lowest values would have been to use
the =MAX() and =MIN() functions.
Highest £12,000 =MAX(D24:F27)
Lowest £2,000 =MIN(D24:F27)
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SOUTH
Page 172 of 206
Southern data.
Used by the example for the =INDIRECT() function.
Jan Feb Mar Total
Alan 100 200 300 600
Bob 400 500 600 1500
Carol 700 800 900 2400
Total 1200 1500 1800 4500
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
STDEV
Page 173 of 206
STDEV
Values Values Values
10 10 10
10 10 11
9 11 9
10 10 12
0.5 0.5 1.29
=STDEV(C4:C7) =STDEV(E4:E7) =STDEV(G4:G7)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the sample population standard deviation of a list of values.
A sample population is used when the list of values represents a sample of a population.
Syntax
=STDEV(Range1,Range2,Range3 through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The table below was used by a company interested in buying a new machine
to pack washing powder.
Three machines were short listed and allow to run for a day.
At the end of the day four boxes of soap powder were picked at random from the production
of each machine.
The boxes were weighed and the =STDEV() function used as these boxes only represented
a sample of the complete days production.
The machine with the smallest deviation was the most consistent.
Soap Powder Box Filling Machine Test Results
Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Variance
Machine 1 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.5 0.0816 =STDEV(D34:G34)
Machine 2 1.5 1.5 1.4 1.5 0.0500 =STDEV(D35:G35)
Machine 3 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 0.1291 =STDEV(D36:G36)
The smallest deviation is : 0.0500 =MIN(H34:H36)
The machine with the smallest deviation is : Machine 2
=INDEX(C34:C36,MATCH(MIN(H34:H36),H34:H36,0))
Explanation of formula:
This finds the lowest value. =MIN(H34:H36)
This finds the position of the lowest value. =MATCH(MIN(H34:H36),H34:H36,0)
This looks down the Machine column to =INDEX(C34:C36,MATCH(MIN(H34:H36),H34:H36,0))
find the machine name.
A B C D E F G H I J K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
STDEVP
Page 174 of 206
STDEVP
Values Values Values
10 10 10
10 10 11
9 11 9
10 10 12
0.43 0.43 1.12
=STDEVP(C4:C7) =STDEVP(E4:E7) =STDEVP(G4:G7)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the standard deviation of a list of values.
The result is calculated on the basis that the values represent the entire population.
Syntax
=STDEVP(Range1,Range2,Range3 through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The table below was used by a company interested in buying a new machine
to pack washing powder.
A trial run of just four boxes per machine were produced.
The boxes were weighed and the =STDEVP() function used as these boxes
represented the entire test run.
The machine with the smallest variance was the most consistent. ????????????????????
Soap Powder Box Filling Machine Test Results
Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Variance
Machine 1 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.5 0.0707 =STDEVP(D32:G32)
Machine 2 1.5 1.5 1.4 1.5 0.0433 =STDEVP(D33:G33)
Machine 3 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 0.1118 =STDEVP(D34:G34)
The smallest variance is : 0.0433 =MIN(H32:H34)
The machine with the smallest variance is : Machine 2
=INDEX(C32:C34,MATCH(MIN(H32:H34),H32:H34,0))
Explanation of formula:
This finds the lowest value. =(MIN(H32:H34)
This finds the position of the lowest value. =MATCH(MIN(H32:H34),H32:H34,0)
This looks down the Machine column to =INDEX(C32:C34,MATCH(MIN(H32:H34),H32:H34,0))
find the machine name.
A B C D E F G H I J K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SUBSTITUTE
Page 175 of 206
SUBSTITUTE
Original Text Updated Text
ABCDEF CD hello ABhelloEF =SUBSTITUTE(B4,C4,D4)
ABCDABCD CD hello ABhelloABhello =SUBSTITUTE(B5,C5,D5)
Northern Region Region Area Northern Area =SUBSTITUTE(B6,C6,D6)
Sand and Cement and & S& & Cement =SUBSTITUTE(B7,C7,D7)
Original Text Updated Text
ABCABCABC ABC hello 3 ABCABChello
Sand and Cement and & 2 Sand & Cement
=SUBSTITUTE(B10,C10,D10,E10)
=SUBSTITUTE(B11,C11,D11,E11)
What Does It Do ?
This function replaces a specified piece of text with a different piece of text.
It can either replace all occurrences of the text, or a specific instance.
The function is case sensitive.
Syntax
=SUBSTITUTE(OriginalText,TextToRemove,TextToInsert,InstanceToUse)
The InstanceToUse is optional, if it is omitted all instances will be substituted.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Note
To cope with upper or lower case in the substitution you can use other text functions
such as =UPPER(), =LOWER() or =PROPER() to ensure that the substitution will take place.
Table 1 shows how differing text cases alter the result of the substitution.
Table 1
Original Text Updated Text
Northern Region Region Area Northern Area
Region Area Northern region
Northern Region region Area Northern Region
Northern Region Region area Northern area
Northern Region region area Northern Region
=SUBSTITUTE(B39,C39,D39)
Table 2 shows how the =PROPER() function has been used to take account of the mixed cases.
Table 2
Original Text Updated Text
Northern Region Region Area Northern Area
Region Area Northern Area
Northern Region region Area Northern Area
Northern Region Region area Northern Area
Northern Region region area Northern Area
Old Text
To Remove
New Text
To Insert
Old Text
To Remove
New Text
To Insert
Instance To
Be Replaced
Old Text
To Remove
New Text
To Insert
Northern region
Old Text
To Remove
New Text
To Insert
Northern region
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SUBSTITUTE
Page 176 of 206
=SUBSTITUTE(PROPER(B50),PROPER(C50),PROPER(D50))
A B C D E F G H
51
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SUM
Page 177 of 206
SUM
Horizontal
100 200 300 600 =SUM(C4:E4)
Vertical
100
200
300
600 =SUM(C7:C9)
Single Cells
100 300 600 =SUM(C13,D14,E13)
200
Multiple Ranges
100 400
200 500
3000 600
4800 =SUM(C17:C19,E17:E19)
Functions
100 400
200 500
300 600
800 =SUM(AVERAGE(C23:C25),MAX(E23:E25))
What Does It Do ?
This function creates a total from a list of numbers.
It can be used either horizontally or vertically.
The numbers can be in single cells, ranges are from other functions.
Syntax
=SUM(Range1,Range2,Range3... through to Range30).
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Note
Many people use the =SUM() function incorrectly.
This example shows how the SUM has been combined with plus + symbols.
The formula is actually doing more work than needed.
It should have been entered as either =C48+C49+C50 or =SUM(C48:C50).
100
200
300
600 =SUM(C48+C49+C50) Wrong!
=SUM(C48:C50) Correct
=C48+C49+C50 Correct
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SUM_as_Running_Total
Page 178 of 206
SUM (Running Total)
Using =SUM() For A Running Total
Month Sales
Jan 10 10 =SUM($D$7:D7)
Feb 50 60 =SUM($D$7:D8)
Mar 30 90 =SUM($D$7:D9)
Apr 20 110 =SUM($D$7:D10)
May 110 =SUM($D$7:D11)
Jun 110 =SUM($D$7:D12)
Jul 110 =SUM($D$7:D13)
Aug 110 =SUM($D$7:D14)
Sep 110 =SUM($D$7:D15)
Oct 110 =SUM($D$7:D16)
Nov 110 =SUM($D$7:D17)
Dec 110 =SUM($D$7:D18)
Type the formula =SUM($D$7:D7) in cell E7 and then copy down the table.
It works because the first reference uses dollar symbols $ to keep $D$7 static
as the formula is copied down. Each occurrence of the =SUM() then adds all
the numbers from the first cell down.
The function can be tidied up to show 0 zero when there is no adjacent value
by using the =IF() function.
Month Sales
Jan 10 10 =SUM(IF(D7,$D$7:D7,0))
Feb 50 60 =SUM(IF(D8,$D$7:D8,0))
Mar 30 90 =SUM(IF(D9,$D$7:D9,0))
Apr 20 110 =SUM(IF(D10,$D$7:D10,0))
May 0 =SUM(IF(D11,$D$7:D11,0))
Jun 0 =SUM(IF(D12,$D$7:D12,0))
Jul 0 The =SUM() only takes place when
Aug 0 there is data in column D.
Sep 0 Otherwise the value 0 zero is entered.
Oct 0
Nov 0
Dec 0
Running
Total
Running
Total
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SUM_with_OFFSET
Page 179 of 206
SUM and the =OFFSET function
Sometimes it is necessary to base a calculation on a set of cells in different locations.
An example would be when a total is required from certain months of the year, such as
the last 3 months in relation to the current date.
One solution would be to retype the calculation each time new data is entered, but this
would be time consuming and open to human error.
A better way is to indicate the start and end point of the range to be calculated by
using the =OFFSET() function.
The =OFFSET() picks out a cell a certain number of cells away from another cell.
By giving the =OFFSET() the address of the first cell in the range which needs to
be totalled, we can then indicate how far away the end cell should be and the =OFFSET()
will give us the address of cell which will be the end of the range to be totalled.
The =OFFSET() needs to know three things;
1. A cell address to use as the fixed point from where it should base the offset.
2. How many rows it should look up or down from the starting point.
3. How many columns it should look left or right from the starting point.
Total Jan Feb Mar Apr May
10 10 400 500 600 700
This example uses E24 as the starting point and offsets no rows or columns which
results in the range being summed as E24:E24.
410 10 400 500 600 700
This example uses E29 as the starting point and offsets 1 col to pick out
cell F29 resulting in a the range E29:F29 being summed.
910 10 400 500 600 700
This example uses E34 as the starting point and offsets 2 cols to pick out
cell G34 resulting in a the range E34:G34 being summed.
Using =OFFSET() Twice In A Formula
The following examples use =OFFSET() to pick both the start and end of the range
which needs to be totalled.
Total Jan Feb Mar Apr May
400 10 400 500 600 700
The cell E45 has been used as the starting point for both offsets and each has
been offset by just 1 column. The result is that just cell F45 is used as the
range F45:F45 for the sum function to calculate.
900 10 400 500 600 700
The cell E51 has been used as the starting point of both offsets, the first offset is
offset by 1 column, the second by 2 columns. The result is the range F51:G51 which
=SUM(E24:OFFSET(E24,0,0))
=SUM(E29:OFFSET(E29,0,1))
=SUM(E34:OFFSET(E34,0,2))
=SUM(OFFSET(E45,0,1):OFFSET(E45,0,1))
=SUM(OFFSET(E51,0,1):OFFSET(E51,0,2))
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SUM_with_OFFSET
Page 180 of 206
is then totalled.
1500 10 400 500 600 700
The cell E57 has been used as the starting point for both offsets, the first offset is
offset by 1 column, the second by 3 columns. The result is the range F57:H57 which
is then totalled.
Example
The following table shows five months of data.
To calculate the total of a specific group of months the =OFFSET() function has been used.
The Start and End dates entered in cells F71 and F72 are used as the offset to produce
a range which can be totalled.
Type in the Start month. Feb98
Type in the End month. Mar98
Total Jan98 Feb98 Mar98 Apr98 May98
900 10 400 500 600 700
1020 15 20 1000 2000 3000
13 5 3 10 800 900
=SUM(OFFSET(D79,0,MONTH(F71)):OFFSET(D79,0,MONTH(F72)))
Explanation
The following formula represent a breakdown of what the =OFFSET function does.
The formula displayed below are only dummies, but they will update as you enter
dates into cells F71 and F72.
Formula 1 =SUM( OFFSET(D79,0,MONTH(F71)) : OFFSET(D79,0,MONTH(F72)) )
This is the actual formula entered by the user.
Formula 2 =SUM( OFFSET(D79,0,MONTH(2)) : OFFSET(D79,0,MONTH(3)) )
This shows how the =MONTH function calculates the month number.
In this example the values of the months are 2 and 3 for Feb and Mar.
These values are the 'offsets' relative to cell D79.
Formula 3 =SUM( OFFSET(D79,0,2) : OFFSET(D79,0,3) )
This shows where the month numbers are used in the =OFFSET function.
Formula 4 =SUM( F79:G79 )
This shows how the =OFFSET eventually equates to cell addresses
to be used as a range for the =SUM function.
=SUM(OFFSET(E57,0,1):OFFSET(E57,0,3))
A B C D E F G H I J
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SUMIF
Page 181 of 206
SUMIF
Item Date Cost
Brakes 1Jan98 80
Tyres 10May98 25
Brakes 1Feb98 80
Service 1Mar98 150
Service 5Jan98 300
Window 1Jun98 50
Tyres 1Apr98 200
Tyres 1Mar98 100
Clutch 1May98 250
Total cost of all Brakes bought. 160 =SUMIF(C4:C12,"Brakes",E4:E12)
Total cost of all Tyres bought. 325 =SUMIF(C4:C12,"Tyres",E4:E12)
Total of items costing £100 or above. 1000 =SUMIF(E4:E12,">=100")
Total of item typed in following cell. service 450 =SUMIF(C4:C12,E18,E4:E12)
What Does It Do ?
This function adds the value of items which match criteria set by the user.
Syntax
=SUMIF(RangeOfThingsToBeExamined,CriteriaToBeMatched,RangeOfValuesToTotal)
=SUMIF(C4:C12,"Brakes",E4:E12) This examines the names of products in C4:C12.
It then identifies the entries for Brakes.
It then totals the respective figures in E4:E12
=SUMIF(E4:E12,">=100") This examines the values in E4:E12.
If the value is >=100 the value is added to the total.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SUMPRODUCT
Page 182 of 206
SUMPRODUCT
Item Sold price
Tyres 5 100
Filters 2 10
Bulbs 3 2
Total Sales Value : 526 =SUMPRODUCT(D4:D6,E4:E6)
What Does It Do ?
This function uses at least two columns of values.
The values in the first column are multipled with the corresponding value in the second column.
The total of all the values is the result of the calculation.
Syntax
=SUMPRODUCT(Range1, Range, Range3 through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following table was used by a drinks merchant to keep track of stock.
The merchant needed to know the total purchase value of the stock, and the potential
value of the stock when it is sold, takinging into account the markup percentage.
The =SUMPRODUCT() function is used to multiply the Cases In Stock with the Case Price to
calculate what the merchant spent in buying the stock.
The =SUMPRODUCT() function is used to multiply the Cases In Stock with
the Bottles In Case and the Bottle Setting Price, to calculate the potential value of the
stock if it is all sold.
Product Markup
Red Wine 10 £120 10 £12.00 25% £15.00
White Wine 8 £130 10 £13.00 25% £16.25
Champagne 5 £200 6 £33.33 80% £60.00
Beer 50 £24 12 £2.00 20% £2.40
Lager 100 £30 12 £2.50 25% £3.13
=D39/E39 =F39+F39*G39
Total Value Of Stock : £7,440 =SUMPRODUCT(C35:C39,D35:D39)
Total Selling Price Of Stock : £9,790 =SUMPRODUCT(C35:C39,E35:E39,H35:H39)
Profit : £2,350 =E44E43
Cases In
Stock
Case
Price
Bottles
In Case
Bottle
Cost
Bottle Selling
Price
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SYD
Page 183 of 206
SYD
Purchase Value Of A New Car £20,000
Second Hand Value £8,000
Number Of Years Ownership 6
Deprecation in year 1 £3,429 =SYD(F3,F4,F5,1)
Deprecation in year 2 £2,857 =SYD(F3,F4,F5,2)
Deprecation in year 3 £2,286 =SYD(F3,F4,F5,3)
Deprecation in year 4 £1,714 =SYD(F3,F4,F5,4)
Deprecation in year 5 £1,143 =SYD(F3,F4,F5,5)
Deprecation in year 6 £571 =SYD(F3,F4,F5,6)
Total Depreciation : £12,000 =SUM(F7:F12)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the depreciation of an item throughout its life, using the sum of the
years digits.
The depreciation is greatest in the earlier part of the items life.
What is the Sum Of The Years Digits ?
The sum of the years digits adds together the each of the years of the life.
A life of 3 years has a sum of 1+2+3 equalling 6.
Each of the years is then calculated as a percentage of the sum of the years.
Year 3 is 50% of 6, year 2 is 33% of 6, year 1 is 17% 6.
The total depreciation of the item is then allocated on the basis of these percentages.
A depreciation of £9000 is allocated as 50% being £4500, 33% being £3000, 17% being £1500.
£9,000
1 17% £1,500
2 33% £3,000
3 50% £4,500
As the greater part of the depreciation is allocated to the earliest years the values are
inverted, year 1 is $4500, year 2 is £3000 and year 1 is £1500.
Example 1
Purchase Price Of A Car : £10,000
Salvage Value : £1,000
Expected Life in Years : 3
As % Of Total Depreciation
Depreciation in Year 1 : £4,500 ===> 0.5
Depreciation in Year 2 : £3,000 ===> 0.33
Depreciation in Year 3 : £1,500 ===> 0.17
=SYD(E39,E40,E41,3)
1. Add together the digits of the Life to get the SumOfTheYearsDigits, 1+2+3=6.
2. Subtract the Salvage from the Purchase Price to get Total Deprectation, £10000£1000=£9000.
3. Divide the Total Deprectation by the SumOfTheYearsDigits, £9000/6=£1500.
4. Invert the year digits, 1,2,3 becomes 3,2,1.
5. Multiply 3,2,1 by £1500 to get £4500, £3000, £1500, these values are the depreciation
values for each of the three years in the life of the item.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
SYD
Page 184 of 206
Example 2
The same example using 4 years.
Purchase Price Of A Car : £10,000
Salvage Value : £1,000
Expected Life in Years : 4
As % Of Total Depriciation
Depreciation in Year 1 : £3,600 0.4
Depreciation in Year 2 : £2,700 0.3
Depreciation in Year 3 : £1,800 0.2
Depreciation in Year 4 : £900 0.1
Total Depreciation : £9,000 100%
Example 3
This example will adjust itself to accommodate any number of years between 1 and 10.
Purchase Price Of A Car : £10,000
Salvage Value : £1,000
Expected Life in Years (1 to 10) : 7
As % Of Total Depriciation
Year 1 £2,250 25%
Year 2 £1,929 21%
Year 3 £1,607 18%
Year 4 £1,286 14%
Year 5 £964 11%
Year 6 £643 7%
Year 7 £321 4%
Year
Year
Year
£9,000 100%
Syntax
=SYD(OriginalCost,SalvageValue,Life,PeriodToCalculate)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
T
Page 185 of 206
T
Cell To Test Result
Hello Hello =T(D4)
10 =T(D5)
1Jan98 =T(D6)
=T(D7)
What Does It Do ?
This function examines an entry to determine whether it is text or not.
If the value is text, then the text is the result of the function
If the value is not text, the result is a blank.
The function is not specifically needed by Excel, but is included for compatibility with
other spreadsheet programs.
Syntax
=T(CellToTest)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
TEXT
Page 186 of 206
TEXT
10 10.00 =TEXT(C4,"0.00")
10 £10.00 =TEXT(C5,"£0.00")
10 10 =TEXT(C6,"0")
10 £10 =TEXT(C7,"£0")
10.25 10.3 =TEXT(C8,"0.0")
10.25 £10.3 =TEXT(C9,"£0.0")
What Does It Do ?
This function converts a number to a piece of text.
The formatting for the text needs to be specified in the function.
Syntax
=TEXT(NumberToConvert,FormatForConversion)
Formatting
No special formatting is required.
Original
Number
Converted
To Text
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
TIME
Page 187 of 206
TIME
Hour Minute Second Time
14 30 59 14:30:59 =TIME(C4,D4,E4)
14 30 59 2:30:59 PM =TIME(C5,D5,E5)
14 30 59 0.60485 =TIME(C6,D6,E6)
What Does It Do?
This function will convert three separate numbers to an actual time.
Syntax
=TIME(Hour,Minute,Second)
Formatting
The result will be shown as a time which can be formatted either as 12 or 24 hour style.
If a normal number format is applied a decimal fraction is shown which represents the
time as a fraction of the day.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
TIMEVALUE
Page 188 of 206
TIMEVALUE
Text Time
14:30:59 0.6 =TIMEVALUE(C4)
14:30:59 14:30:59 =TIMEVALUE(C5)
14:30:59 2:30:59 PM =TIMEVALUE(C6)
What Does It Do?
This function will show an actual time based on a piece of text which looks
like a time. It is useful when data is imported from other applications, such as
from mainframe computers, which convert all values to text.
Syntax
=TIMEVALUE(Text)
Formatting
The result will be shown as a number representing the time a fraction of the day.
Formatting can be applied for either the 12 or 24 hour clock system.
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
TODAY
Page 189 of 206
TODAY
Today Is
4Oct10 =TODAY()
What Does It Do?
Use this to show the current date.
Syntax
=TODAY()
Formatting
The result will normally be displayed using the DDMMMYY format.
Example
The following example shows how the Today function is used to calculate the number
of days since a particular day.
Date Days Since
1Jan97 10/02/13 =TODAY()C20
10Aug97 02/23/13 =TODAY()C21
Note that the result is actually the number of days before todays date. To calculate
a result which includes the current date an extra 1 will need to be added.
Date Days Since
1Jan97 5025 =TODAY()C28+1
10Aug97 4804 =TODAY()C29+1
Example
The following example shows the number of days from today until the year 2000.
Year 2000 Days Until
01Jan2000 03/28/89 =C36TODAY()
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
TRANSPOSE
Page 190 of 206
TRANSPOSE
Jan Feb
Alan 10 30
Bob 40 50
Carol 70 80
Total 120 160
Alan Bob Carol Total
Jan 10 40 70 120
Feb 30 50 80 160
{=TRANSPOSE(C3:E7)}
As an array formula in all these cells
What Does It Do ?
This function copies data from a range, and places in it in a new range, turning it so
that the data originally in columns is now in rows, and the data originally in rows
is in columns.
The transpose range must be the same size as the original range.
The function needs to be entered as an array formula.
To enter an array formula you must first highlight all the cells where the formula is required.
Next type the formula, such as =TRANSPOSE(A1:A5).
Finally press Ctrl+Shift+Enter to confirm it.
If changes need to be made to the formula, the entire array has to be highlighted, the edits
can then be made and the Ctrl+Shift+Enter used to confirm it.
Syntax
=TRANSPOSE(Range)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
TREND
Page 191 of 206
TREND WHAT IS CONST b ?
Historical Data Predicted Values
Month Sales Month Sales
1 £1,000 7 £4,940 {=TREND(C8:C13,B8:B13,E8:E13)}
2 £2,000 8 £5,551 {=TREND(C5:C10,B5:B10,E5:E10)}
3 £2,500 9 £6,163 {=TREND(C5:C10,B5:B10,E5:E10)}
4 £3,500 10 £6,774 {=TREND(C5:C10,B5:B10,E5:E10)}
5 £3,800 11 £7,386 {=TREND(C5:C10,B5:B10,E5:E10)}
6 £4,000 12 £7,997 {=TREND(C5:C10,B5:B10,E5:E10)}
What Does It Do ?
This function predicts values based upon three sets of related values.
The prediction is based upon the Linear Trend of the original values.
The function is an array function and must be entered using Ctrl+Shift+Enter.
Syntax
=TREND(KnownYs,KnownXs,RequiredXs,Constant)
The KnownYs is the range of values, such as Sales Figures.
The KnownXs is the intervals used when collecting the data, such as Months.
The RequiredXs is the range for which you want to make the prediction, such as Months.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The following tables were used by a company to predict when they would start to
make a profit.
Their bank manager had told the company that unless they could show a profit by the
end of the next year, the bank would no longer provide an overdraft facility.
To prove to the bank that, based upon the past years performance, the company would
start to make a profit at the end of the next year, the =TREND() function was used.
The historical data for the past year was entered, months 1 to 12.
The months to predict were entered, 13 to 24.
The =TREND() function shows that it will be month 22 before the company make a profit.
Historical Data Predicted Values
Month Profit Month Profit
1 £5,000 13 £2,226 {=TREND(C41:C52,B41:B52,E41:E52)}
2 £4,800 14 £1,968 The
3 £4,600 15 £1,709 same
4 £4,750 16 £1,451 function
5 £4,800 17 £1,193 used
6 £4,500 18 £935 in
7 £4,000 19 £676 all
8 £3,800 20 £418 cells
9 £3,300 21 £160 as
10 £2,000 22 £98 an
11 £2,500 23 £356 array
12 £2,800 24 £615 formula
How To Enter An Array Formula
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
TREND
Page 192 of 206
Select all the cells where the array is required, such as F41 to F52.
Type the formula such as =TREND(C41:C52,B41:B52,E41:E52), but do not press Enter.
Hold the Ctrl+Shift keys down.
Press Enter to enter the formula as an array.
A B C D E F G H I J
55
56
57
58
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
TRIM
Page 193 of 206
TRIM
Original Text Trimmed Text
ABCD ABCD =TRIM(C4)
A B C D A B C D =TRIM(C5)
Alan Jones Alan Jones =TRIM(C6)
ABCD ABCD =TRIM(C7)
What Does It Do ?
This function removes unwanted spaces from a piece of text.
The spaces before and after the text will be removed completely.
Multiple spaces within the text will be trimmed to a single space
Syntax
=TRIM(TextToTrim)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
TRUNC
Page 194 of 206
TRUNC
Number
1.48 0 1 =TRUNC(C4,D4)
1.48 1 1.4 =TRUNC(C5,D5)
1.48 2 1.47 =TRUNC(C6,D6)
1.48 1 1.4 =TRUNC(C7,D7)
1.48 2 1.47 =TRUNC(C8,D8)
13643.48 1 13640 =TRUNC(C9,D9)
13643.48 2 13600 =TRUNC(C10,D10)
13643.48 3 13000 =TRUNC(C11,D11)
What Does It Do ?
This function removes the decimal part of a number, it does not actually round the number.
Syntax
=TRUNC(NumberToTuncate,Precision)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Precision
For
Truncation
Truncated
Number
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
UPPER
Page 195 of 206
UPPER
Original Text Upper Case
alan jones ALAN JONES =UPPER(C4)
bob smith BOB SMITH =UPPER(C5)
carOl wiLLiamS CAROL WILLIAMS =UPPER(C6)
cardiff CARDIFF =UPPER(C7)
abc123 ABC123 =UPPER(C8)
What Does It Do ?
This function converts all characters in a piece of text to upper case.
Syntax
=UPPER(TextToConvert)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
See the example for FREQUENCY.
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
VALUE
Page 196 of 206
VALUE
Text Containing A Number Value
Annual turnover was £5000 Err:502 =VALUE(MID(C4,SEARCH("£",C4),99))
There was a 2% increase in sales. #VALUE!
There was a 50% increase in sales. #VALUE!
A 100% increase was achieved. #VALUE!
Only a 2% increase in sales. #VALUE!
Approx 50% increase in sales. #VALUE!
There was a 100% increase in sales. #VALUE! * See explanation below.
The winning time was 1:30 seconds. #VALUE! =VALUE(MID(C14,SEARCH("??:??",C14),5))
The winning time was 1:30 seconds. #VALUE! =VALUE(MID(C15,SEARCH("??:??",C15),5))
The winning time was 10:30 seconds. #VALUE! =VALUE(MID(C16,SEARCH("??:??",C16),5))
The winning time was 0:30 seconds. #VALUE! =VALUE(MID(C17,SEARCH("??:??",C17),5))
What Does It Do ?
This function converts a piece of text which resembles a number into an actual value.
If the number in the middle of a long piece of text it will have to be extracted using other
text functions such as =SEARCH(), =MID(), =FIND(), =SUBSTITUTE, =LEFT() or =RIGHT().
Syntax
=VALUE(TextToConvert)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
The result will be shown as a value, based upon the original text.
If the £ sign is included in the text it will be ignored.
If the % sign is included in the text, the result will be a decimal fraction which can then
be formatted as a percentage.
If the original text format appears as a time hh:mm the result will be a time.
The same will be true for other recognised formats.
Explanation of formula shown above.
To extract the values from the following text is complicated!
The actual percentage value is of variable length, it can be either one, two or three digits long.
The only way to identify the value is the fact it always ends with the % sign.
There is no way to identify the beginning of the value, other than it is preceded by a space.
The main problem is calculating the length of the value to extract.
If the extraction assumes the maximum length of three digits and the % sign, errors will occur
when the percentage is only one digit long, as alphabetic characters will be included.
To get around the problem the =SUBSTITUTE() function was used to increase the size of the
spaces in the text.
Now when the extraction takes place any unnecessary characters will be spaces which are
ignored by the =VALUE() function.
There was a 2% increase in sales. #VALUE!
There was a 50% increase in sales. #VALUE!
There was a 100% increase in sales. #VALUE!
=VALUE(MID(SUBSTITUTE(C52," "," "),SEARCH("???%",SUBSTITUTE(C52," "," ")),4))
=VALUE(MID(SUBSTITUTE(C11," "," "),SEARCH("???%",SUBSTITUTE(C11," "," ")),4))
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
VAR
Page 197 of 206
VAR
Values Values Values
10 10 10
10 10 11
9 11 9
10 10 12
0.25 0.25 1.67
=VAR(C4:C7) =VAR(E4:E7) =VAR(G4:G7)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the sample population variance of a list of values.
A sample population is used when the list of values represents a sample of a population.
Syntax
=VAR(Range1,Range2,Range3 through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The table below was used by a company interested in buying a new machine
to pack washing powder.
Three machines were short listed and allow to run for a day.
At the end of the day four boxes of soap powder were picked at random from the production
of each machine.
The boxes were weighed and the =VAR() function used as these boxes only represented
a sample of the complete days production.
The machine with the smallest variance was the most consistent.
Soap Powder Box Filling Machine Test Results
Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Variance
Machine 1 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.5 0.0067 =VAR(D34:G34)
Machine 2 1.5 1.5 1.4 1.5 0.0025 =VAR(D35:G35)
Machine 3 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 0.0167 =VAR(D36:G36)
The smallest variance is : 0.0025 =MIN(H34:H36)
The machine with the smallest variance is : Machine 2
=INDEX(C34:C36,MATCH(MIN(H34:H36),H34:H36,0))
Explanation of formula:
This finds the lowest value. =MIN(H34:H36)
This finds the position of the lowest value. =MATCH(MIN(H34:H36),H34:H36,0)
This looks down the Machine column to =INDEX(C34:C36,MATCH(MIN(H34:H36),H34:H36,0))
find the machine name.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
VARP
Page 198 of 206
VARP
Values Values Values
10 10 10
10 10 11
9 11 9
10 10 12
0.19 0.19 1.25
=VARP(C4:C7) =VARP(E4:E7) =VARP(G4:G7)
What Does It Do ?
This function calculates the variance of a list of values.
The variance is calculated on the basis that the values represent the entire population.
Syntax
=VARP(Range1,Range2,Range3 through to Range30)
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example
The table below was used by a company interested in buying a new machine
to pack washing powder.
A trial run a just four boxes per machine were produced.
The boxes were weighed and the =VARP() function used as these boxes
represented the entire test run.
The machine with the smallest variance was the most consistent.
Soap Powder Box Filling Machine Test Results
Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Variance
Machine 1 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.5 0.0050 =VARP(D32:G32)
Machine 2 1.5 1.5 1.4 1.5 0.0019 =VARP(D33:G33)
Machine 3 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 0.0125 =VARP(D34:G34)
The smallest variance is : 0.0019 =MIN(H32:H34)
The machine with the smallest variance is : Machine 2
=INDEX(C32:C34,MATCH(MIN(H32:H34),H32:H34,0))
Explanation of formula:
This finds the lowest value. =(MIN(H32:H34)
This finds the position of the lowest value. =MATCH(MIN(H32:H34),H32:H34,0)
This looks down the Machine column to =INDEX(C32:C34,MATCH(MIN(H32:H34),H32:H34,0))
find the machine name.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
VLOOKUP
Page 199 of 206
VLOOKUP
The column numbers are not needed.
they are part of the illustration.
col 1 col 2 col 3 col 4 col 5 col 6
Jan 10 20 30 40 50
Feb 80 90 100 110 120
Mar 97 69 45 51 77
Type a month to look for : Feb
Which column needs to be picked out : 4
The result is : 100
=VLOOKUP(G11,C6:H8,G12,FALSE)
What Does It Do ?
This function scans down the row headings at the side of a table to find a specified item.
When the item is found, it then scans across to pick a cell entry.
Syntax
=VLOOKUP(ItemToFind,RangeToLookIn,ColumnToPickFrom,SortedOrUnsorted)
The ItemToFind is a single item specified by the user.
The RangeToLookIn is the range of data with the row headings at the left hand side.
The ColumnToPickFrom is how far across the table the function should look to pick from.
The Sorted/Unsorted is whether the column headings are sorted. TRUE for yes, FALSE for no.
Formatting
No special formatting is needed.
Example 1
This table is used to find a value based on a specified name and month.
The =VLOOKUP() is used to scan down to find the name.
The problem arises when we need to scan across to find the month column.
To solve the problem the =MATCH() function is used.
The =MATCH() looks through the list of names to find the month we require. It then calculates
the position of the month in the list. Unfortunately, because the list of months is not as wide
as the lookup range, the =MATCH() number is 1 less than we require, so and extra 1 is
added to compensate.
The =VLOOKUP() now uses this =MATCH() number to look across the columns and
picks out the correct cell entry.
The =VLOOKUP() uses FALSE at the end of the function to indicate to Excel that the
row headings are not sorted.
Jan Feb Mar
Bob 10 80 97
Eric 20 90 69
Alan 30 100 45
Carol 40 110 51
David 50 120 77
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
VLOOKUP
Page 200 of 206
Type a name to look for : eric
Type a month to look for : mar
The result is : 69
=VLOOKUP(F56,C50:F54,MATCH(F57,D49:F49,0)+1,FALSE)
Example 2
This example shows how the =VLOOKUP() is used to pick the cost of a spare part for
different makes of cars.
The =VLOOKUP() scans down row headings in column F for the spare part entered in column C.
When the make is found, the =VLOOKUP() then scans across to find the price, using the
result of the =MATCH() function to find the position of the make of car.
The functions use the absolute ranges indicated by the dollar symbol . This ensures that
when the formula is copied to more cells, the ranges for =VLOOKUP() and =MATCH() do
not change.
Maker Spare Cost Lookup Table
Vauxhall Ignition £50 Vauxhall Ford VW
VW GearBox £600 GearBox 500 450 600
Ford Engine £1,200 Engine 1000 1200 800
VW Steering £275 Steering 250 350 275
Ford Ignition £70 Ignition 50 70 45
Ford CYHead £290 CYHead 300 290 310
Vauxhall GearBox £500
Ford Engine £1,200
=VLOOKUP(C81,F75:I79,MATCH(B81,G74:I74,0)+1,FALSE)
Example 3
In the following example a builders merchant is offering discount on large orders.
The Unit Cost Table holds the cost of 1 unit of Brick, Wood and Glass.
The Discount Table holds the various discounts for different quantities of each product.
The Orders Table is used to enter the orders and calculate the Total.
All the calculations take place in the Orders Table.
The name of the Item is typed in column C of the Orders Table.
The Unit Cost of the item is then looked up in the Unit Cost Table.
The FALSE option has been used at the end of the function to indicate that the product
names down the side of the Unit Cost Table are not sorted.
Using the FALSE option forces the function to search for an exact match. If a match is
not found, the function will produce an error.
=VLOOKUP(C126,C114:D116,2,FALSE)
The discount is then looked up in the Discount Table
If the Quantity Ordered matches a value at the side of the Discount Table the =VLOOKUP will
look across to find the correct discount.
The TRUE option has been used at the end of the function to indicate that the values
down the side of the Discount Table are sorted.
Using TRUE will allow the function to make an approximate match. If the Quantity Ordered does
not match a value at the side of the Discount Table, the next lowest value is used.
Trying to match an order of 125 will drop down to 100, and the discount from
A B C D E F G H I J
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
VLOOKUP
Page 201 of 206
the 100 row is used.
=VLOOKUP(D126,F114:I116,MATCH(C126,G113:I113,0)+1,TRUE)
Discount Table
Unit Cost Table Brick Wood Glass
Brick £2 1 0% 0% 0%
Wood £1 100 6% 3% 12%
Glass £3 300 8% 5% 15%
Orders Table
Item Units Unit Cost Discount Total
Brick 100 £2 6% £188
Wood 200 £1 3% £194
Glass 150 £3 12% £396
Brick 225 £2 6% £423
Wood 50 £1 0% £50
Glass 500 £3 15% £1,275
Formula for :
Unit Cost =VLOOKUP(C126,C114:D116,2,FALSE)
Discount =VLOOKUP(D126,F114:I116,MATCH(C126,G113:I113,0)+1,TRUE)
Total =(D126*E126)(D126*E126*F126)
A B C D E F G H I J
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
WEEKDAY
Page 202 of 206
WEEKDAY
Date Weekday
Thu 01Jan98 5 =WEEKDAY(C4)
Thu 01Jan98 5 =WEEKDAY(C5)
Thu 01Jan98 5 =WEEKDAY(C6,1)
Thu 01Jan98 4 =WEEKDAY(C7,2)
Thu 01Jan98 3 =WEEKDAY(C8,3)
What Does It Do?
This function shows the day of the week from a date.
Syntax
=WEEKDAY(Date,Type)
Type : This is used to indicate the week day numbering system.
1 : will set Sunday as 1 through to Saturday as 7
2 : will set Monday as 1 through to Sunday as 7.
3 : will set Monday as 0 through to Sunday as 6.
If no number is specified, Excel will use 1.
Formatting
The result will be shown as a normal number.
Example
The following table was used by a hotel which rented a function room.
The hotel charged different rates depending upon which day of the week the booking was for.
The Booking Date is entered.
The Actual Day is calculated.
The Booking Cost is picked from a list of rates using the =LOOKUP() function.
Booking Date Actual Day Booking Cost
7Jan98 Wednesday £30.00
=LOOKUP(WEEKDAY(C34),C39:D45)
Booking Rates
Day Of Week Cost
1 £50
2 £25
3 £25
4 £30
5 £40
6 £50
7 £100
To show the result as the name of the day, use Format, Cells, Custom and set
the Type to ddd or dddd.
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
WORKDAY
Page 203 of 206
WORKDAY
StartDate Days Result
1Jan98 28 35836 =WORKDAY(D4,E4)
1Jan98 28 10Feb98 =WORKDAY(D5,E5)
What Does It Do?
Use this function to calculate a past or future date based on a starting date and a
specified number of days. The function excludes weekends and holidays and can
therefore be used to calculate delivery dates or invoice dates.
Syntax
=WORKDAY(StartDate,Days,Holidays)
Formatting
The result will normally be shown as a number which can be formatted to a
normal date by using Format,Cells,Number,Date.
Example
The following example shows how the function can be used to calculate delivery dates
based upon an initial Order Date and estimated Delivery Days.
Order Date Delivery Days Delivery Date
Mon 02Feb98 2 Wed 04Feb98
Tue 15Dec98 28 Tue 26Jan99
=WORKDAY(D25,E25,D28:D32)
Holidays
Bank Holiday Fri 01May98
Xmas Fri 25Dec98
New Year Wed 01Jan97
New Year Thu 01Jan98
New Year Fri 01Jan99
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
YEAR
Page 204 of 206
YEAR
Date Year
25Dec98 1998 =YEAR(C4)
What Does It Do?
This function extracts the year number from a date.
Syntax
=YEAR(Date)
Formatting
The result is shown as a number.
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
YEARFRAC
Page 205 of 206
YEARFRAC
Start Date End Date Fraction
1Jan98 1Apr98 0.25 =YEARFRAC(C4,D4)
1Jan98 31Dec98 1 =YEARFRAC(C5,D5)
1Jan98 1Apr98 25% =YEARFRAC(C6,D6)
What Does It Do?
This function calculates the difference between two dates and expresses the result
as a decimal fraction.
Syntax
=YEARFRAC(StartDate,EndData,Basis)
Basis : Defines the calendar system to be used in the function.
0 : or omitted USA style 30 days per month divided by 360.
1 : 29 or 30 or 31 days per month divided by 365.
2 : 29 or 30 or 31 days per month divided by 360.
3 : 29 or 30 0r 31 days per month divided by 365.
4 : European 29 or 30 or 31 days divided by 360.
Formatting
The result will be shown as a decimal fraction, but can be formatted as a percent.
Example
The following table was used by a company which hired people on short term contracts
for a part of the year.
The Pro Rata Salary which represents the annual salary is entered.
The Start and End dates of the contract are entered.
The =YEARFRAC() function is used to calculate Actual Salary for the portion of the year.
Start End Pro Rata Salary Actual Salary
1Jan98 31Dec98 £12,000 £12,000 =YEARFRAC(B32,C32+1,4)*D32
1Jan98 31Mar98 £12,000 £3,000 =YEARFRAC(B33,C33+1,4)*D33
1Jan98 30Jun98 £12,000 £6,000 =YEARFRAC(B34,C34+1,4)*D34
Note
The extra 1 has been added to the End date to compensate for the fact that the =YEARFRAC()
function calculates from the Start date up to, but not including, the End date.
A B C D E F G H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Excel Function Dictionary
© 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Project Dates
Page 206 of 206
Project Dates House Building
Target Delivery Tue 27Jan98 Target Budget £12,000
Job Stage Start Date End Date Daily Cost Total
Survey Mon 05Jan98 5 Fri 09Jan98 £200 £1,000
Foundation Mon 12Jan98 4 Thu 15Jan98 £1,000 £4,000
Walls Fri 16Jan98 3 Tue 20Jan98 £800 £2,400
Roof Wed 21Jan98 6 Wed 28Jan98 £400 £2,400
Electrics Thu 29Jan98 4 Tue 03Feb98 £300 £1,200
Actual Delivery Tue 03Feb98 Total Cost £11,000
Against Target 5 days behind Budget % 92%
Total Days 22
Days
Required
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Instructions Page 2 of 206
What Do The Buttons Do ?
View View Sort Sort
This button will display the worksheet containing the function example. 1. Click on the function name, then 2. Click on the View button.
This button sorts the list of functions into alphabetical order.
Category Category
Location Location
This describes the category the function is a member of. Click this button to sort alphabetically.
This shows where the function is stored in Excel. Builtin indicates that the function is part of Excel itself. Analysis ToolPak indicates the function is stored in the Analysis ToolPak addin. Click this button to sort alphabetically.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Colours Page 3 of 206
Using Different Monitor Settings Each sheet has been designed to fit within the visible width of monitors with a low resolution of 640 x 480. This ensures that you do not need to scroll from left and right to see all the data. The colours are best suited to monitors capable of 256 colours. On monitors using just 16 colours the greys may look a bit rough! You can switch colours off and on using the button below.
This may take a Colour On few minutes on any computer !
Alan Bob Carol Total
North 100 100 100 300
Sample Colour Scheme South East West 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 300 300 300
Total 400 400 400 1200
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley
Analysis ToolPak Page 4 of 206
Analysis ToolPak
What Is The Analysis ToolPak ? The Analysis ToolPak is an addin file containing extra functions which are not built in to Excel. The functions cover areas such as Date and Mathematical operations. The Analysis ToolPak must be addedin to Excel before these functions will be available.
Analysis ToolPak Check For Analysis ToolPak Load the Analysis ToolPak UnLoad the Analysis ToolPak
Any formula using these functions without the ToolPak loaded will show the #NAME error.
or contents of a cell Returns the character specified by the code number Chooses a value from a list of values Removes all nonprintable characters from text Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects Joins several text items into one text item Converts a number from one measurement system to another Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments Counts how many values are in the list of arguments Counts the number of blank cells within a range Counts the number of nonblank cells within a range that meet the given criteria Returns the serial number of a particular date Calculates the difference between two dates.2000 Peter Noneley FunctionList Page 5 of 206 Age Calculation AutoSum shortcut key Brackets in formula FileName formula Instant Charts Ordering Stock Percentages Project Dates Show all formula Split ForenameSurname Time Calculation TimeSheet For Flexi ABS AND AVERAGE BIN2DEC CEILING CELL CHAR CHOOSE CLEAN CODE COMBIN CONCATENATE CONVERT CORREL COUNT COUNTA COUNTBLANK COUNTIF DATE DATEDIF DATEVALUE DAVERAGE DAY DAYS360 DB DCOUNT DCOUNTA DEC2BIN DEC2HEX DELTA DGET DMAX DMIN DOLLAR DSUM EDATE EOMONTH ERROR. toward zero Returns a value along a linear trend Returns a frequency distribution as a vertical array Returns the greatest common divisor Tests whether a number is greater than a threshold value Returns values along an exponential trend Converts a hexadecimal number to decimal Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell Converts a serial number to an hour Specifies a logical test to perform Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array Returns a reference indicated by a text value Returns information about the current operating environment . location. Returns the absolute value of a number Returns TRUE if all its arguments are TRUE Returns the average of its arguments Converts a binary number to decimal Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance Returns information about the formatting. Using Ctrl and ` Using LEFT() RIGHT() FIND() SUBSTITUTE() How to calculate time. Example flexi time sheet.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Undocumented in v5/7/97 Converts a date in the form of text to a serial number Returns the average of selected database entries Converts a serial number to a day of the month Calculates the number of days between two dates based on a 360day year Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the fixeddeclining balance m Counts the cells that contain numbers in a database Counts nonblank cells in a database Converts a decimal number to binary Converts a decimal number to hexadecimal Tests whether two values are equal Extracts from a database a single record that matches the specified criteria Returns the maximum value from selected database entries Returns the minimum value from selected database entries Converts a number to text.TYPE EVEN EXACT FACT FIND FIXED FLOOR FORECAST FREQUENCY GCD GESTEP GROWTH HEX2DEC HLOOKUP HOUR IF INDEX INDIRECT INFO Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Mathematical Logical Statistical Engineering Mathematical Information Text Lookup Text Text Mathematical Text Engineering Statistical Statistical Statistical Information Mathematical Date Date Date Database Date Date Financial Database Database Engineering Engineering Engineering Database Database Database Text Database Date Date Information Mathematical Text Mathematical Text Text Mathematical Statistical Statistical Mathematical Engineering Statistical Engineering Lookup Date Logical Lookup Lookup Information Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Builtin Builtin Builtin Analysis ToolPak Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Analysis ToolPak Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Analysis ToolPak Analysis ToolPak Analysis ToolPak Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Analysis ToolPak Analysis ToolPak Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Analysis ToolPak Analysis ToolPak Builtin Analysis ToolPak Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Using DATEDIF() Using Alt and = Sample Using MID() CELL() and FIND() Using F11 Stock Ordering How to calculate various percentages Example using date calculation. using currency format Adds the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria Returns the serial number of the date that is the indicated number of months before or after t Returns the serial number of the last day of the month before or after a specified number of m Returns a number corresponding to an error type Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer Checks to see if two text values are identical Returns the factorial of a number Finds one text value within another (casesensitive) Formats a number as text with a fixed number of decimals Rounds a number down.
toward zero Rounds a number up. as text Rounds a number to a specified number of digits Rounds a number down.2000 Peter Noneley FunctionList Page 6 of 206 INT ISBLANK ISERR ISERROR ISEVEN ISLOGICAL ISNA ISNONTEXT ISNUMBER ISODD ISREF ISTEXT LARGE LCM LEFT LEN LOOKUP (vector) LOWER MATCH MAX MEDIAN MID MIN MINUTE MINVERSE MMULT MOD MODE MONTH MROUND N NA NETWORKDAYS NOT NOW ODD OR PERMUT PI POWER PRODUCT PROPER QUARTILE QUOTIENT RAND RANDBETWEEN RANK REPLACE REPT RIGHT ROMAN ROUND ROUNDDOWN ROUNDUP SECOND SIGN SLN SMALL STDEV STDEVP SUBSTITUTE SUBTOTAL SUM SUM_as_Running_Total SUM_using_names SUM_with_OFFSET SUMIF SUMPRODUCT Mathematical Information Information Information Information Information Information Information Information Information Information Information Statistical Mathematical Text Text Lookup Text Lookup Statistical Statistical Text Statistical Date Mathematical Mathematical Mathematical Statistical Date Mathematical Information Information Date Logical Date Mathematical Logical Statistical Mathematical Mathematical Mathematical Text Statistical Mathematical Mathematical Mathematical Statistical Text Text Text Mathematical Mathematical Mathematical Mathematical Date Mathematical Financial Statistical Statistical Statistical Text Mathematical Mathematical Mathematical Sample Lookup Mathematical Mathematical Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Analysis ToolPak Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Analysis ToolPak Builtin Builtin Builtin Analysis ToolPak Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Analysis ToolPak Builtin Builtin Analysis ToolPak Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Analysis ToolPak Builtin Analysis ToolPak Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Builtin Sample Builtin Builtin Builtin Rounds a number down to the nearest integer Returns TRUE if the value is blank Returns TRUE if the value is any error value except #N/A Returns TRUE if the value is any error value Returns TRUE if the number is even Returns TRUE if the value is a logical value Returns TRUE if the value is the #N/A error value Returns TRUE if the value is not text Returns TRUE if the value is a number Returns TRUE if the number is odd Returns TRUE if the value is a reference Returns TRUE if the value is text Returns the kth largest value in a data set Returns the least common multiple Returns the leftmost characters from a text value Returns the number of characters in a text string Looks up values in a vector or array Converts text to lowercase Looks up values in a reference or array Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments Returns the median of the given numbers Returns a specific number of characters from a text string starting at the position you specify Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments Converts a serial number to a minute Returns the matrix inverse of an array Returns the matrix product of two arrays Returns the remainder from division Returns the most common value in a data set Converts a serial number to a month Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple Returns a value converted to a number Returns the error value #N/A Returns the number of whole workdays between two dates Reverses the logic of its argument Returns the serial number of the current date and time Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer Returns TRUE if any argument is TRUE Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects Returns the value of Pi Returns the result of a number raised to a power Multiplies its arguments Capitalises the first letter in each word of a text value Returns the quartile of a data set Returns the integer portion of a division Returns a random number between 0 and 1 Returns a random number between the numbers you specify Returns the rank of a number in a list of numbers Replaces characters within text Repeats text a given number of times Returns the rightmost characters from a text value Converts an arabic numeral to roman.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . away from zero Converts a serial number to a second Returns the sign of a number Returns the straightline depreciation of an asset for one period Returns the kth smallest value in a data set Estimates standard deviation based on a sample Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population Substitutes new text for old text in a text string Returns a subtotal in a list or database Adds its arguments Sample Using SUM(jan) Sample Adds the cells specified by a given criteria Returns the sum of the products of corresponding array components .
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley FunctionList Page 7 of 206 SYD T TEXT TIME Timesheet TIMEVALUE TODAY TRANSPOSE TREND TRIM TRUNC TYPE UPPER VALUE VAR VARP VLOOKUP WEEKDAY WORKDAY YEAR YEARFRAC Financial Builtin Text Builtin Text Builtin Date Builtin Sample Sample Date Builtin Date Builtin Lookup Builtin Statistical Builtin Text Builtin Mathematical Builtin Information Builtin Text Builtin Text Builtin Statistical Builtin Statistical Builtin Lookup Builtin Date Builtin Date Analysis ToolPak Date Builtin Date Analysis ToolPak Returns the sumofyears' digits depreciation of an asset for a specified period Converts its arguments to text Formats a number and converts it to text Returns the serial number of a particular time Sample Converts a time in the form of text to a serial number Returns the serial number of today's date Returns the transpose of an array Returns values along a linear trend Removes spaces from text Truncates a number to an integer Returns a number indicating the data type of a value Converts text to uppercase Converts a text argument to a number Estimates variance based on a sample Calculates variance based on the entire population Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell Converts a serial number to a day of the week Returns the serial number of the date before or after a specified number of workdays Converts a serial number to a year Returns the year fraction representing the number of whole days between start_date and end .
Example 1 : Incorrect formatting Start End Duration 7:00 18:30 11:30 8:00 17:00 9:00 7:30 17:45 10:15 Total 6:45 =SUM(E49:E51) Example 2 : Correct formatting Start End Duration 7:00 18:30 11:30 8:00 17:00 9:00 7:30 17:45 10:15 Total 30:45 =SUM(E56:E58) How To Apply Custom Formatting The custom format for time use a pair of square brackets [hh] on either side of the hours indicators. You may need to reformat the answer. 2.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 B C D E F G H I Time Calculation Page 8 of 206 J Time Calculation Excel can work with time very easily. Adding time You can add time to find a total time. See the TimeSheet example for an example. There are one or two oddities. This works well until the total time goes above 24 hours. Usually this gives an incorrect result. as in the example below. 1:30 AM 1:30 PM 10:15 AM 10:15 PM Finding the difference between two times You can subtract two time values to find the length of time between. For totals greater than 24 hours you may need to apply some special formatting. Click on the cell which needs the format. but nothing which should put you off working with it.30 1:30 12:30 20:15 22:45 Excel can cope with either the 24hour system or the am/pm system. Time can be entered in various different formats and calculations performed. such as 12:30. Start 1:30 8:00 7:30 AM End 2:30 17:00 5:45 PM Duration 1:00 9:00 10:15 20:15 Formatting time When time is added together the result may go beyond 24 hours.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . . rather than 12. To correct this error. To use the am/pm system you must enter the am or pm after the time. Typing time When time is entered into worksheet it should be entered with a colon between the hour and the minutes. Start 1:30 8:00 8:00 AM End 2:30 17:00 5:00 PM Duration 1:00 =D24C24 9:00 =D25C25 9:00 AM If the result is not shown correctly. Look at the section about formatting further in this worksheet. 1. Choose the Format menu. You must leave a space between the number and the text. the result needs to be formatted with a Custom format.
F G H I Time Calculation Page 9 of 206 J . Click the Number tag at the top right. Choose Custom. Click inside the Type: box. 4. 6. Choose Cells.2000 Peter Noneley A 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 B C D E 3. Type [hh]:mm as the format. Click OK to confirm. 5.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . 7. 8.
G3G11.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 B C D E F G H I TimeSheet For Flexi Page 10 of 206 J K TimeSheet for Flexi Week beginning Mon 05Jan98 Day Mon 05 Tue 06 Wed 07 Thu 08 Fri 09 Arrive 8:00 8:45 9:00 8:30 8:00 Lunch Out Lunch In 13:00 14:00 12:30 13:30 13:00 14:00 13:00 14:00 12:00 13:00 Normal Hours Depart 17:00 17:00 18:00 17:00 17:00 Total Hours 37:30 Total 8:00 7:15 8:00 7:30 8:00 38:45 1:15 =(F6C6)(E6D6) =SUM(G6:G10) =IF(G3G11>0. the Normal Hours.ABS(G3G11)."") Under worked by Over worked by This is simple example of a timesheet. Type the times you arrive and leave work in the appropriate columns. it can be created using Format. Number. If the [hh]:mm format had not been used the Total Hours would show as : If the [hh]:mm format does not show in the cell format dialog box on your computer. the name of the day will appear automatically. Instructions : Type the week start date in cell C3. This ensures the total hours can be expressed as a value above 24 hours.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Custom. 14:45 . the Week beginning. Cells. Type the amount of hours you are expected to work in G3. Use the format of hh:mm. Use the format dd/mm/yy. "") =IF(G3G11<0. This is used later to calculate if have worked over or under the required hours. Note The Total Hours cell has been formatted as [hh]:mm. The date is then passed down to the Day column.
Full Name Alan David Jones Bob John Smith Carol Susan Williams Last Name Jones Smith Williams =RIGHT(C37.C15. Finding the First Name Full Name Alan Jones Bob Smith Carol Williams First Name Alan Bob Carol =LEFT(C14.FIND(" ".LEN(C24)FIND(" ".SUBSTITUTE(C37."#".LEN(C23)FIND(" ".FIND(" ".1)).FIND(" ".1)).1)) =LEFT(C16. One of the most common examples of this is when a persons Forename and Surname are entered in full into a cell.1)) =LEFT(C15.C24)) Finding the Last name when a Middle name is present The formula above cannot handle any more than two names.C16.LEN(C37)FIND("#".C45.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . the last name formula will be incorrect. The formula use various text functions to accomplish the task.FIND(" ".C22)) =RIGHT(C23.LEN(C45)FIND(" ".1)) Finding the Last Name Full Name Alan Jones Bob Smith Carol Williams Last Name Jones Smith Williams =RIGHT(C22." "." ".C23)) =RIGHT(C24.LEN(C45)FIND(" ".""))))) Finding the Middle name Full Name Alan David Jones Bob John Smith Carol Susan Williams Middle Name David John Susan =LEFT(RIGHT(C45. Each of the techniques uses the space between the names to identify where to split.LEN(C37)LEN(SUBSTITUTE(C37.C14. If there is also a middle name.RIGHT(C45.C45.1)) .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 B C D E F G H Split ForenameSurname Page 11 of 206 I J Split Forename and Surname The following formula are useful when you have one cell containing text which needs to be split up.LEN(C22)FIND(" ". To solve the problem you have to use a much longer calculation.
400 £12.000 £1. Grade A B C Name Alan Bob Carol David Elaine Frank % Rise 10% 15% 20% Grade A B C B C A Old Salary Increase £10.$C$18:$C$20. You have to use the skills you were taught in your maths class at school! Finding a percentage of a value Initial value % to find Percentage value 120 25% 30 =D8*D9 Example 1 A company is about to give its staff a pay rise.2000 Peter Noneley A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 C D E F G H I J Percentages Page 12 of 206 K Percentages There are no specific functions for calculating percentages.000 £30.000 £3. .$C$18:$C$20.750 £32.750 £32.$C$18:$C$20.000 £38.400 £12.000 £13.$D$18:$D$20) Finding a percentage increase Initial value % increase Increased value 120 25% 150 =D33*D34+D33 Example 2 A company is about to give its staff a pay rise.000 £28.000 £30.000 £20.$C$18:$C$20.$D$18:$D$20)+E52 =E53*LOOKUP(D53.$C$18:$C$20.$C$18:$C$20.$C$18:$C$20.200 =E48*LOOKUP(D48.$D$18:$D$20)+E50 =E51*LOOKUP(D51.$C$18:$C$20.$C$18:$C$20.000 £25.$D$18:$D$20)+E48 =E49*LOOKUP(D49.000 £11.$D$18:$D$20)+E51 =E52*LOOKUP(D52.000 £20.$D$18:$D$20)+E53 Finding one value as percentage of another Value A Value B A as % of B 120 60 50% =D59/D58 You will need to format the result as % by using the % button on the toolbar.000 £25.$D$18:$D$20) =E24*LOOKUP(D24. Grade A B C Name Alan Bob Carol David Elaine Frank % Rise 10% 15% 20% Grade A B C B C A Old Salary Increase £10. Staff on different grades get different pay rises.$D$18:$D$20) =E28*LOOKUP(D28.000 £1. The wages department need to calculate the new salary including the % increase.200 =E23*LOOKUP(D23.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .000 £3.$C$18:$C$20.000 £23.$D$18:$D$20) =E26*LOOKUP(D26.$C$18:$C$20.$D$18:$D$20) =E27*LOOKUP(D27.$D$18:$D$20) =E25*LOOKUP(D25.000 £6.$D$18:$D$20)+E49 =E50*LOOKUP(D50. The wages department need to calculate the increases.000 £36. Staff on different grades get different pay rises.000 £6.$C$18:$C$20.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .49 =D113D113/(100%+$D$110) £235.000 150.500 Total 39.500 =G82*$E$88 7.000 Total 26.000 West 8.500 =G83*$E$88 4.500 Q3 9% 9% 7% 6% 31% Q4 7% 5% 3% 5% 20% =G74/$H$78 =G75/$H$78 =G76/$H$78 =G77/$H$78 =G78/$H$78 Q3 13.00 £35.000 South 7.50 =D115/(100%+$D$110) .50 £100.000 West 12.000 46.000 Finding an original value after an increase has been applied Increased value % increase Original value 150 25% 120 =D100/(100%+D101) Example 4 An employ has to submit an expenses claim for travelling and accommodation.2000 Peter Noneley A B 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 C D E F G H I J Percentages Page 13 of 206 K Example 3 An manager has been asked to submit budget requirements for next year. By analysing the past years spending.000 3. The manager knows what has been spent by each region in the previous year. Last years figures Region Q1 Q2 North 9.000 Q4 7.000 9.000 7.500 9.00 £8.000 Q3 2.000 9.000 Last years Quarters as % of last years Total Region Q1 Q2 North 9% 2% South 7% 4% East 2% 8% West 8% 9% Total 26% 23% Next years budget 150.000 5.000 4. VAT rate Receipt Petrol Hotel Petrol 17.500 13.000 8.000 20.00 £117.000 23.000 13.50% Total Actual Value Vat Value £10. The claim needs to show the VAT tax portion of each receipt.500 3.500 6.000 12.000 5.000 34.00 £200. Unfortunately the receipts held by the employee only show the total amount.000 9.000 East 3. the manager hopes to predict what will need to be spent in the next year.000 Next years estimated budget requirements Region Q1 Q2 North 13.000 Total 100. The manger needs to specify what will be required each quarter. The employee needs to split this total to show the original value and the VAT amount.000 East 2.000 31.500 Total 30.00 £17.500 10.000 South 10.000 6.500 Q4 10.500 =G84*$E$88 7.51 £1.
10 30 50 70 20 40 60 80 30 70 60 30 . (The screen may look a bit odd. Press Ctrl and ` to see the formula below.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . The ' is the left single quote usually found on the key to left of number 1.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 B C D E F G H Show all formula Page 14 of 206 I Show all formula You can view all the formula on the worksheet by pressing Ctrl and `.) Press the same combination to see the original view.
You can switch it on by using Tools. This formula can be copied to D16 and E16. Options. and the names change to Feb and Mar.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 B C D E F G SUM_using_names Page 15 of 206 H I SUM using names You can use the names typed at the top of columns or side of rows in calculations simply by typing the name into the formula. Try this example: Go to cell C16 and then enter the formula =SUM(jan) The result will show. Calculation. Accept Labels in Formula. Jan 45 30 35 20 Feb 50 25 10 50 Mar 50 35 50 5 North South East West Total If it does not work ! The feature may have been switched off on your computer.
60 50 40 30 Jan Feb Mar 20 10 0 North South East West .
. Jan 45 30 35 20 Feb 50 25 10 50 Mar 50 35 50 5 North South East West Click anywhere inside the table above. Then press F11.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 B C D E F G H Instant Charts Page 17 of 206 I Instant Charts You can create a chart quickly without having to use the chart button on the toolbar by pressing the function key F11 whilst inside a range of data.
CELL("filename"))+1.FIND("]". #VALUE! =MID(CELL("filename").FIND("]". To just pick out the workbook or worksheet name you need to use text functions.CELL("filename"))+1.CELL("filename"))FIND("[". #VALUE! =MID(CELL("filename").Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .CELL("filename"))1) To pick the Worksheet name. 'file:///opt/scribd/conversion/tmp/scratch2509/41288993.FIND("[".2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 B C D E F G Filename formula Page 18 of 206 H Filename formula There may be times when you need to insert the name of the current workbook or worksheet in to a cell. To pick the Path.255) .FIND("[". This can be done by using the CELL() function. shown below.1.CELL("filename"))1) To pick the Workbook name.xls'#$ Filename formula =CELL("filename") The problem with this is that it gives the complete path including drive letter and folders. #VALUE! =MID(CELL("filename").
Mathematically speaking the * and / are more important than + and .. The need for brackets occurs when you mix plus or minus with divide or multiply.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 B C D E F G Brackets in formula Page 19 of 206 H I Brackets in formula Sometimes you will need to use brackets. in formula. 10 20 2 60 =(C27+C28)*C29 By placing brackets around (10+20) Excel performs this part of the calulation first. Example 2 : The correct answer. The * and / operations will be calculated before + and Example 1 : The wrong answer ! 10 20 2 50 =C12+C13*C14 You may expect that 10 + 20 would equal 30 And then 30 * 2 would equal 60 But because the * is calculated first Excel sees the calculation as 20 * 2 resulting in 40 And then 10 + 40 resulting in 50 . This is to ensure that the calculations are performed in the order that you need. resulting in 30 Then the 30 is multipled by 2 resulting in 60 . (also known as 'braces').
but it is in 2000."md")&" Days" Another way to calculate age This method gives you an age which may potentially have decimal places representing the months.TODAY().5 represents 6 months.TODAY()."ym") =DATEDIF(C8. The DATEDIF() is not documented in Excel 5."y") =DATEDIF(C8. 7 or 97. If the age is 20. (Makes you wonder what else Microsoft forgot to tell us!) Birth date : Years lived : and the months : and the days : 5Jul84 #NAME? #NAME? #NAME? =DATEDIF(C8.5.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 B C D E F G H Age Calculation Page 20 of 206 I Age Calculation You can calculate a persons age based on their birthday and todays date.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 ."ym")&" Months and "&DATEDIF(C8. #NAME? ="Age is "&DATEDIF(C8.25 . which creates a text version.TODAY()."md") You can put this all together in one calculation. "&DATEDIF(C8.TODAY().TODAY(). The calculation uses the DATEDIF() function.76 =(TODAY()C23)/365. Birth date : Age is : 1Jan60 50.TODAY()."y")&" Years. the .
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 B C D E F G AutoSum Shortcut Key Page 21 of 206 H I AutoSum Shortcut Key Instead of using the AutoSum button from the toolbar. column or all cells and then press Alt and =. then press Alt and =. you can press Alt and = to achieve the same result. Jan 10 20 30 40 Feb 50 60 70 80 Mar 90 100 200 300 Total North South East West Total . or Select a row. Try it here : Move to a blank cell in the Total row or column.
the percentage should still be expressed as an absolute value. Table 1 Test Cut Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Required Length 120 120 120 Actual Length 120 90 150 Difference 0 30 30 =D36E36 Error Percentage 0% 25% 25% Table 2 shows the same data but using the =ABS() function to correct the calculations.25 Absolute Value 10 10 1.25 =ABS(C4) =ABS(C5) =ABS(C6) =ABS(C7) What Does it Do ? This function calculates the value of a number. Syntax =ABS(CellAddress or Number) Formatting The result will be shown as a number.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 B C D E F G H ABS Page 22 of 206 I ABS Number 10 10 1.25 1. which has a knock on effect when the Error Percentage is calculated. Example The following table was used by a company testing a machine which cuts timber. Whether the wood was too long or short. the measurement needs to be expressed as an absolute value. Table 2 Test Cut Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Required Length 120 120 120 Actual Length 120 90 150 Error Percentage 0 0% 30 25% 30 25% =ABS(D45E45) Difference . The Difference for Test 3 is shown as negative. Table 1 shows the original calculations.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . The machine needs to cut timber to an exact length. no special formatting is needed. Three pieces of timber were cut and then measured. irrespective of whether it is positive or negative. In calculating the difference between the Required Length and the Actual Length it does not matter if the wood was cut too long or short.25 1.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 B C D E F G H
ADDRESS Page 23 of 206 I
ADDRESS
Type a column number : Type a row number : Type a sheet name : $B$3 B$3 $B3 B3 R3C2 R3C[2] R[3]C2 R[3]C[2] Hello.$B$3 Hello.B$3 Hello.$B3 Hello.B3 2 3 Hello
=ADDRESS(F4,F3,1,TRUE) =ADDRESS(F4,F3,2,TRUE) =ADDRESS(F4,F3,3,TRUE) =ADDRESS(F4,F3,4,TRUE) =ADDRESS(F4,F3,1,FALSE) =ADDRESS(F4,F3,2,FALSE) =ADDRESS(F4,F3,3,FALSE) =ADDRESS(F4,F3,4,FALSE) =ADDRESS(F4,F3,1,TRUE,F5) =ADDRESS(F4,F3,2,TRUE,F5) =ADDRESS(F4,F3,3,TRUE,F5) =ADDRESS(F4,F3,4,TRUE,F5)
What Does It Do ? This function creates a cell reference as a piece of text, based on a row and column numbers given by the user. This type of function is used in macros rather than on the actual worksheet. Syntax =ADDRESS(RowNumber,ColNumber,Absolute,A1orR1C1,SheetName) The RowNumber is the normal row number from 1 to 16384. The ColNumber is from 1 to 256, cols A to IV. The Absolute can be 1,2,3 or 4. When 1 the reference will be in the form $A$1, column and row absolute. When 2 the reference will be in the form A$1, only the row absolute. When 3 the reference will be in the form $A1, only the column absolute. When 4 the reference will be in the form A1, neither col or row absolute. The A1orR1C1 is either TRUE of FALSE. When TRUE the reference will be in the form A1, the normal style for cell addresses. When FALSE the reference will be in the form R1C1, the alternative style of cell address. The SheetName is a piece of text to be used as the worksheet name in the reference. The SheetName does not actually have to exist.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 B C D E F G H
AND Page 24 of 206 I
AND
Items To Test 500 800 500 25 25 500 12 Result TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE =AND(C4>=100,D4>=100) =AND(C5>=100,D5>=100) =AND(C6>=100,D6>=100) =AND(D7>=1,D7<=52)
What Does It Do? This function tests two or more conditions to see if they are all true. It can be used to test that a series of numbers meet certain conditions. It can be used to test that a number or a date falls between an upper and lower limit. Normally the AND() function would be used in conjunction with a function such as =IF(). Syntax =AND(Test1,Test2) Note that there can be up to 30 possible tests. Formatting When used by itself it will show TRUE or FALSE. Example 1 The following example shows a list of examination results. The teacher wants to find the pupils who scored above average in all three exams. The =AND() function has been used to test that each score is above the average. The result of TRUE is shown for pupils who have scored above average in all three exams. Name Alan Bob Carol David Eric Fred Gail Harry Ian Janice Maths 80 50 60 90 20 40 10 80 30 10 English 75 30 70 85 30 60 90 70 10 20 Physics 85 40 50 95 Absent 80 80 60 20 30 Passed TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE
=AND(C38>=AVERAGE($C$29:$C$38),D38>=AVERAGE($D$29:$D$38),E38>=AVERAGE($E$29:$E$38))
Averages
47
54
60
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 B C D E F G
AREAS Page 25 of 206 H
AREAS
Pink Name Alan Bob Carol Name David Eric Fred Age 18 17 20 Age 20 16 19 Err:504 =AREAS(PeopleLists)
Green
What Does It Do? This function tests a range to determine whether it is a single block of data, or whether it is a multiple selection. If it is a single block the result will be 1. If it is a multiple block the result will be the number of ranges selected. The function is designed to be used in macros. Syntax =AREAS(RangeToTest) Formatting The result will be shown as a number. Example The example at the top of this page shows two ranges coloured pink and green. These ranges have been given the name PeopleLists. The =AREAS(PeopleLists) gives a result of 2 indicating that there are two separate selections which form the PeopleLists range. Note To name multiple ranges the CTRL key must be used. In the above example the pink range was selected as normal, then the Ctrl key was held down before selecting the green range. When a Range Name is created it will consider both Pink and Green as being one range.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 B C D E F G H I J K L M
AVERAGE Page 26 of 206 N
AVERAGE
Temp Rain Mon 30 0 Mon 30 0 Tue 31 0 Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Average 32 29 26 28 27 29 =AVERAGE(D4:J4) 0 4 6 3 1 2 =AVERAGE(D5:J5) Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Average 32 29 26 28 27 28.67 =AVERAGE(D8:J8) 0 4 6 3 1 2.33 =AVERAGE(D9:J9)
Temp Rain
Temp Rain
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Average 30 No 32 29 26 28 27 28.67 =AVERAGE(D12:J12) 0 Reading 0 4 6 3 1 2.33 =AVERAGE(D13:J13)
What Does It Do ? This function calculates the average from a list of numbers. If the cell is blank or contains text, the cell will not be used in the average calculation. If the cell contains zero 0, the cell will be included in the average calculation. Syntax =AVERAGE(Range1,Range2,Range3... through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed. Note To calculate the average of cells which contain text or blanks use =SUM() to get the total and then divide by the count of the entries using =COUNTA(). Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Average 30 No 32 29 26 28 27 24.57 =SUM(D31:J31)/COUNTA(D31:J31) 0 Reading 0 4 6 3 1 2 =SUM(D32:J32)/COUNTA(D32:J32) Mon 30 0 Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Average 32 29 26 28 27 28.67 =SUM(D35:J35)/COUNTA(D35:J35) 0 4 6 3 1 2.33 =SUM(D36:J36)/COUNTA(D36:J36)
Temp Rain
Temp Rain
Further Usage
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 B C D E F G
BIN2DEC Page 27 of 206 H I
BIN2DEC
Binary Number Decimal Equivalent 0 0 1 1 10 2 11 3 111111111 511 1111111111 1 1111111110 2 1111111101 3 1000000000 512 11111111111 Err:502 =BIN2DEC(C4) =BIN2DEC(C5) =BIN2DEC(C6) =BIN2DEC(C7) =BIN2DEC(C8) =BIN2DEC(C9) =BIN2DEC(C10) =BIN2DEC(C11) =BIN2DEC(C12) =BIN2DEC(C13)
What Does It Do ? This function converts a binary number to decimal. Negative numbers are represented using two'scomplement notation. Syntax =BIN2DEC(BinaryNumber) The binary number has a limit of ten characters. Formatting No special formatting is needed.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 B C D E F G
CEILING Page 28 of 206 H
CEILING
Number 2.1 1.5 1.9 20 25 40 Raised Up 3 2 2 30 30 60 =CEILING(C4,1) =CEILING(C5,1) =CEILING(C6,1) =CEILING(C7,30) =CEILING(C8,30) =CEILING(C9,30)
What Does It Do ? This function rounds a number up to the nearest multiple specified by the user. Syntax =CEILING(ValueToRound,MultipleToRoundUpTo) The ValueToRound can be a cell address or a calculation. Formatting No special formatting is needed. Example 1 The following table was used by a estate agent renting holiday apartments. The properties being rented are only available on a weekly basis. When the customer supplies the number of days required in the property the =CEILING() function rounds it up by a multiple of 7 to calculate the number of full weeks to be billed. Days To Be Billed 7 7 14
Days Required Customer 1 3 Customer 2 4 Customer 3 10
=CEILING(D28,7) =CEILING(D29,7) =CEILING(D30,7)
Example 2 The following table was used by a builders merchant delivering products to a construction site. The merchant needs to hire trucks to move each product. Each product needs a particular type of truck of a fixed capacity. Table 1 calculates the number of trucks required by dividing the Units To Be Moved by the Capacity of the truck. This results of the division are not whole numbers, and the builder cannot hire just part of a truck. Table 1 Item Bricks Wood Cement Units To Be Moved 1000 5000 2000 Truck Capacity 300 600 350 Trucks Needed 3.33 8.33 5.71
=D45/E45 =D46/E46 =D47/E47
Table 2 shows how the =CEILING() function has been used to round up the result of the division to a whole number, and thus given the exact amount of trucks needed. Table 2
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 B C Item Bricks Wood Cement D Units To Be Moved 1000 5000 2000 E Truck Capacity 300 600 350 F Trucks Needed 4 9 6 G
CEILING Page 29 of 206 H
=CEILING(D54/E54,1) =CEILING(D55/E55,1) =CEILING(D56/E56,1)
Example 3 The following tables were used by a shopkeeper to calculate the selling price of an item. The shopkeeper buys products by the box. The cost of the item is calculated by dividing the Box Cost by the Box Quantity. The shopkeeper always wants the price to end in 99 pence. Table 1 shows how just a normal division results in varying Item Costs. Table 1 Item Plugs Sockets Junctions Adapters
Box Qnty 11 7 5 16
Box Cost £20 £18.25 £28.10 £28
Cost Per Item 1.81818 2.60714 5.62000 1.75000
=D69/C69 =D70/C70 =D71/C71 =D72/C72
Table 2 shows how the =CEILING() function has been used to raise the Item Cost to always end in 99 pence. Table 2 Item Plugs Sockets Junctions Adapters
In Box 11 7 5 16
Box Cost £20 £18.25 £28.10 £28
Cost Per Item Raised Cost 1.81818 1.99 2.60714 2.99 5.62000 5.99 1.75000 1.99 =INT(E83)+CEILING(MOD(E83,1),0.99)
Explanation =INT(E83) =MOD(E83,1) =CEILING(MOD(E83),0.99)
Calculates the integer part of the price. Calculates the decimal part of the price. Raises the decimal to 0.99
CELL("filename"))1) . Formatted for coloured negatives.[Red]($#.D3) 12 P2 =CELL("width".[Red]($#.D3) 0 =CELL("parentheses". (See the table shown below) 17. 1 =CELL("protect". The actual contents of the cell.50% $D$3 4 3 0. position and formatting.00_).00_).00% 0. Nothing is shown for numeric entries.D3) =CELL("contents". 0 for unlocked.D3) 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 =CELL("prefix".FIND("]".2 C0 C0C2 C2P0 P2 S2 G D4 D1 D2 D3 D5 D7 D6 D9 D8 Example The following example uses the =CELL() function as part of a formula which extracts the filename.($#.00 #.CellToTest) The TypeOfInfoRequired is a text entry which must be surrounded with quotes " ". ^ for centre.##0. The number format fo the cell. Syntax =CELL("TypeOfInfoRequired". Shown as ' for left. dmmmyy or ddmmmyy dmmm or ddmmm mmmyy mm/dd h:mm AM/PM h:mm:ss AM/PM h:mm h:mm:ss Code G F0 .CELL("filename"))FIND("[". Formatting No special formatting is needed.CELL("filename"))+1.($#. The alignment of the cell. l for text.xls'#$CELL =CELL("filename". Shown as b for blank.##0_).D3) =CELL("col".0 F2 .##0. The filename containing the cell.00) 0% 0.00) $#.##0.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . 0 =CELL("color".##0) $#.00E+00 # ?/? or # ??/?? m/d/yy or m/d/yy h:mm or mm/dd/yy. " for right. The column number.D3) =CELL("row".##0_). Codes used to show the formatting of the cell.##0.D3) 1 for a locked. The row number. The name of the current file is : #VALUE! =MID(CELL("filename").FIND("[".18 v =CELL("address". The type of entry in the cell.D3) =CELL("format".D3) =CELL("type". The type of cell protection.D3) What Does It Do ? This function examines a cell and displays information about the contents.D3) 1 for yes. 0 for no. 'file:///opt/scribd/conversion/tmp/scratch2509/41288993.##0 0.##0.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B C D E F G H CELL Page 30 of 206 I CELL This is the cell and contents to test.D3) Formatted for braces ( ) on positive values. 0 for no. The cell address.##0) $#. 1 for yes. v for value. Numeric Format General 0 #. The width of the cell.00 $#.
60 < 61 = 62 > 63 ? 64 @ 65 A 66 B 67 C 68 D 69 E 70 F 71 G 72 H 73 I 74 J 75 K 76 L 77 M 78 N 79 O 80 P 81 Q 82 R 83 S 84 T 85 U 86 V 87 W 88 X 89 Y 90 Z 91 [ 92 \ 93 ] 94 ^ 95 _ 96 ` 97 a 98 b 99 c 100 d 101 e 102 f 103 g 104 h 105 i 106 j 107 k 108 l 109 m 110 n 111 o 112 p 113 q 114 r 115 s 116 t 117 u 118 v 119 w 120 x 121 y 122 z 123 { 124  125 } 126 ~ 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 ¡ 162 ¢ 163 £ 164 ¤ 165 ¥ 166 ¦ 167 § 168 ¨ 169 © 170 ª 171 « 172 ¬ 173 174 ® 175 ¯ 176 ° 177 ± 178 ² 179 ³ 180 ´ 181 µ 182 ¶ 183 · 184 ¸ 185 ¹ 186 º 187 » 188 ¼ 189 ½ 190 ¾ 191 ¿ 192 À 193 Á 194 Â 195 Ã 196 Ä 197 Å 198 Æ 199 Ç 200 È 201 É 202 Ê 203 Ë 204 Ì 205 Í 206 Î 207 Ï 208 Ð 209 Ñ 210 Ò 211 Ó 212 Ô 213 Õ 214 Ö 215 × 216 Ø 217 Ù 218 Ú 219 Û 220 Ü 221 Ý 222 Þ 223 ß 224 à 225 á 226 â 227 ã 228 ä 229 å 230 æ 231 ç 232 è 233 é 234 ê 235 ë 236 ì 237 í 238 î 239 ï 240 ð 241 ñ 242 ò 243 ó 244 ô 245 õ 246 ö 247 ÷ 248 ø 249 ù 250 ú 251 û 252 ü 253 ý 254 þ 255 ÿ Note Number 32 does not show as it is the SPACEBAR character. 45 46 . Example The following is a list of all 255 numbers and the characters they represent.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Note that most Windows based program may not display some of the special characters. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 ! 34 " 35 # 36 $ 37 % 38 & 39 ' 40 ( 41 ) 42 * 43 + 44 . 47 / 48 0 49 1 50 2 51 3 52 4 53 5 54 6 55 7 56 8 57 9 58 : 59 . . these will be displayed as a small box.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U CHAR Page 31 of 206 V W X CHAR ANSI Number Character 65 A 66 B 169 © =CHAR(G4) =CHAR(G5) =CHAR(G6) What Does It Do? This function converts a normal number to the character it represent in the ANSI character set used by Windows. Formatting The result will be a character with no special formatting. Syntax =CHAR(Number) The Number must be between 1 and 255.
"Gold".15%."Silver"."Bronze"). The =RANK() function calculates the finishing position of each athlete. Item2."Carol") =CHOOSE(C7."Gold".15%.CHOOSE(D31. The Time for each athlete is entered."unplaced") 1 Gold =IF(D32<=3.CHOOSE(D30.C30:C34) ."Gold"."Bronze").CHOOSE(D33.CHOOSE(D32."Bronze").10%. Syntax =CHOOSE(UserValue. The =IF() has been used to filter out any positions above 3. as this would cause the error of #VALUE to appear."unplaced") 5 unplaced =IF(D33<=3. Name Alan Bob Carol David Eric Time 1:30 1:15 2:45 1:05 1:20 Position Medal 2 Silver =IF(D30<=3. Item3 through to Item29) Formatting No special formatting is required."Bronze")."Silver"."Gold". The =CHOOSE() then allocates the correct medal."Silver". Example The following table was used to calculate the medals for athletes taking part in a race."Bob".15%.10%.10%."unplaced") =RANK(C34."Alan"."Silver"."Silver".18%) =CHOOSE(C8. Item1."Bob"."Alan"."Bob". due to the fact the =CHOOSE() has only three items in it.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Index Value 1 3 2 3 1 2 Result Alan Carol Bob 18% 10% 15% B C D E F G H I CHOOSE Page 32 of 206 J CHOOSE =CHOOSE(C4."Carol") =CHOOSE(C6."unplaced") 3 Bronze =IF(D34<=3."Gold".CHOOSE(D34.18%) =CHOOSE(C9."unplaced") 4 unplaced =IF(D31<=3.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 ."Bronze")."Carol") =CHOOSE(C5."Alan".18%) What Does It Do? This function picks from a list of options based upon an Index value given to by the user.
These nonprinting characters are often found in data which has been imported from other systems such as database imports from mainframes.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . The result will show as normal text. . Syntax =CLEAN(TextToBeCleaned) Formatting No special formatting is needed.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 B C D E F G H CLEAN Page 33 of 206 I CLEAN Dirty Text Hello Hello Hello Clean Text Hello =CLEAN(C4) Hello =CLEAN(C5) Hello =CLEAN(C6) What Does It Do? This function removes any nonprintable characters from text.
The ANSI character set is used by Windows to identify each keyboard character by using a unique number. 71 / 72 0 73 1 74 2 75 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B C D E F G H I J CODE Page 34 of 206 K CODE Letter A B C a b c Alan Bob Carol ANSI Code 65 66 67 97 98 99 65 66 67 =CODE(C4) =CODE(C5) =CODE(C6) =CODE(C7) =CODE(C8) =CODE(C9) =CODE(C10) =CODE(C11) =CODE(C12) What Does It Do? This function shows the ANSI value of a single character. 69 . Example See the example for FREQUENCY. the result will be shown as a number between 1 and 255. Syntax =CODE(Text) Formatting No special formatting is needed. There are 255 characters in the ANSI set. or the first character in a piece of text.70 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 ! 58 " 59 # 60 $ 61 % 62 & 63 ' 64 ( 65 ) 66 * 67 + 68 .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . < = > ? @ A B C D E F G H I J K 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ ` a b c d 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z {  } 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 ~ € ‚ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ Š ‹ Œ Ž ‘ ’ “ ” • – 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 — ˜ ™ š › œ ž Ÿ ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨ © ª « ¬ ® ¯ 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 ° ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ · ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿ À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï Ð Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Ý Þ ß à á 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú 251 252 253 254 255 û ü ý þ ÿ .
D41) The colours Red Green Blue Yellow Black Scheme 1 Red Green Blue Scheme 6 Green Scheme 2 Red Green Yellow Scheme 7 Green Scheme 3 Red Green Black Scheme 8 Green Scheme 4 Red Blue Yellow Scheme 9 Blue Scheme 5 Red Blue Black Scheme 10 ?????? . Example 1 This example calculates the possible number of pairs of letters available from the four characters ABCD. How many colours schemes can be created ? Available Colours Colours Per Scheme Totals Schemes 5 3 10 =COMBIN(C41.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 B C D E F COMBIN Page 35 of 206 G COMBIN Pool Of Items 4 4 26 Items In A Group 2 3 2 Possible Groups 6 4 325 =COMBIN(C4. so AB is the same as BA. Total Characters 4 The proof ! Group Size 2 Combinations 6 =COMBIN(C25.D25) The four letters : ABCD Pair 1 AB Pair 2 AC Pair 3 AD Pair 4 BC Pair 5 BD Pair 6 CD Example 2 A decorator is asked to design a colour scheme for a new office.GroupSize) Formatting No special formatting is required. but can only use three in any scheme.D4) =COMBIN(C5. The decorator is given five colours to work with. The internal order of the combination does not matter.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Syntax =COMBIN(HowManyItems.D5) =COMBIN(C6.D6) What Does It Do ? This function calculates the highest number of combinations available based upon a fixed number of items.
2000 Peter Noneley A 57 58 B Blue Yellow C Blue Black D Yellow Black E Yellow Black F COMBIN Page 36 of 206 G .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 B C D E F G H CONCATENATE Page 37 of 206 I CONCATENATE Name 1 Alan Bob Carol Alan Bob Carol Name 2 Jones Williams Davies Jones Williams Davies Concatenated Text AlanJones BobWilliams CarolDavies Alan Jones Williams. Carol =CONCATENATE(C4. Formatting No special formatting is needed. ". Name 1 Alan Bob Carol Alan Bob Carol Name 2 Jones Williams Davies Jones Williams Davies Concatenated Text AlanJones BobWilliams CarolDavies Alan Jones Williams. Carol =C25&D25 =C26&D26 =C27&D27 =C28&" "&D28 =D29&". the result will be shown as normal text. Note You can achieve the same result by using the & operator.Text30) Up to thirty pieces of text can be joined.D4) =CONCATENATE(C5.D6) =CONCATENATE(C7. "&C29 =D30&"...C9) What Does It Do? This function joins separate pieces of text into one item.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .". Bob Davies.". Syntax =CONCATENATE(Text1.D7) =CONCATENATE(D8.Text2." ". Bob Davies. "&C30 . ".Text3.C8) =CONCATENATE(D9.D5) =CONCATENATE(C6.
81 3 2.25 24 90 30 =CONVERT(C8.E6) 365.D10.E4) 0.UnitToConvertTo) Formatting No special formatting is needed."m") Weight Height Length Width Abbreviations This is a list of all the possible abbreviations which can be used to denote measuring systems.D11. Example The following table was used by an Import / Exporting company to convert the weight and size of packages from old style UK measuring system to European system.) Pressure Pascal Atmosphere mm of Mercury g kg sg lbm u ozm m mi Nmi in ft yd ang Pica yr day hr mn sec Pa atm mmHg . to the same value expressed in a different type of unit.D9.57 =CONVERT(D34. Weight & Mass Gram Kilogram Slug Pound mass U (atomic mass) Ounce mass Time Year Day Hour Minute Second Distance Meter Statute mile Nautical mile Inch Foot Yard Angstrom Pica (1/72 in.E9) =CONVERT(C10.54 =CONVERT(C4."m")+CONVERT(E34.5 yr day hr mn Converting To cm m m day hr mn sec B C D E F G CONVERT Page 38 of 206 H CONVERT Converted Amount 2. Pounds Ounces Kilograms 5 3 2.E10) =CONVERT(C11."ozm".E11) What Does It Do ? This function converts a value measure in one type of unit.E5) 0.D6.91 =CONVERT(C6.UnitToConvertFrom.51 2 1. Syntax =CONVERT(AmountToConvert."ft"."lbm".D5.5 0."kg")+CONVERT(E28.3 =CONVERT(C5.E8) =CONVERT(C9.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Amount Converting To Convert From 1 in 1 ft 1 yd 1 1 1.D8.35 =CONVERT(D28."kg") Feet 12 8 5 Inches Metres 6 3."in".D4. such as Inches to Centimetres.
00E+09 G 1.00E01 1.00E+18 E 1.00E18 Abbreviation d c m u n p f a .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .00E+12 T 1. Using "c" as a prefix to meters "m" will allow centimetres "cm" to be calculated.00E+01 e Prefix deci centi milli micro nano pico femto atto Multiplier 1.00E+06 M 1.00E03 1.00E+15 P 1. Prefix exa peta tera giga mega kilo hecto dekao Multiplier Abbreviation 1.00E+02 h 1.2000 Peter Noneley A 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 B Temperature Degree Celsius Degree Fahrenheit Degree Kelvin Force Newton Dyne Pound force Energy Joule Erg Thermodynamic calorie IT calorie Electron volt Horsepowerhour Watthour Footpound BTU C D E Liquid Teaspoon Tablespoon Fluid ounce Cup Pint Quart Gallon Liter Power Horsepower Watt F G CONVERT Page 39 of 206 H C F K N dyn lbf tsp tbs oz cup pt qt gal l J e c cal eV HPh Wh flb BTU HP W Magnetism Tesla Gauss T ga These characters can be used as a prefix to access further units of measure.00E+03 k 1.00E15 1.00E09 1.00E12 1.00E02 1.00E06 1.
Range2) Formatting The result will normally be shown in decimal format.H5:H10) What Does It Do ? This function examines two sets of data to determine the degree of relationship between the two sets. the greater the correlation. The result will be a decimal between 0 and 1.000 Correlation 0. The correlation shows that there is an 28% realtionship between the data.000 £1. The larger the result.000 £20. In Table 1 the Monthly temperature is compared against the Sales of air conditioning units.000 £30.000 Sales £20. .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .000 £40.000 £5. In Table 2 the Cost of advertising has been compared to Sales.000 £40.864 realtionship between the data.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Avg Temp 20 30 30 40 50 50 B C D E F G H CORREL Page 40 of 206 I J CORREL Table 1 Air Cond Sales 100 200 300 200 400 400 Table 2 Advertising Costs £2.000 £8. It can be formatted as percentage % to show a more meaning full result.000 £20.000 £1. The correlation shows that there is an 0.E5:E10) Correlation 28% =CORREL(G5:G10. Syntax =CORREL(Range1.000 £1.864 =CORREL(D5:D10.
000 Wood £5.000 £1. through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 B C D E F G H I COUNT Page 41 of 206 J COUNT Entries To Be Counted 10 20 30 10 0 30 10 20 30 10 1Jan88 30 10 21:30 30 10 0.Range2. Item Jan Feb Bricks £1.000 Metal £1.Range3.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Example The following table was used by a builders merchant to calculate the number of sales for various products in each month.000 Glass £2.. It will ignore blanks..000 Count 3 2 =COUNT(D29:D32) Mar 0 . Syntax =COUNT(Range1.75 30 10 30 10 Hello 30 10 #DIV/0! 30 Count 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 =COUNT(C4:E4) =COUNT(C5:E5) =COUNT(C6:E6) =COUNT(C7:E7) =COUNT(C8:E8) =COUNT(C9:E9) =COUNT(C10:E10) =COUNT(C11:E11) =COUNT(C12:E12) What Does It Do ? This function counts the number of numeric entries in a list. text and errors.
2 or 3. Maths Fail 2 Fail 1 English 1 1 3 Art 1 3 1 Fail 2 History Exams Taken By Each Pupil 2 3 3 2 4 =COUNTA(D39:G39) 1 Fail How many pupils sat each Exam.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Alan Bob Carol David Elaine B C D E F G H I COUNTA Page 42 of 206 J COUNTA Entries To Be Counted 10 20 30 10 0 30 10 20 30 10 1Jan88 30 10 21:30 30 10 0. The =COUNTA() function has been used because of its ability to count text and numeric entries. through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed.. Syntax =COUNTA(Range1. A failure was entered as Fail.Range2.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . The school needed to known how many pupils sat each exam.72 30 10 30 10 Hello 30 10 #DIV/0! 30 Count 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 =COUNTA(C4:E4) =COUNTA(C5:E5) =COUNTA(C6:E6) =COUNTA(C7:E7) =COUNTA(C8:E8) =COUNTA(C9:E9) =COUNTA(C10:E10) =COUNTA(C11:E11) =COUNTA(C12:E12) What Does It Do ? This function counts the number of numeric or text entries in a list.. It will ignore blanks. Each exam passed was graded as 1.Range3. Example The following table was used by a school to keep track of the examinations taken by each pupil. Maths English Art History 4 3 5 2 =COUNTA(D35:D39) . The school also needed to know how many exams were taken by each pupil.
As the results of the vote were collated they were entered in to the table. Syntax =COUNTBLANK(RangeToTest) Formatting No special formatting is needed. The =COUNTBLANK() function has been used to calculate the number of departments which have no yet registered a vote.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 B C D E F G H COUNTBLANK Page 43 of 206 I COUNTBLANK Range To Test 1 Hello 3 0 1Jan98 5 What Does It Do ? This function counts the number of blank cells in a range.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 ."N") Blanks 2 =COUNTBLANK(C4:C11) Factory 1 Factory 2 Factory 3 Factory 4 Factory 5 Factory 6 Factory 7 Factory 8 Factory 9 Factory 10 N Y Y N Y Y N N N Votes not vet registered : Votes for Yes : Votes for No : . Admin Y Accounts N Y Production Y N Y Y Y Y Y Personnel N N N Y Y 16 14 10 =COUNTBLANK(C32:F41) =COUNTIF(C32:F41."Y") =COUNTIF(C32:F41. The response to the question could be Y or N. Each of the departments in the various factories were questioned. Example The following table was used by a company which was balloting its workers on whether the company should have a no smoking policy.
"Tyres") =COUNTIF(E4:E12. Syntax =COUNTIF(RangeOfThingsToBeCounted.">=100") =COUNTIF(C4:C12. To match a specific number type the number. such as =COUNTIF(A1:A5.CriteriaToBeMatched) The criteria can be typed in any of the following ways. such as =COUNTIF(A1:A5. ."Brakes") =COUNTIF(C4:C12."Hello") To match using operators surround the expression with quotes.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 B C D E F G COUNTIF Page 44 of 206 COUNTIF Item Brakes Tyres Brakes Service Service Window Tyres Tyres Clutch Date 1Jan98 10May98 1Feb98 1Mar98 5Jan98 1Jun98 1Apr98 1Mar98 1May98 Cost 80 25 80 150 300 50 200 100 250 2 3 5 2 =COUNTIF(C4:C12. such as =COUNTIF(A1:A5. How many Tyres have been bought. service What Does It Do ? This function counts the number of items which match criteria set by the user.E18) How many Brake Shoes Have been bought. How many items cost £100 or above. Type the name of the item to count.">100") Formatting No special formatting is needed.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .100) To match a piece of text type the text in quotes.
day) Formatting The result will normally be displayed in the dd/mm/yy format.Cells. .Date command the format can be changed.C5) January 2.C4) 25Dec99 =DATE(E5.D6. Syntax =DATE(year.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .C6) What Does It Do? This function creates a real date by using three normal numbers typed into separate cells.D4.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 B C D E F G H I DATE Page 45 of 206 J DATE Day Month 25 12 25 12 33 12 Year 99 99 99 Date 12/25/99 =DATE(E4.month.Number.D5. By using the Format. 2000 =DATE(E6.
D4. "md" Days between the two dates. "y" Years between the two dates. It can show the result in weeks. "ym" Months between the dates."Interval") FirstDate : This is the earliest of the two dates.TODAY().TODAY(). Formatting No special formatting is needed."yd") =DATEDIF(C8."y") =DATEDIF(C7. These are the available intervals."md") What Does It Do? This function calculates the difference between two dates."ym") =DATEDIF(C9. "Interval" : This indicates what you want to calculate."y") #NAME? =DATEDIF(C8.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .TODAY(). "yd" Days between the dates. "m" Months between the two dates.TODAY(). "d" Days between the two dates."md")&" Days" . "&DATEDIF(C8.D9. as if the dates were in the same year. which creates a text version."ym") #NAME? =DATEDIF(C8."m") =DATEDIF(C6. as if the dates were in the same month and year.D5."d") =DATEDIF(C5.D8. Syntax =DATEDIF(FirstDate. as if the dates were in the same year."md") You can put this all together in one calculation. SecondDate : This is the most recent of the two dates. Birth date : Years lived : and the months : and the days : 1Jan60 #NAME? =DATEDIF(C8.TODAY().TODAY(). #NAME? ="Age is "&DATEDIF(C8.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 B C D E F G H I J DATEDIF Page 46 of 206 K DATEDIF FirstDate 1Jan60 1Jan60 1Jan60 1Jan60 1Jan60 1Jan60 SecondDate 10May70 10May70 10May70 10May70 10May70 10May70 Interval days months years yeardays yearmonths monthdays Difference #NAME? #NAME? #NAME? #NAME? #NAME? #NAME? =DATEDIF(C4."ym")&" Months and "&DATEDIF(C8.SecondDate.D6. months or years."y")&" Years.D7.
such as exports from mainframe computers. The =DATEVALUE function was used because the date has been entered in the cell as a piece of text.Cells.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . probably after being imported from an external program.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 B C D E F DATEVALUE Page 47 of 206 G DATEVALUE Date 25dec99 25/12/99 25dec99 25/12/99 Date Value 36519 Err:502 36519 Err:502 =DATEVALUE(C4) =DATEVALUE(C5) =DATEVALUE(C6) =DATEVALUE(C7) What Does It Do? The function is used to convert a piece of text into a date which can be used in calculations. Days Until Expiry Date Expiry 25dec99 3936 10july/99 Err:502 13sep98 4404 30/5/2000 Err:502 =DATEVALUE(E32)TODAY() Property Ref.Date. Dates expressed as text are often created when data is imported from other programs. BC100 FG700 TD200 HJ900 . Syntax =DATEVALUE(text) Formatting The result will normally be shown as a number which represents the date. This number can be formatted to any of the normal date formats by using Format. Example The example uses the =DATEVALUE and the =TODAY functions to calculate the number of days remaining on a property lease.Number.
such as Horizon as a brand name.24 =DAVERAGE(B3:I19.00 £0.10 20 5 £10.00 £1.00 £2.00 15 2 £60. or records. Box Boxes In Value Of Unit Cost Quantity Stock Stock £4. or cell.00 To calculate the Average cost of a particular Brand of bulb.50 4 3 £54. Formatting No special formatting is needed.15 25 0 £0. Product Bulb Brand Horizon .00 £0.00 £0. The FieldName is the name.20 25 2 £10.00 £2. Type the brand name : sunbeam The Average cost of sunbeam is : £1. The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.80 20 5 £180. such as the category Brand or Wattage. Examples The average Unit Cost of a particular Product of a particular Brand.00 £0.00 £1.00 £0. such as "Unit Cost" or F3.80 10 5 £40. Brand These two cells are the Criteria range.F3. or names.00 £0.E23:E24) What Does It Do ? This function examines a list of information and produces and average. The first set of information is the name. or 100 as the wattage.50 10 3 £15.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Product Bulb Neon Spot Other Bulb Spot Spot Other Bulb Neon Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Wattage 200 100 60 10 80 100 200 25 200 100 100 10 60 80 100 40 Life Hours 3000 2000 8000 1000 unknown 3000 unknown 3000 2000 unknown 800 1000 1000 2000 1000 Brand Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Horizon Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Horizon B C D E F G H I DAVERAGE Page 48 of 206 J DAVERAGE This is the Database range.20 40 3 £24.00 £0. which are to be selected. Syntax =DAVERAGE(DatabaseRange. The second set of information is the actual record.25 10 4 £50.20 30 2 £12.25 10 5 £12. of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis for selecting the records.00 £5.50 £0. of the values to be averaged.CriteriaRange) The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine. including the field names at the top of the columns.00 £0.00 3 2 £30.00 £0.FieldName.80 25 6 £120.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .50 15 0 £0.
"Unit Cost".F3."Unit Cost".53 Wattage 100 =DAVERAGE(B3:I19."Unit Cost".16 =DAVERAGE(B3:I19.16 F G H I DAVERAGE Page 49 of 206 J The average of Horizon Bulb is : =DAVERAGE(B3:I19.E49:F50) The average Unit Cost of a Bulb equal to a particular Wattage. £1.2000 Peter Noneley A 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 B C D E £1. Product Bulb Average of Bulb <100 is : £0.E49:F50) This is the same calculation but using the actual name "Unit Cost" instead of the cell address.E67:F68) .E60:F61) The average Unit Cost of a Bulb less then a particular Wattage.17 Wattage <100 =DAVERAGE(B3:I19.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Product Bulb Average of Bulb 100 is : £0.
Please enter your date of birth in the format dd/mm/yy : You were born on : 3/25/1962 Wednesday 24 =DAY(F21) . Syntax =DAY(value) Formatting Normally the result will be a number. Example The =DAY function has been used to calculate the name of the day for your birthday.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 B C D E F G DAY Page 50 of 206 H DAY Full Date 25Dec98 4Oct10 4Oct10 The Day 25 Wed 3 4 =DAY(C4) =DAY(C5) =DAY(C6) What Does It Do? This function extracts the day of the month from a complete date.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .Custom and using the code ddd or dddd.Cells. but this can be formatted to show the actual day of the week by using Format.Number.
D4.TRUE) =DAYS360(C6.D7. =DAYS360(C4.TRUE) =DAYS360(C7. Formatting The result will be shown as a number. =DAYS360(Start. The result of using 1Jan98 and 5Jan98 will give a result of 4. Syntax =DAYS360(StartDate.TRUE) =DAYS360(C5.EndDate. Use this function if your accounting system is based on twelve 30day months.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 B C D E F DAYS360 Page 51 of 206 DAYS360 StartDate 1Jan98 1Jan98 1Jan98 1Jan98 EndDate 5Jan98 1Feb98 31Mar98 31Dec98 Days Between 4 30 89 359 * See the Note below.TRUE) What Does It Do? Shows the number of days between two dates based on a 360day year (twelve 30day months).D5.TRUE)+1 .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Note The calculation does not include the last day. To correct this add 1 to the result.End. FALSE : Use this for USA accounting systems.TRUE of FALSE) TRUE : Use this for European accounting systems.D6.
Year 2 depreciation is based upon the original Purchase Price minus Year 1 deprecation.800. The second year uses the same percentage. which will be vary based upon the values inputted by the user. Any subsequent years use the same percentage.D12) £4. The % Deprc has been calculated purely to demonstrate what % is being used.67 £180. This is an optional value. the first years depreciation will be based on the remaining part of the year.E5.D9) =DB(E3.E4.D8) =DB(E3.FirstYearMonth) The FirstYearMonth is the month in which the item was purchased during the first financial year.50% .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B C D E F G DB Page 52 of 206 H I DB Purchase Price : Life in Years : Salvage value : Year 1 2 3 4 5 Total Depreciation : £5.SalvageValue. The first year is depreciated by the fixed percentage. The percentage used in the depreciation is not set by the user.61 £343. using the original value of the item less the depreciation of the previous years.E5.000 5 £200 Deprecation £2. An additional feature of this function is the ability to take into account when the item was originally purchased.50% 27.000 5 Deprecation £1. if it not used the function will assume 12 as the value.D10) =DB(E3. Example 1 This example shows the percentage used in the depreciation.43 =DB(E3.375.50% 27. Purchase Price : Salvage value : Life in Years : Year 1 2 3 £5.73 % Deprc 27.58 * See example 4 below. What Does It Do ? This function calculates deprecation based upon a fixed percentage.246.E4.E4.PeriodToCalculate.88 £654. but uses the original value of the item less the first years depreciation.E4.375. Year 1 depreciation is based upon the original Purchase Price alone.Life.E4.000 £1.E5. Syntax =DB(PurchasePrice.00 £1.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .E5.D11) =DB(E3. If the item was purchased part way through the financial year. Formatting No special formatting is needed. Year 3 deprecation is based upon original Purchase Price minus Year 1 + Year 2 deprecation.00 £996.E5. the function calculates the necessary percentage.88 £722.
The result of this calculation is then rounded to three decimal places.808.36 £451.72 £7.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . The percentage rate is calculated by Execl using the formula = 1 . with the exception of the deprecation being calculated on a monthly basis.E68.000 6 Deprecation £687.E67*12. the differnce is compounded resulting in what could be considered as approximate values for the the depreceation.D56) £3.50% 27. Although this rounding may only make a minor change to the percentage rate.E76.50% 27.75% 27.50% Total Depreciation : Why Is The Answer Wrong ? In all of the examples above the total depreceation may not be exactly the expected value. Purchase Price : Life in Years : Salvage value : Month 56 57 58 59 60 £5.89 =DB(E47.998.E75.48 G 27. when applied to large values.E77) £3.50 £1. Example 4 . Purchase Price : Life in Years : Salvage value : First Year Ownership In Months : Year 1 2 3 4 5 £5.000 £5 100 Deprecation £8. This has been done by multiplying the years by 12.50% DB Page 53 of 206 H I Total Depreciation : Example 2 This example is similar to the previous.54 % Deprc 13.000 5 £1.98 £379.93 =DB(E74.E49.79 £8.24 £7. This is due to the way in which the percentage value for the depreceation has been calculated by the =DB() fumction.94 £859.78 =DB(E66.((salvage / cost) ^ (1 / life)).50% 27.23 £6.50% 27.D84.D75) Example 3 This example shows how the length of the first years ownership has been taken into account.185.2000 Peter Noneley A 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 B C D 4 5 E F £523.80 £623.E48.
522034% =1((E117/E116)^(1/E118)) Purchase Price : £5.500% Year 1 2 3 4 5 Total Depreciation : Error difference : .000 = 1 .9824 £379.500% 27. calculated manually : 27. The Excel Deprecation uses the =DB() function.7344 £523. This is the 'real' deprecation percentage.2000 Peter Noneley A 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 DB Page 54 of 206 H I B C D E F G This example has been created with both the Excel calculated percentage and the 'real' percentage calculated manually.000.8739 £523. Salvage value : £1.500% 27.3705 £722.7297 £4.9243 £379.8873 £3.500% 27.998.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .0000 £996.500% 27.52 Excel % Deprc 27.376.00 £1.375.((salvage / cost) ^ (1 / life)).48 Real Depreciation £1.1017 £997.8750 £722. The Real Deprecation uses a manual calculation.000 Life in Years : 5 Excel Deprecation £1.
or 100 as the wattage.25 10 5 £12.00 £2.FieldName.10 20 5 £10.00 Count the number of products of a particular Brand which have a Life Hours rating.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .CriteriaRange) The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine.80 20 5 £180.50 15 1 £37. or names. or records.15 25 1 £3. such as the category Brand or Wattage.25 10 4 £50. the text items and blank cells are ignored.20 25 2 £10. .00 £0. including the field names at the top of the columns. with a specific number of boxes in stock.00 £5.00 £2.75 £0. Box Boxes In Value Of Unit Cost Quantity Stock Stock £4.00 £1. The second set of information is the actual record. The FieldName is the name. which are to be selected.50 4 3 £54. Syntax =DCOUNT(DatabaseRange. of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis for selecting the records.80 25 6 £120. Examples The count of a particular product. It can only count values.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Product Bulb Neon Spot Other Bulb Spot Spot Other Bulb Neon Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Wattage 200 100 60 10 80 100 200 25 200 100 100 10 60 80 100 40 Life Hours 3000 2000 8000 1000 unknown 3000 unknown 3000 2000 unknown 800 1000 1000 2000 1000 Brand Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Horizon Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Horizon B C D E F G H I DCOUNT Page 55 of 206 J DCOUNT This is the Database range.D3.00 £1.20 40 3 £24.80 10 5 £40. such as "Value Of Stock" or I3.00 £0.00 15 2 £60.50 £0. The first set of information is the name.00 £0.00 £0.20 30 2 £12. such as Horizon as a brand name.00 £0.00 3 2 £30.00 £0. Formatting No special formatting is needed. Horizon 7 =DCOUNT(B3:I19.E23:E24) Type the brand name : The COUNT value of Horizon is : What Does It Do ? This function examines a list of information and counts the values in a specified column.50 £0.00 £0. Brand These two cells are the Criteria range. or cell. The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.50 10 3 £15. of the values to Count.
E68:G69) .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .E50:F51) This is the same calculation but using the name "Boxes In Stock" instead of the cell address.E61:F62) The count of Bulb products between two Wattage values.E50:F51) The count of the number of Bulb products equal to a particular Wattage. 3 =DCOUNT(B3:I19."Boxes In Stock".H3."Boxes In Stock".2000 Peter Noneley A 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 B C D E Product Bulb The number of products is : 3 F Boxes In Stock 5 G H I DCOUNT Page 56 of 206 J =DCOUNT(B3:I19."Boxes In Stock". Product Bulb The count is : 2 Wattage 100 =DCOUNT(B3:I19. Product Bulb The count is : 4 Wattage >=80 Wattage <=100 =DCOUNT(B3:I19.
50 £0. but blank cells are ignored.00 £0. Syntax =DCOUNTA(DatabaseRange.00 £1. Box Boxes In Value Of Unit Cost Quantity Stock Stock £4.80 10 5 £40. or cell.00 Count the number of products of a particular Brand. such as the category Brand or Wattage.00 £0.15 25 1 £3.E3.80 20 5 £180. It counts values and text items.20 40 3 £24. which are to be selected. . Horizon 8 =DCOUNTA(B3:I19. including the field names at the top of the columns.00 £0. or names.00 £2.50 £0.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Product Bulb Neon Spot Other Bulb Spot Spot Other Bulb Neon Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Wattage 200 100 60 10 80 100 200 25 200 100 100 10 60 80 100 40 Life Hours 3000 2000 8000 1000 unknown 3000 unknown 3000 2000 unknown 800 1000 1000 2000 1000 Brand Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Horizon Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Horizon B C D E F G H I DCOUNTA Page 57 of 206 J DCOUNTA This is the Database range. of the values to Count. The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.00 £0.00 15 2 £60.FieldName. Brand These two cells are the Criteria range. The second set of information is the actual record.00 £0.50 15 1 £37. The first set of information is the name. Formatting No special formatting is needed.20 25 2 £10. of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis for selecting the records.50 10 3 £15.00 £5. or 100 as the wattage.E23:E24) Type the brand name : The COUNT value of Horizon is : What Does It Do ? This function examines a list of information and counts the non blank cells in a specified column. such as "Value Of Stock" or I3. such as Horizon as a brand name.25 10 4 £50.75 £0. Examples The count of a product with an unknown Life Hours value.80 25 6 £120.00 £0.00 £0.25 10 5 £12.00 3 2 £30.10 20 5 £10.20 30 2 £12. or records.00 £2.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .50 4 3 £54. The FieldName is the name.CriteriaRange) The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine.00 £1.
"Life Hours". Product Spot Neon The count is : 3 Brand Horizon Sunbeam =DCOUNTA(B3:I19."Product"."Product". 1 =DCOUNTA(B3:I19.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .E68:F70) .D3.E50:F51) This is the same calculation but using the name "Life Hours" instead of the cell address.E61:F62) The count of particular products from specific brands. Product Bulb The count is : 5 Brand Horizon =DCOUNTA(B3:I19.2000 Peter Noneley A 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 B C D E F G H I DCOUNTA Page 58 of 206 J Product Life Hours Bulb unknown The number of products is : 1 =DCOUNTA(B3:I19.E50:F51) The count of the number of particular product of a specific brand.
D21) What Does It Do ? This function converts a decimal number to its binary equivalent.D17) =DEC2BIN(C18. Syntax =DEC2BIN(DecimalNumber. It can only cope with decimals ranging from 512 to 511. Formatting No special formatting is needed.PlacesToPad) The PlacesToPad is optional. The result can be padded with leading 0 zeros.D19) =DEC2BIN(C20. .D18) =DEC2BIN(C19. although this is ignored for negatives.D20) =DEC2BIN(C21.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 B C D E F G DEC2BIN Page 59 of 206 H DEC2BIN Decimal Number Binary Equivalent 0 0 =DEC2BIN(C4) 1 1 =DEC2BIN(C5) 2 10 =DEC2BIN(C6) 3 11 =DEC2BIN(C7) 511 111111111 =DEC2BIN(C8) 512 Err:502 =DEC2BIN(C9) 1 1111111111 =DEC2BIN(C10) 2 1111111110 =DEC2BIN(C11) 3 1111111101 =DEC2BIN(C12) 511 1000000001 =DEC2BIN(C13) 512 1000000000 =DEC2BIN(C14) Decimal Number 1 1 1 1 1 Places To Pad 1 2 3 9 1 Binary Equivalent 1 01 001 000000001 1111111111 =DEC2BIN(C17.
Formatting No special formatting is needed.755. The result can be padded with leading 0 zeros.813.813.D25) =DEC2HEX(C26.888 to 549.813.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 B C D E F G DEC2HEX Page 60 of 206 H DEC2HEX Decimal Number 0 1 2 3 25 26 27 28 1 2 3 2 1 549.813. It can only cope with decimals ranging from 549.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .889 Decimal Number 1 1 26 26 26 Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 19 1A 1B 1C FFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFE FFFFFFFFFD FFFFFFFFFE FFFFFFFFFF 7FFFFFFFFF 8000000000 8000000000 7FFFFFFFFF Places To Pad 1 2 3 9 1 =DEC2HEX(C4) =DEC2HEX(C5) =DEC2HEX(C6) =DEC2HEX(C7) =DEC2HEX(C8) =DEC2HEX(C9) =DEC2HEX(C10) =DEC2HEX(C11) =DEC2HEX(C12) =DEC2HEX(C13) =DEC2HEX(C14) =DEC2HEX(C15) =DEC2HEX(C16) =DEC2HEX(C17) =DEC2HEX(C18) =DEC2HEX(C19) =DEC2HEX(C20) Hexadecimal 1 01 01A 00000001A FFFFFFFFE6 =DEC2HEX(C23. .888 549.755.813.887 549.755.755.755. although this is ignored for negatives.PlacesToPad) The PlacesToPad is optional.D26) =DEC2HEX(C27. Syntax =DEC2HEX(DecimalNumber.755.888 549.D23) =DEC2HEX(C24.887.D24) =DEC2HEX(C25.813.D27) What Does It Do ? This function converts a decimal number to its hexadecimal equivalent.
D4) =DELTA(C5.D35) =DELTA(C36.D8) =DELTA(C9.D6) =DELTA(C7.D7) =DELTA(C8.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 B C D E F G H I DELTA Page 61 of 206 J DELTA Number1 10 50 17. Syntax =DELTA(FirstNumber.D9) =DELTA(C10.5 17. text values produce a result of #VALUE. Number1 10 50 30 17. The formatting of the number is not significant. It only works with numbers.D34) =DELTA(C35.5 12 100 150 Number2 20 50 30 18 8 100 125 Total Pairs Delta 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 4 =DELTA(C30.18 Hello Delta 0 1 1 1 1 Err:502 1 =DELTA(C4.SecondNumber) Formatting No special formatting is needed.D31) =DELTA(C32.5 18 0.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .50% Hello Number2 20 50 17.D5) =DELTA(C6. If the numbers are the same the result will be 1.D33) =DELTA(C34.D32) =DELTA(C33.D30) =DELTA(C31. Example The following table is used to determine how may pairs of similar numbers are in a list.D10) What Does It Do ? This function compares two values and tests whether they are exactly the same.D36) =SUM(E30:E36) . The =DELTA() function tests each pair and then the =SUM() function totals them.5 17. so numbers which appear rounded due to the removal of decimal places will still match correctly with non rounded values. otherwise the result is 0.
00 £0. Box Boxes In Value Of Unit Cost Quantity Stock Stock £4.50 4 3 £54. The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information. of the values to Get.H3. such as Horizon as a brand name.15 25 1 £3. including the field names at the top of the columns.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . or 100 as the wattage.00 £0.25 10 5 £12. such as the category Brand or Wattage. The first set of information is the name.80 10 5 £40. Formatting No special formatting is needed.00 £1.00 £2. How many boxes of a particular item do we have in stock? . The FieldName is the name.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Product Bulb Neon Spot Other Bulb Spot Spot Other Bulb Neon Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Wattage 200 100 60 10 80 100 200 25 200 100 100 10 60 80 100 40 Life Hours 3000 2000 8000 1000 unknown 3000 unknown 3000 2000 unknown 800 1000 1000 2000 1000 Brand Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Horizon Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Horizon B C D E F G H I DGET Page 62 of 206 J DGET This is the Database range.FieldName.C23:F24) The number in stock is : What Does It Do ? This function examines a list of information and produces one result.50 £0.00 £2.00 £0.80 25 6 £120.75 £0.25 10 4 £50.80 20 5 £180.00 3 2 £30.CriteriaRange) The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine.00 £0.00 £1. or names. If more than one record matches the criteria the error #NUM is shown. or cell.10 20 5 £10.50 10 3 £15.50 15 1 £37. If no records match the criteria the error #VALUE is shown. of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis for selecting the records. such as "Value Of Stock" or I3.20 40 3 £24.00 £0.20 25 2 £10.00 How many boxes of a particular item do we have in stock? Life Hours Product Bulb Wattage 100 Brand Horizon 5 =DGET(B3:I19. The second set of information is the actual record which needs to be selected. Syntax =DGET(DatabaseRange.00 £0.50 £0.20 30 2 £12.00 15 2 £60.00 £5. Example 1 This example extracts information from just one record.00 £0.
C64:F65) Example 4 This example uses the =IF() function to display a message when an error occurs.") . How many boxes of a particular item do we have in stock? Life Hours Product Bulb Wattage 9999 Brand The number in stock is : #VALUE! =DGET(B3:I19.C51:F52) B C D E F G H I DGET Page 63 of 206 J The number in stock is : Example 2 This example extracts information from multiple records and therefore shows the #NUM error.H3.H3."Duplicates products found."No such product.H3.CHOOSE(ERROR.C63:F64) Example 3 This example extracts information from no records and therefore shows the #VALUE error.C85:F86) Err:502 =IF(ISERR(F88)."One product found. How many boxes of a particular item do we have in stock? Life Hours Product Bulb Wattage 9999 Brand The number in stock is : #VALUE! =DGET(B3:I19.2000 Peter Noneley A 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Product Bulb Wattage 100 Life Hours Brand Horizon 5 =DGET(B3:I19.". How many boxes of a particular item do we have in stock? Life Hours Product Bulb Wattage 100 Brand The number in stock is : Err:502 =DGET(B3:I19.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .H3.").TYPE(F88)/3.
00 £0.00 £0.00 £0.FieldName. The second set of information is the actual record.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis for selecting the records.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Product Bulb Neon Spot Other Bulb Spot Spot Other Bulb Neon Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Wattage 200 100 60 10 80 100 200 25 200 100 100 10 60 80 100 40 Life Hours 3000 2000 8000 1000 unknown 3000 unknown 3000 2000 unknown 800 1000 1000 2000 1000 Brand Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Horizon Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Horizon B C D E F G H I J DMAX Page 64 of 206 K DMAX This is the Database range.00 £0.50 10 3 £15. which are to be selected.20 25 2 £10.00 £5.20 40 3 £24. The FieldName is the name or cell. Examples The largest Value Of Stock of a particular Product of a particular Brand. Box Boxes In Value Of Unit Cost Quantity Stock Stock £4. such as the category Brand or Wattage.00 15 2 £60. Syntax =DMAX(DatabaseRange.E23:E24) Type the brand name : The MAX value of Horizon is : What Does It Do ? This function examines a list of information and produces the largest value from a specified column. £30. Formatting No special formatting is needed.00 £0.I3.25 10 4 £50. The first set of information is the name.20 30 2 £12.I3. or 100 as the wattage. The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.00 =DMAX(B3:I19.50 4 3 £54."Value Of Stock".00 3 2 £30.00 £0.15 25 0 £0. or records.CriteriaRange) The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine. Product Bulb The largest value is : £30. Horizon £60.50 15 0 £0.00 =DMAX(B3:I19.00 £1.E49:F50) .00 £2.00 £0. or names.00 £0.50 £0.00 To calculate largest Value Of Stock of a particular Brand of bulb.80 20 5 £180.E49:F50) This is the same calculation but using the name "Value Of Stock" instead of the cell address. such as "Value Of Stock" or I3. of the values to pick the Max from.80 10 5 £40.80 25 6 £120. Brand These two cells are the Criteria range.10 20 5 £10.00 Brand sunbeam =DMAX(B3:I19.00 £0. including the field names at the top of the columns.25 10 5 £12.00 £2.00 £1. such as Horizon as a brand name.
E67:F68) . Product Bulb The largest Value Of Stock is : £24. Product Bulb The largest Value Of Stock is : £40.E60:F61) B C D E F G H I J DMAX Page 65 of 206 K The largest Value Of Stock of a Bulb less than a particular Wattage."Value Of Stock".00 Wattage 100 =DMAX(B3:I19.2000 Peter Noneley A 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 The largest Value Of Stock of a Bulb equal to a particular Wattage."Value Of Stock".00 Wattage <100 =DMAX(B3:I19.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .
20 25 2 £10.00 To calculate lowest Value Of Stock of a particular Brand of bulb.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .00 £1.25 10 4 £50.00 £0. which are to be selected.00 £5.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Product Bulb Neon Spot Other Bulb Spot Spot Other Bulb Neon Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Wattage 200 100 60 10 80 100 200 25 200 100 100 10 60 80 100 40 Life Hours 3000 2000 8000 1000 unknown 3000 unknown 3000 2000 unknown 800 1000 1000 2000 1000 Brand Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Horizon Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Horizon B C D E F G H I J DMIN Page 66 of 206 K DMIN This is the Database range. Box Boxes In Value Of Unit Cost Quantity Stock Stock £4. of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis for selecting the records. The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information.E23:E24) Type the brand name : The MIN value of Horizon is : What Does It Do ? This function examines a list of information and produces smallest value from a specified column.00 £0. Syntax =DMIN(DatabaseRange. The first set of information is the name.00 £2.20 40 3 £24.75 Brand sunbeam =DMIN(B3:I19."Value Of Stock".50 10 3 £15.00 £0.80 10 5 £40.50 15 1 £37. of the values to pick the Min from. Product Bulb The lowest value is : £3. or names.FieldName. £3.00 £1.25 10 5 £12.50 £0.50 4 3 £54.E49:F50) .00 £0.00 £0. such as the category Brand or Wattage.50 £0. Brand These two cells are the Criteria range.00 £0.I3. The FieldName is the name.10 20 5 £10. Examples The lowest Value Of Stock of a particular Product of a particular Brand.20 30 2 £12.00 =DMIN(B3:I19.80 20 5 £180. including the field names at the top of the columns. such as Horizon as a brand name. or 100 as the wattage.CriteriaRange) The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine. The second set of information is the actual record. or records.00 3 2 £30.80 25 6 £120.00 15 2 £60. Horizon £10. Formatting No special formatting is needed. such as "Value Of Stock" or I3.15 25 1 £3.75 £0.75 =DMIN(B3:I19.00 £2.I3. or cell.E49:F50) This is the same calculation but using the name "Value Of Stock" instead of the cell address.00 £0.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 The lowest Value Of Stock of a Bulb equal to a particular Wattage. Product Bulb The lowest Value Of Stock is : £12.50 Wattage 100 =DMIN(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E60:F61) B C D E F G H I J
DMIN Page 67 of 206 K
The lowest Value Of Stock of a Bulb between two Wattage values. Product Bulb The lowest Value Of Stock is : £12.00 Wattage >=80 Wattage <=100
=DMIN(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E67:G68)
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Original Number 10 10 10 10 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 Converted To Text $10.00 $10 $10.0 $10.00 $10.25 $10 $10.3 $10.25 B C D E F G H I
DOLLAR Page 68 of 206 J
DOLLAR
=DOLLAR(C4) =DOLLAR(C5,0) =DOLLAR(C6,1) =DOLLAR(C7,2) =DOLLAR(C8) =DOLLAR(C9,0) =DOLLAR(C10,1) =DOLLAR(C11,2)
What Does It Do? This function converts a number into a piece of text formatted as currency. Syntax =DOLLAR(Number,DecimalPlaces) Number : This is the number which needs to be converted. DecimalPlaces : This is the amount of decimal places needed in the converted number. Formatting No special formatting is needed. The result will be shown as a text entry.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Product Bulb Neon Spot Other Bulb Spot Spot Other Bulb Neon Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Bulb Wattage 200 100 60 10 80 100 200 25 200 100 100 10 60 80 100 40 Life Hours 3000 2000 8000 1000 unknown 3000 unknown 3000 2000 unknown 800 1000 1000 2000 1000 Brand Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Horizon Horizon Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Sunbeam Sunbeam Horizon Horizon B C D E F G H I
DSUM Page 69 of 206 J
DSUM
This is the Database range. Box Boxes In Value Of Unit Cost Quantity Stock Stock £4.50 4 3 £54.00 £2.00 15 2 £60.00 £0.00 £0.80 25 6 £120.00 £0.20 40 3 £24.00 £1.25 10 4 £50.00 £2.50 15 0 £0.00 £0.50 10 3 £15.00 £5.00 3 2 £30.00 £1.80 20 5 £180.00 £0.25 10 5 £12.50 £0.20 25 2 £10.00 £0.15 25 0 £0.00 £0.20 30 2 £12.00 £0.80 10 5 £40.00 £0.10 20 5 £10.00
To calculate the total Value Of Stock of a particular Brand of bulb. Brand These two cells are the Criteria range. Horizon =DSUM(B3:I19,I3,E23:E24)
Type the brand name :
The stock value of Horizon is : £248.00
What Does It Do ? This function examines a list of information and produces the total. Syntax =DSUM(DatabaseRange,FieldName,CriteriaRange) The DatabaseRange is the entire list of information you need to examine, including the field names at the top of the columns. The FieldName is the name, or cell, of the values to be totalled, such as "Value Of Stock" or I3. The CriteriaRange is made up of two types of information. The first set of information is the name, or names, of the Fields(s) to be used as the basis for selecting the records, such as the category Brand or Wattage. The second set of information is the actual record, or records, which are to be selected, such as Horizon as a brand name, or 100 as the wattage. Formatting No special formatting is needed. Examples The total Value Of Stock of a particular Product of a particular Brand. Product Bulb Brand sunbeam
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 B C D E £54.50 F G H I
DSUM Page 70 of 206 J
Total stock value is :
=DSUM(B3:I19,I3,E49:F50)
This is the same calculation but using the name "Value Of Stock" instead of the cell address. £54.50 =DSUM(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E49:F50)
The total Value Of Stock of a Bulb equal to a particular Wattage. Product Bulb Total Value Of Stock is : £52.50 Wattage 100 =DSUM(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E60:F61)
The total Value Of Stock of a Bulb less than a particular Wattage. Product Bulb Total Value Of Stock is : £56.00 Wattage <100 =DSUM(B3:I19,"Value Of Stock",E67:F68)
Used by the example for the =INDIRECT() function.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A B C D E Eastern data. Jan 1000 4000 7000 12000 Feb 2000 5000 8000 15000 Mar 3000 6000 9000 18000 F G H I EAST Page 71 of 206 J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Alan Bob Carol Total Total 6000 15000 24000 45000 .
Example This example was used by a company hiring contract staff. The company needed to know the end date of the employment. Start Tue 06Jan98 Mon 12Jan98 Fri 09Jan98 Fri 09Jan98 Mon 19Jan98 Mon 26Jan98 Mon 12Jan98 Duration 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 End Mon 06Apr98 Fri 10Apr98 Fri 08May98 Thu 09Apr98 Fri 17Apr98 Fri 24Apr98 Fri 10Apr98 =EDATE(C48.Number.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . The =WEEKDAY() function has been used to identify the actaul weekday number of the end date.D6) What Does It Do? This function is used to calculate a date which is a specific number of months in the past or in the future.D29) =EDATE(C30.D31) =EDATE(C32.D5) =EDATE(C6.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B C D E F EDATE Page 72 of 206 G EDATE Start Date 1Jan98 2Jan98 2Jan98 Plus Months 3 3 3 End Date 1Apr98 2Apr98 2Oct97 =EDATE(C4.D33) The company decide not to end contracts on Saturday or Sunday.D30) =EDATE(C31.Cells.D28) =EDATE(C29.2)>5. this can be formatted to represent a date by using the Format.D27) =EDATE(C28.Date command. If the week day number is 6 or 7.D48)IF(WEEKDAY(EDATE(C48.D48). then 5 is subtracted from the =EDATE() to ensure the end of contract falls on a Friday. Syntax =EDATE(StartDate.D48).WEEKDAY(EDATE(C48.2)5. The =EDATE() function has been used to calculate the end of the contract.Months) Formatting The result will normally be expressed as a number. The contract Duration is entered as months. The Start date is entered.D4) =EDATE(C5. Start Tue 06Jan98 Mon 12Jan98 Fri 09Jan98 Fri 09Jan98 Mon 19Jan98 Mon 26Jan98 Mon 12Jan98 Duration 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 End Mon 06Apr98 Sun 12Apr98 Sat 09May98 Thu 09Apr98 Sun 19Apr98 Sun 26Apr98 Sun 12Apr98 =EDATE(C27. (Sat or Sun).0) .D32) =EDATE(C33.
D4) =EOMONTH(C5. Syntax =EOMONTH(StartDate. this can be formatted to represent a date by using the Format.D6) What Does It Do? This function will show the last day of the month which is a specified number of months before or after a given date.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 B C D E F EOMONTH Page 73 of 206 G EOMONTH StartDate 5Jan98 5Jan98 5Jan98 Plus Months 2 2 2 End Of Month 35885 31Mar98 30Nov97 =EOMONTH(C4.Months) Formatting The result will normally be expressed as a number.D5) =EOMONTH(C6.Number.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .Cells. .Date command.
Formatting The result will be formatted as a normal number.TYPE Data 10 10 10 10:00 0 3 3 13:00 The Error #DIV/0! Err:508 #VALUE! 21:00 Error Type 532 508 519 #N/A =ERROR.TYPE(Error) Error is the cell reference where the error occurred.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 B C D E F G ERROR.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Syntax =ERROR.TYPE(E6) =ERROR.TYPE Page 74 of 206 H ERROR.TYPE(E7) What Does It Do? This function will show a number which corresponds to an error produced by a formula.TYPE(E5) =ERROR. . Example See Example 4 in the =DGET() function.TYPE(E4) =ERROR.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 B C D E F G H EVEN Page 75 of 206 I EVEN Original Value 1 1.2 2. Table 1 Car Vauxhall Ford Peugeot Wipers To Order 5 9 7 Pairs to Order 3 =EVEN(D28)/2 5 =EVEN(D29)/2 4 =EVEN(D30)/2 .3 25 Evenly Rounded 2 2 4 26 =EVEN(C4) =EVEN(C5) =EVEN(C6) =EVEN(C7) What Does It Do ? This function round a number up the nearest even whole number. Each manufacturer uses a different type of windscreen wiper which are only supplied in pairs. Syntax =EVEN(Number) Formatting No special formatting is needed. Example The following table is used by a garage which repairs cars. Table 1 was used to enter the number of wipers required for each type of car and then show how many pairs need to be ordered. The garage is repairing a fleet of cars from three manufactures.
If there is any difference in the two items of text the result of FALSE will be shown. the correct password has been entered as a series of =CHAR() functions. which use the ANSI number of the characters rather than the character itself!) Its still very easy though. Syntax =EXACT(Text1.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 B C D E F G H I EXACT Page 76 of 206 J EXACT Text1 Hello Hello Hello Text2 Hello hello Goodbye Result TRUE FALSE FALSE =EXACT(C4. The =EXACT() function is used to check your guess. only words which are spelt the same and which have upper and lower case characters in the same position will be considered as equal. Guess the password : Is it correct : red No (To stop you from cheating.D4) =EXACT(C5. The case of the characters is taken into account. The password is the name of a colour.D6) What Does It Do? This function compares two items of text and determine whether they are exactly the same. You need to guess the correct password. either red blue or green.D5) =EXACT(C6.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Example Here is a simple password checking formula.Text2) Only two items of text can be compared. . The case of the password is important. Formatting If the two items of text are exactly the same the result of TRUE will be shown.
628. Syntax =FACT(Number) Formatting. which results in 120.800 20 2.902. The factorial of 5 is calculated as 1*2*3*4*5. .5 6 5 120 10 3. Decimal fractions of the number are ignored.432.. The factorial is calculated as 1*2*3*4.etc.008.640.176.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . No special formatting is needed.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B C D E F G FACT Page 77 of 206 H FACT Number Factorial 3 6 3.000 =FACT(C4) =FACT(C5) =FACT(C6) =FACT(C7) =FACT(C8) What Does It Do ? This function calculates the factorial of a number.
C9) What Does It Do? This function looks for a specified letter inside another piece of text. thus enabling the search to find duplicate occurrences of the letter. the result will be shown as a number.C8. the first occurrence is used.TextToLookInside. An additional option can be used to start the search at a specific point in the text.C4) =FIND(D5. the result #VALUE is shown. it specifies at which point in the text the search should begin. When the letter is found the position is shown as a number. StartPosition : This is optional.C6) =FIND(D7. If the text contains more than one reference to the letter.StartPosition) LetterToLookFor : This needs to be a single character. Formatting No special formatting is needed. TextToLookInside : This is the piece of text to be searched through.C5) =FIND(D6. If the letter is not found in the text.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . .6) =FIND(D9. Syntax =FIND(LetterToLookFor.C7) =FIND(D8.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 B C D E F FIND Page 78 of 206 G FIND Text Hello Hello Hello Alan Williams Alan Williams Alan Williams Letter To Find e H o a a T Position Of Letter 2 1 5 3 11 #VALUE! =FIND(D4.
23 1000 =FIXED(C14.25 =FIXED(C11.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Original Converted Number To Text 10 10.3 =FIXED(C10.1) 10.Commas) If DecimalPlaces places is not specified the function will assume 2.2) 10.000. Note that any further formatting with the Format.23 1.00 =FIXED(C7.25 =FIXED(C8) 10.000 =FIXED(C13.25 10.TRUE) B C D E F G H I FIXED Page 79 of 206 J FIXED What Does It Do ? This function converts a numeric value to text.0) 10.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .0) 10 10.00 =FIXED(C12) 1000.0 =FIXED(C6.25 10 =FIXED(C9. Formatting No special formatting is needed.000's.0.25 10. If the Commas is not specified the function will assume TRUE. Number command will not have any effect.0) 1000.1) 10 10. and commas can be inserted at the 1.25 10.2) 1000 1. Syntax =FIXED(NumberToConvert. Cells. During the conversion the value can be rounded to a specific number of decimal places.DecimalPlaces. .00 =FIXED(C4) 10 10 =FIXED(C5. The Commas option can be TRUE for commas or FALSE for no commas.
Name Alan Bob Carol Actual Sales £23.1) =FLOOR(C5.5 1 2. Example The following table was used to calculate commission for members of a sales team.000 £230 £56. Commission is only paid for every £1000 of sales.000 £180 =FLOOR(D29.125 Relevant Sales Commission £23.50) What Does It Do ? This function rounds a value down to the nearest multiple specified by the user.890 £18.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 B C D E F G FLOOR Page 80 of 206 H FLOOR Number Rounded Down 1. which is then used as the basis for Commission.50) =FLOOR(C9.1) =FLOOR(C6.3 2 2.9 2 123 100 145 100 175 150 =FLOOR(C4. The =FLOOR() function has been used to round down the Actual Sales to the nearest 1000.1000) .500 £56.SignificantValue) Formatting No special formatting is needed. Syntax =FLOOR(NumberToRound.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .000 £560 £18.50) =FLOOR(C8.1) =FLOOR(C7.
E39:E41.RangeX) ItemToForecast is the point in the future. The size of the New Sales team is entered. (or past).E4:E9) What Does It Do ? This function uses two sets of values to predict a single value. RangeY is the list of values which contain the historical data to be used as the basis of the forecast.667 =FORECAST(E43.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Year 1996 1997 1998 B C D E F G H FORECAST Page 81 of 206 I FORECAST Month 1 2 3 4 5 6 Type the month number to predict : The Forecast sales figure is : 12 £7.500 40 £10. Syntax =FORECAST(ItemToForeCast.000 20 £8. The Size and Performance of the previous teams over a period of three years were entered. you can use the function to predict what the sales figure will be in any other month.D39:D41) Size Of The New Sales Team : Estimated Forecast Of Performance : .000 £2. The predicted value is based on the relationship between the two original sets of values. such as Sales figures. such as Month number.000 =FORECAST(E11. for which you need the forecast.800 £4. The =FORECAST() function is used to calculate the predicted performance for the new sales team based upon a linear trend.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .500 £3.500 £3. Formatting No special formatting is needed. The way in which the prediction is calculated is based upon the assumption of a Linear Trend. Size Of Known Sales Team Performance 10 £5. Example The following table was used by a company considering expansion of their sales team.997 Sales £1.000 30 £8.F4:F9. (Jan to Jun).RangeY. RangeX is the intervals used when recording the historical data.000 £2. If the values are sales figures for months 1 to 6.
01 Number Of Children: Between 0 .47 22. the =FREQUENCY() function ignores text entries. that is why it is enclosed in { } braces.C41:C43)} Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9 Kg Weight Intervals 15 20 100 Example 2 This example uses characters instead of values.83 15. E. The ratings were entered into a table as a single letter.000 Sales above £4. The manager now wants to calculate how many responses fell into each category. A restaurant has asked 40 customers for their rating of the food in the restaurant.E9:E11)} {=FREQUENCY(D4:F7.000 £10.E9:E11)} Sales £4.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .500 £12. £4. .67 18.000 £6.500 £3.C41:C43)} {=FREQUENCY(C30:C38. P or D.C41:C43)} {=FREQUENCY(C30:C38.000 and below. A. Weight Kg 20.000 Mar £4.E9:E11)} {=FREQUENCY(D4:F7. so how can the frequency of text be calculated? The answer is to use the =CODE() and =UPPER() functions. The =FREQUENCY() function was then used to calculate the number of children whose weights fell between specified intervals.800 £3.000 up to £6.000 Feb £6. Syntax =FREQUENCY(RangeOfData.000 £6. V. The function is entered in the cells as an array.28 20.000 £7.ListOfIntervals) Formatting No special formatting is needed. Example 1 The following tables were used to record the weight of a group of children.66 17.15 Kg 2 Above 15 but less than or equal to 20 Kg 4 Above 20 Kg 3 {=FREQUENCY(C30:C38.000 Sales above £6.000 £2.000 £4.80 8. The result shows how many items in the range of data fall between the intervals.000 £5.999 What Does It Do ? This function compares a range of data against a list of intervals.36 16.74 10.000 4 5 3 {=FREQUENCY(D4:F7.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B C D E F G H FREQUENCY Page 82 of 206 I FREQUENCY North South East West Jan £5. Unfortunately.000 £999.
2000 Peter Noneley A 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 B C D E F G H The =UPPER() forces all the text entries to be considered as capital letters.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .CODE(UPPER(C60:C64)))} {=FREQUENCY(CODE(UPPER(B67:I71)).CODE(UPPER(C60:C64)))} {=FREQUENCY(CODE(UPPER(B67:I71)).CODE(UPPER(C60:C64)))} {=FREQUENCY(CODE(UPPER(B67:I71)). As this code is a numeric value.CODE(UPPER(C60:C64)))} Customer Ratings V V A A V A D P V P p A p D A A P E P V D V D a E D d A E D .CODE(UPPER(C60:C64)))} {=FREQUENCY(CODE(UPPER(B67:I71)). The =CODE() function calculates the unique ANSI code for each character. the =FREQUENCY() function can then be used! Excellent Very Good Average Poor Disgusting Rating E V A P D D P V E e Frequency 6 8 9 8 9 V a E d P FREQUENCY Page 83 of 206 I {=FREQUENCY(CODE(UPPER(B67:I71)).
as an array. just Enter alone.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . 31 =SUM(1/COUNTIF(C10:I16.B24:B72)} {=FREQUENCY(C10:I16. Table 2 Lottery Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 How Many Appearances 1 1 3 1 2 2 0 1 0 0 1 0 3 0 4 0 2 1 1 1 0 2 2 0 1 0 0 0 1 {=FREQUENCY(C10:I16.B24:B72)} {=FREQUENCY(C10:I16.B24:B72)} Special tip! To count how many unique numbers in a range use the following formula. and how many appearances each number has made during the past seven weeks.C10:I16)) . It has to be entered.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 B C D E F G H FREQUENCY 2 Page 84 of 206 I FREQUENCY 2 This example shows how the =FREQUENCY() function has been used to calculate how often certain numbers appear in the Lottery results. so press Ctrl+Shift+Enter rather than. Table 1 is a record of all the results from the past seven weeks. Unique values.B24:B72)} {=FREQUENCY(C10:I16. Table 1 Week 1 1st Number 2nd Number 3rd Number 4th Number 5th Number 6th Number Bonus Ball 3 6 15 32 37 5 17 Week 2 36 3 44 15 31 22 13 Week 3 5 19 35 32 13 30 15 Week 4 3 37 20 46 22 8 25 Week 5 2 23 47 6 49 49 18 Week 6 41 15 29 45 13 11 17 Week 7 45 4 44 23 43 46 1 Table 2 is the list of possible number from 1 to 49.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 B 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 FREQUENCY 2 Page 85 of 206 C 1 1 2 0 0 1 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 1 2 2 2 1 0 2 D E F G H I .
E9) 100 =GCD(C10.D9.D5) =GCD(C6.Number2.D4) =GCD(C5.D6) Greatest Divisor 6 =GCD(C9.D11. through to Number29) Formatting No special formatting is needed.E11) Numbers 72 500 4 96 200 6 What Does It Do ? This function calculates the largest number which can be used to divided all the values specified..D10.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 18 300 2. .5 =GCD(C11..5 Numbers 6 15 28 49 5 99 Greatest Divisor 3 7 1 B C D E F G H I GCD Page 86 of 206 J GCD =GCD(C4. Where there is no common divisor the value of 1 is used.E10) 0. Decimal fractions are ignored. Syntax =GCD(Number1.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .Number3. The result is always a whole number.
The =GESTEP() function compares the Sales with Target.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .E27) =GESTEP(D28. If the number is greater than or equal.000 £8.NumberToTestAgainst) Formatting No special formatting is needed.E31) =SUM(F27:F31) Targets Achieved .D7) 101 100 1 =GESTEP(C8.D6) 100 100 1 =GESTEP(C7.E28) =GESTEP(D29.000 £1.D8) 2 1 =GESTEP(C9.000 Target £4. Syntax =GESTEP(NumberToTest.000 £4. Example The following table was used to calculate how many sales staff achieved their targets.D4) 50 20 1 =GESTEP(C5.000 £2.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 B C D E F G H I GESTEP Page 87 of 206 J GESTEP Number1 Number2 GESTEP 10 20 0 =GESTEP(C4.000 £7.000 £2.E29) =GESTEP(D30. the result of 1 will be shown.D10) What Does It Do ? This function test a number to see if it is greater than or equal to another number.000 £2. Name Alan Bob Carol David Eric Sales £3.000 £5. and the results are totalled.D9) 2 0 =GESTEP(C10.D5) 99 100 0 =GESTEP(C6.E30) =GESTEP(D31. otherwise 0 is shown.000 GESTEP 0 1 0 1 1 3 =GESTEP(D27.
813.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 B C D E F HEX2DEC Page 88 of 206 G HEX2DEC Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 1A 1B 7FFFFFFFFF 8000000000 FFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFE FFFFFFFFFD Decimal Number 0 1 2 3 26 27 549.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .888 1 2 3 =HEX2DEC(C4) =HEX2DEC(C5) =HEX2DEC(C6) =HEX2DEC(C7) =HEX2DEC(C8) =HEX2DEC(C9) =HEX2DEC(C10) =HEX2DEC(C11) =HEX2DEC(C12) =HEX2DEC(C13) =HEX2DEC(C14) What Does It Do ? This function converts a hexadecimal number to its decimal equivalent.755. Syntax =HEX2DEC(HexaDecimalNumber) Formatting No special formatting is needed. Hexadecimal F 1A 29 Value 1 Value 2 Result =DEC2HEX(HEX2DEC(C29)+HEX2DEC(C30)) .887 549.755.813. Example The following table was used to add two hexadecimal values together.
because the list of names is not as deep as the lookup range. To solve the problem the =MATCH() function is used.F11.Feb. The RangeToLookIn is the range of data with the column headings at the top.RowToPickFrom. When the item is found. The =HLOOKUP() uses FALSE at the end of the function to indicate to Excel that the column headings are not sorted. they are part of the illustration.D3:F10. Type a month to look for : Which row needs to be picked out : The result is : What Does It Do ? This function scans across the column headings at the top of a table to find a specified item. The Sorted/Unsorted is whether the column headings are sorted. Syntax =HLOOKUP(ItemToFind.Jan.Mar. Example 1 This table is used to find a value based on a specified month and name.SortedOrUnsorted) The ItemToFind is a single item specified by the user. TRUE for yes. The RowToPickFrom is how far down the column the function should look to pick from. It then calculates the position of the name in the list. Unfortunately. so and extra 1 is added to compensate. Jan 10 20 30 40 50 Feb 80 90 100 110 120 Mar 97 69 45 51 77 feb Bob Eric Alan Carol David Type a month to look for : . The =MATCH() looks through the list of names to find the name we require. The problem arises when we need to scan down to find the row adjacent to the name. FALSE for no. the =MATCH() number is 1 less than we require. The =HLOOKUP() is used to scan across to find the month.FALSE) row 1 row 2 row 3 row 4 row 5 row 6 The row numbers are not needed.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . even though to us the order of Jan.RangeToLookIn. it then scans down the column to pick a cell entry. If they were sorted alphabetically they would have read as Feb. Formatting No special formatting is needed.Mar is correct. The =HLOOKUP() now uses this =MATCH() number to look down the month column and picks out the correct cell entry.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B C D E F G H I HLOOKUP Page 89 of 206 J HLOOKUP Jan 10 20 30 40 50 Feb 80 90 100 110 120 Mar 97 69 45 51 77 Feb 4 100 =HLOOKUP(F10.
2. Wood and Glass. The FALSE option has been used at the end of the function to indicate that the product names across the top of the Unit Cost Table are not sorted.0)+1.D47:F54.E115:G118. The name of the Item is typed in column C.F73:F77.G72:I77. The function uses the absolute ranges indicated by the dollar symbol $. If a match is not found.FALSE) Example 3 In the following example a builders merchant is offering discount on large orders.FALSE) Example 2 This example shows how the =HLOOKUP() is used to pick the cost of a spare part for different makes of cars.TRUE) .MATCH(C127. The Unit Cost of the item is then looked up in the Unit Cost Table.FALSE) The discount is then looked up in the Discount Table If the Quantity Ordered matches a value at the top of the Discount Table the =HLOOKUP will look down the column to find the correct discount. Using TRUE will allow the function to make an approximate match. Trying to match an order of 125 will drop down to 100.D116:D118.E111:G112. the =HLOOKUP() then looks down the column to the row specified by the =MATCH() function. the ranges for =HLOOKUP() and =MATCH() do not change. which scans the list of spares for the item specified in column C.200 =HLOOKUP(B79. The Discount Table holds the various discounts for different quantities of each product. Maker Vauxhall VW Ford VW Ford Ford Vauxhall Ford Spare Ignition GearBox Engine Steering Ignition CYHead GearBox Engine Cost £50 Vauxhall Ford VW £600 GearBox 500 450 600 £1. the function will produce an error.MATCH(F55.200 Engine 1000 1200 800 £275 Steering 250 350 275 £70 Ignition 50 70 45 £290 CYHead 300 290 310 £500 £1. =HLOOKUP(D127.0)+1. The Orders Table is used to enter the orders and calculate the Total.MATCH(C79. This ensures that when the formula is copied to more cells. The TRUE option has been used at the end of the function to indicate that the values across the top of the Discount Table are sorted. The Unit Cost Table holds the cost of 1 unit of Brick. the next lowest value is used.C48:C52.2000 Peter Noneley A 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 B C D E Type a name to look for : F alan G H I HLOOKUP Page 90 of 206 J The result is : 100 =HLOOKUP(F54. =HLOOKUP(C127.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Using the FALSE option forces the function to search for an exact match. and the discount from the 100 column is used. If the Quantity Ordered does not match a value at the top of the Discount Table. When the make is found. All the calculations take place in the Orders Table.0)+1. The =HLOOKUP() scans the column headings for the make of car specified in column B.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .D116:D118.2.2000 Peter Noneley A 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 B C D E F G H I HLOOKUP Page 91 of 206 J Brick £2 Unit Cost Table Wood Glass £1 £3 Brick Wood Glass Discount Table 1 100 0% 6% 0% 3% 0% 12% Orders Table Unit Cost Discount £2 6% £1 3% £3 12% £2 6% £1 0% £3 15% 300 8% 5% 15% Item Brick Wood Glass Brick Wood Glass Unit Cost Discount Units 100 200 150 225 50 500 Total £188 £194 £396 £423 £50 £1.FALSE) =HLOOKUP(D127.E115:G118.TRUE) .275 =HLOOKUP(C127.0)+1.E111:G112.MATCH(C127.
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 B C D E F G H HOUR Page 92 of 206 I HOUR Number 21:15 0. Syntax =HOUR(Number) Formatting The result will be shown as a normal number between 0 and 23.25 Hour 21 6 =HOUR(C4) =HOUR(C5) What Does It Do? The function will show the hour of the day based upon a time or a number.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . .
ActionIfTrue."Achieved"."Not Achieved") What Does It Do? This function tests a condition."Not Achieved") Not Achieved =IF(C33>=D33.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 B C D E F G H I IF Page 93 of 206 J IF Name Alan Bob Carol Sales 1000 6000 2000 Target 5000 5000 4000 Result Not Achieved =IF(C4>=D4.ActionIfFalse) The Condition is usually a test of two cells.C45*5%) Example 3 This example uses the =AND() within the =IF() function. If the Sales do not reach Target. the Commission is 10% of Sales. the Commission is only 5% of Sales. Example 1 The following table shows the Sales figures and Targets for sales reps. If the Sales are greater than or equal to the Target. Name Alan Bob Carol Sales 1000 6000 2000 Target 5000 5000 4000 Commission 50 =IF(C43>=D43. Formatting No special formatting is required.000 Product Wood Discount £200 Total £1."Achieved"."Achieved". one of two actions will be carried out.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .800 .C45*10%. The discount is only given on products which are on Special Offer.C44*10%. The ActionIfTrue and ActionIfFalse can be numbers. Depending upon the result. Syntax =IF(Condition. Name Alan Bob Carol Sales 1000 6000 2000 Target 5000 5000 4000 Result Not Achieved =IF(C31>=D31. The =AND() function is used with the =IF() to check that the product is on offer and that the value of the order is above £1000. text or calculations. Special Offer Yes Order Value £2. If the condition is not met it is considered as FALSE. Each has their own target which they must reach. The =IF() function is used to compare the Sales with the Target.C43*5%) 600 =IF(C44>=D44."Not Achieved") Achieved =IF(C5>=D5.C44*5%) 100 =IF(C45>=D45. A builders merchant gives 10% discount on certain product lines. If the Sales are greater than or equal to the Target the result of Achieved is shown. This time the Commission to be paid to the sales rep is calculated."Not Achieved") Achieved =IF(C32>=D32."Achieved". Note that the text used in the =IF() function needs to be placed in double quotes "Achieved". If the Sales do not reach the target the result of Not Achieved is shown."Achieved"."Not Achieved") Not Achieved =IF(C6>=D6. If the condition is met it is considered to be TRUE."Achieved"."Not Achieved") Example 2 The following table is similar to that in Example 1. such as A1=A2.C43*10%. when the Order Value is £1000 or above.
000 ££500 £300 £2.000 E F G H ££2.2000 Peter Noneley A 59 60 61 62 B Glass Cement Turf C No Yes Yes D £2.0) I IF Page 94 of 206 J .700 =IF(AND(C61="Yes".D61>=1000).Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .000 £500 £3.D61*10%.
It can be used with a single block of data.2.D36) Size Large Medium Small Type either 1.3 or 4 for the country : Type 1. or noncontinuos blocks.H36) Syntax 2 =INDEX(RangeToLookIn.F50.RowCoordinate. 2 or 3 : 2 The size is : Medium =INDEX(G34:I34. but the Coordinate refers to a row when the range is vertical and a column when the range is horizontal. The Coordinate indicates how far down or across to look when picking the data from the range.G11.F51) Type 1. 2 or 3 : 2 The colour is : Green =INDEX(D32:D34.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Syntax There are various forms of syntax for this function. Syntax 1 =INDEX(RangeToLookIn.ColumnColumnCordinate) This syntax is used when the range is made up of rows and columns. People Weeks 1 2 3 1 £500 £600 £700 2 £300 £400 £500 3 £250 £300 £350 4 £200 £250 £300 2 4 250 =INDEX(D7:G9. Colours Red Green Blue Type either 1.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B C D E F G H INDEX Page 95 of 206 I INDEX Holiday booking price list. Country England France Germany Spain Currency Population Capitol Sterling 50 M London Franc 40 M Paris DM 60 M Bonn Peseta 30 M Barcelona 2 3 Paris =INDEX(D45:F48.G12) How many weeks required : How many people in the party : Cost per person is : What Does It Do ? This function picks a value from a range of data by looking down a specified number of rows and then across a specified number of columns.Coordinate) This is used when the RangeToLookIn is either a single column or row. Both of the examples below use the same syntax.2 or 3 for statistics : The result is : .
ColumnColumnCordinate. It allows the names of products and the quarters to be entered. In the following example the figures for North and South have been named as one range called NorthAndSouth.500 £12.500 £11.000 Qtr1 £1.000 £9.500 £6.000 Qtr2 £2. 3 or 4 for the Qtr : Type 1 for North or 2 for South : The result is : =INDEX(EastAndWest.000 Qtr4 £4. EAST Bricks Wood Glass WEST Bricks Wood Glass Qtr1 £1.MATCH(F101.000 £11.500 Qtr2 £2.000 £8.MATCH(F100.000 Qtr1 £1. The =MATCH() function is used to find the row and column positions of the names entered. The easiest way to refer to these areas is to select them and give them a single name.0).000 £10.000 £12.000 £5. NORTH Bricks Wood Glass SOUTH Bricks Wood Glass Qtr1 £1.000 £7. 2.500 £9.500 Type 1.000 Qtr3 £3.000 £12.000 Qtr3 £3. The AreaToPickFrom indicates which of the multiple areas should be used. 2 or 3 for the product : Type 1.C91:C93.000 Qtr2 £2.000 £7.AreaToPickFrom) Using this syntax the range to look in can be made up of multiple areas.D90:G90.F76.500 £8.500 £6.0).500 £8.500 Qtr3 £3.000 £8.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .500 £12.IF(F102=C95.F78) Qtr4 £4.500 £7.500 £11.500 £10.2000 Peter Noneley A 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 B C D E F G H INDEX Page 96 of 206 I Syntax 3 =INDEX(NamedRangeToLookIn.500 wood qtr2 west Err:504 Qtr4 £4.2))) .000 £5. 2 or 3 for the product : Type 1.000 £11.500 £10.F77.500 £9.000 £10. 2.500 Type 1.500 1 3 2 Err:504 =INDEX(NorthAndSouth.000 Qtr4 £4.500 Qtr3 £3.500 £5.000 £6.000 £9.500 £5.500 Qtr2 £2.000 £6.IF(F102=C90. 3 or 4 for the Qtr : Type 1 for North or 2 for South : The result is : Example This is an extended version of the previous example.500 £7. These positions are then used by the =INDEX() function to look for the data.RowCoordinate.1.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Type the name of the sheet. such as G6 : The value in the cell you typed is : What Does It Do ? This function converts a plain piece of text which looks like a cell address into a usable cell reference.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 B C D E F G H I INDIRECT Page 97 of 206 J INDIRECT North South East West Jan 10 40 70 100 Feb 20 50 80 110 Mar 30 60 90 120 G6 80 =INDIRECT(H9) Type address of any of the cells in the above table. such as C8 : The contents of the cell C8 on North is : The =INDIRECT() created a reference to =NORTH!C8 North C8 120 =INDIRECT(G33&"!"&G34) Example 2 This example uses the same data as above. SOUTH and EAST. such as North : Type the cell to pick data from. but this time the =SUM() function is used to calculate a total from a range of cells. Syntax =INDIRECT(Text) Formatting No special formatting is needed. When a reference to a sheet is made the exclamation symbol ! needs to be placed between the sheet name and cell address acting as punctuation. The address can be either on the same worksheet or on a different worksheet. such as C5 : C7 Type the end cell of the range. such as C7 : The sum of the range C5:C7 on South is : 1200 =SUM(INDIRECT(G44&"!"&G45&":"&G46)) The =INDIRECT() created a reference to =SUM(SOUTH!C5:C7) . such as South : C5 Type the start cell of the range. The example uses three other worksheets named NORTH. Example 1 This example shows how data can be picked form other worksheets by using the worksheet name and a cell address. South Type the name of the sheet. The data on these three sheets is laid out in the same cells on each sheet.
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 B C D E INFO Page 98 of 206 F INFO Current directory Available bytes of memory Memory in use Total bytes of memory Number of active worksheets Cell currently in the top left of the window Operating system Recalculation mode Excel version Name of system. Formatting The results will be shown as text or a number depending upon what was requested.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . . Syntax =INFO(text) text : This is the name of the item you require information about. (PC or Mac) System Information Err:502 Err:502 Err:502 Err:502 1 Err:502 Windows (32bit) NT 5.01 Automatic 310m19(Build:9420) LINUX =INFO("directory") =INFO("memavail") =INFO("memused") =INFO("totmem") =INFO("numfile") =INFO("origin") =INFO("osversion") =INFO("recalc") =INFO("release") =INFO("system") What Does It Do? This function provides information about the operating environment of the computer.
Table 2 Birth Date 1Jan80 5Feb81 20Oct79 1Mar81 Term Start 1Sep88 1Sep88 1Sep88 1Sep88 Age 9 8 9 8 =(D38C38)/365. Table 1 shows the age of the child with decimal places Table 1 Birth Date 1Jan80 5Feb81 20Oct79 1Mar81 Term Start 1Sep88 1Sep88 1Sep88 1Sep88 Age 8.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 B C D E F G H I INT Page 99 of 206 J INT Number 1.48 Integer 1 2 10 2 =INT(C4) =INT(C5) =INT(C6) =INT(C7) What Does It Do ? This function rounds a number down to the nearest whole number. This has the effect of increasing the child age.75 1.3 10.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . A child can only be admitted to school if they are over 8 years old.57 8. Example The following table was used by a school to calculate the age a child when the school year started. Table 3 Birth Date 1Jan80 5Feb81 20Oct79 1Mar81 Term Start 1Sep88 1Sep88 1Sep88 1Sep88 Age 8 7 8 7 =INT((D49C49)/365.5 =(D27C27)/365.67 7.25 . The number of days is then divided by 365. Syntax =INT(Number) Formatting No special formatting is needed.25) Note The age is calculated by subtracting the Birth Date from the Term Start to find the age of the child in days.25 Table 3 shows the age of the child with the Age calculated using the =INT() function to remove the decimal part of the number to give the correct age.25 Table 2 shows the age of the child with the Age formatted with no decimal places.87 7.5 2. The Birth Date and the Term Start date are entered and the age calculated.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 59 B C D E F The reason for using 365. G H I INT Page 100 of 206 J .25 is to take account of the leap years.
Usually the function is used in conjunction with the =IF() function which can test the result of the =ISBLANK() Syntax =ISBLANK(CellToTest) Formatting Used by itself the result will be shown as TRUE or FALSE.0.000 £250 Banked Outstanding 100 0 200 0 0 50 0 1000 6Jan98 250 0 =IF(ISBLANK(F36). Cheques Received Num From chq1 ABC Ltd chq2 CJ Design chq3 J Smith chq4 Travel Co. The =ISBLANK() function is used to determine whether the Cleared column is empty or not.0) Totals 550 1050 .E36.E36) =IF(ISBLANK(F36).Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Example The following example shows a list of cheques received by a company. While the Cleared column is blank the cheque will still be Outstanding. It can be used when a spreadsheet has blank cells which may cause errors. When the Cleared date is entered the cheque will be shown as Banked.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 B C D E F G H ISBLANK Page 101 of 206 I ISBLANK Is The Cell Blank FALSE FALSE TRUE 25Dec98 FALSE Data 1 Hello =ISBLANK(C4) =ISBLANK(C5) =ISBLANK(C6) =ISBLANK(C7) What Does It Do? This function will determine if there is an entry in a particular cell. When the cheque is cleared the date is entered. chq5 J Smith Date Received 1Jan98 1Jan98 2Jan98 3Jan98 4Jan98 Date Cleared 2Jan98 7Jan98 Amount £100 £200 £50 £1. Until the Cleared date is entered the Cleared column is blank. but which will be filled later as the data is received by the user.
Table 1 Cost Of Crate : Bottles In Crate : Cost of single bottle : £24 0 #DIV/0! =E32/E33 Table 2 shows how this error can be trapped by using the =ISERR() function. or if the error is the #NA message. Example The following tables were used by a publican to calculate the cost of a single bottle of champagne. Table 1 shows what happens when the value zero 0 is entered as the number of bottles. by dividing the cost of the crate by the quantity of bottles in the crate. Syntax =ISERR(CellToTest) The CellToTest can be a cell reference or a calculation.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 B C D E F G H ISERR Page 102 of 206 I ISERR Cell to test 3 #DIV/0! Err:508 #VALUE! Err:502 Err:502 #N/A Result FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE =ISERR(D4) =ISERR(D5) =ISERR(D6) =ISERR(D7) =ISERR(D8) =ISERR(D9) =ISERR(D10) What Does It Do ? This function tests a cell and shows TRUE if there is an error value in the cell.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Formatting No special formatting is needed.E40/E41) . The #DIV/0 indicates that an attempt was made to divide by zero 0. which Excel does not do."Try again!". Table 2 Cost Of Crate : £24 Bottles In Crate : 0 Cost of single bottle : Try again! =IF(ISERR(E40/E41). It will show FALSE if the contents of the cell calculate without an error.
Table 1 Start date : Jan 01 98 End date : 5Jan98 Difference : 3Jan00 =D31D30 Table 2 shows how the =ISERROR() function has been used to trap the error and inform the user that there has been an error in the data entry.D40D39) . Table 2 Start date : Jan 01 98 End date : 5Jan98 Difference : 3Jan00 =IF(ISERROR(D40D39). It will show TRUE for any type of error and FALSE if no error is found."Error in data entry". Syntax =ISERROR(CellToTest) The CellToTest can be a cell reference or a formula. Example The following tables was used to calculate the difference between two dates.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Table 1 shows an error due to the fact that the first entry was entered using an inappropriate date format. Formatting No special formatting is needed.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 B C D E F G ISERROR Page 103 of 206 H ISERROR Cell to test 3 #DIV/0! Err:508 #VALUE! Err:502 Err:502 #N/A Result FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE =ISERROR(D4) =ISERROR(D5) =ISERROR(D6) =ISERROR(D7) =ISERROR(D8) =ISERROR(D9) =ISERROR(D10) What Does It Do ? This function tests a cell or calculation to determine whether an error has been generated.
5 3.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 B C D E F G H ISEVEN Page 104 of 206 I ISEVEN Number 1 2 2. Note that decimal fractions are ignored. Note that text entries result in the #VALUE! error.6 3. Note that dates can be even or odd. An even number is shown as TRUE an odd number is shown as FALSE. Syntax =ISEVEN(CellToTest) Formatting No special formatting is required.5 2.6 Hello 1Feb98 1Feb96 Is it Even 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 =ISEVEN(C4) =ISEVEN(C5) =ISEVEN(C6) =ISEVEN(C7) =ISEVEN(C8) =ISEVEN(C9) =ISEVEN(C10) =ISEVEN(C11) =ISEVEN(C12) What Does It Do ? This function tests a number to determine whether it is even. .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 B C D E F G H ISLOGICAL Page 105 of 206 I J ISLOGICAL Cell To Test FALSE TRUE 20 1Jan98 Hello #DIV/0! Result TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE =ISLOGICAL(D4) =ISLOGICAL(D5) =ISLOGICAL(D6) =ISLOGICAL(D7) =ISLOGICAL(D8) =ISLOGICAL(D9) =ISLOGICAL(D10) What Does It Do ? This function tests a cell to determine whether the cell contents are logical. the result FALSE is shown. If the cell does not contain a logical value. Syntax =ISLOGICAL(CellToTest) Formatting No special formatting is needed.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . If the cell does contain a logical value. The logical values can only be TRUE or FALSE. . the result TRUE is shown.
The function is normally used with other functions such as the =IF() function. The #N/A is generated when a function cannot work properly because of missing data. Syntax =ISNA(CellToTest) Formatting No special formatting is needed. The #N/A can also be typed in to a cell by the user to indicate the cell is currently empty.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 B C D E F G H I ISNA Page 106 of 206 J ISNA Number 1 Hello 1Jan98 #N/A Result FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE =ISNA(C4) =ISNA(C5) =ISNA(C6) =ISNA(C7) =ISNA(C8) What Does It Do? This function tests a cell to determine whether it contains the Not Available error #N/A. but will be used for data entry in the future. .
Table 1 Item Radio TV Video Buying Price 400 800 3OO Markup 150% 200% 150% Profit 600 1600 #VALUE! =D32*E32 Buying Price Markup Profit 400 150% 600 800 200% 1600 3OO 150% Retype the Price =IF(ISNONTEXT(D40). The function is normally used with other function such as the =IF() function. rather than text. is entered using the letter O instead of the zero 0.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .D40*E40. Examples The following table is used by an electrical retailer to calculate the selling price of an item based on the buying price and the shop markup."Retype the Price") . such as typing the letter O instead of zero 0. Table 2 Item Radio TV Video B C D E F G ISNONTEXT Page 107 of 206 H ISNONTEXT Item To Test 10 Hello 1Jan98 1OO Is It A Number? TRUE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE =ISNONTEXT(C4) =ISNONTEXT(C5) =ISNONTEXT(C6) =ISNONTEXT(C7) =ISNONTEXT(C8) What Does It Do? This functions tests an entry to determine whether it is a number. It would be used to ensure that only numeric entries are used in calculations. rather than text which looks like a number. Table 1 shows the #VALUE! error generated when a number.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Table 2 shows how the error is trapped using the =ISNONTEXT function and the =IF() function in the calculation. 300. Syntax =ISNONTEXT(CellToTest) Formatting No special formatting.
Formatting No special formatting is needed.000 £15.000 £8.000 =IF(ISNUMBER(E35).D29:E33. Example The following table was used by a personnel department to lookup the salary of an employee. The =ISNUMBER() function has been used to identify the type of entry made. 1 2 3 4 5 Name Alan Eric Carol Bob David Salary £10. ID No.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .VLOOKUP(E35.VLOOKUP(E35. Syntax =ISNUMBER(CellToTest) The cell to test can be a cell reference or a calculation. or is blank. If the cell or calculation is not numeric.2. The employee can be entered as a Name or as a Numeric value.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 B C D E F G H ISNUMBER Page 108 of 206 I J ISNUMBER Cell Entry 1 1Jan98 #DIV/0! Hello Result TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE =ISNUMBER(D4) =ISNUMBER(D5) =ISNUMBER(D6) =ISNUMBER(D7) =ISNUMBER(D8) What Does It Do ? This function examines a cell or calculation to determine whether it is a numeric value.000 Type Employee Name or ID : eric The Salary is : £12. If the cell or calculation is a numeric value the result TRUE is shown.FALSE). and then the =IF() decides which VLOOKUP to perform.000 £12.FALSE)) .000 £12.C29:E33.3. the result FALSE is shown.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Note that dates can be odd or even.6 3. An odd number is shown as TRUE an even number is shown as FALSE. . Note that decimal fractions are ignored. Note that text entries result in the #VALUE! error.5 2. Syntax =ISODD(CellToTest) Formatting No special formatting is required.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 B C D E F G H I ISODD Page 109 of 206 J ISODD Number 1 2 2.5 3.6 Hello 1Feb98 1Feb96 Is it Odd 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 =ISODD(C4) =ISODD(C5) =ISODD(C6) =ISODD(C7) =ISODD(C8) =ISODD(C9) =ISODD(C10) =ISODD(C11) =ISODD(C12) What Does It Do ? This function tests a number to determine whether it is odd.
and is normally used in macros rather than on the worksheet.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 B C D E F G ISREF Page 110 of 206 H I ISREF TRUE =ISREF(A1) FALSE =ISREF(B99) Err:508 =ISREF(Hello) FALSE =ISREF(10) FALSE =ISREF(NOW()) FALSE =ISREF("A1") Err:508 =ISREF(XX99) What Does It Do ? This function shows TRUE if given a cell address. . as the reference will itself be evaluated by the function. Formatting No special formatting is needed. it cannot be a reference to the contents of another cell.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . or FALSE for any other type of value. Syntax =ISREF(ValueToTest) The ValueToTest can be any type of data. Its a bit of an odd one. but when used on the worksheet.
The =ISTEXT() function has been used to identify the type of entry made.2.VLOOKUP(E33. The employee can be entered as a Name or as a Numeric value.000 £8.000 Type Employee Name or ID : 3 The Salary is : £8. If the entry is text is shows TRUE. and then the =IF() decides which VLOOKUP to perform.000 £12.000 £12.3. If the entry is any other type it shows FALSE.C27:E31. 1 2 3 4 5 Name Alan Eric Carol Bob David Salary £10.000 =IF(ISTEXT(E33).D27:E31.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B C D E F G H ISTEXT Page 111 of 206 I ISTEXT Cell To Test Hello 1 25Dec98 Result TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE =ISTEXT(D4) =ISTEXT(D5) =ISTEXT(D6) =ISTEXT(D7) What Does It Do ? This functions tests an entry to determine whether it is text.000 £15.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .FALSE)) . Example The following table was used by a personnel department to lookup the salary of an employee.FALSE).VLOOKUP(E33. Syntax =ISTEXT(CellToTest) Formatting No special formatting is needed. ID No.
2) =LARGE(C4:C8.000 =MAX(D24:F27) =MIN(D24:F27) .000 Mar £4.000 Feb £6.800 £3. Syntax =LARGE(ListOfNumbersToExamine.1) =LARGE(C4:C8.1) =LARGE(D24:F27.000 =LARGE(D24:F27.000 £2.000 £2.000 £10.500 £3.000 £5.2) =LARGE(D24:F27.3) Highest Value 2nd Highest Value 3rd Highest Value Note Another way to find the Highest and Lowest values would have been to use the =MAX() and =MIN() functions.000 £7.000 £10.3) =LARGE(C4:C8.000 £4.000 £12.000 £6.000 £7.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .5) What Does It Do ? This function examines a list of values and picks the value at a user specified position in the list. Feb and Mar. Example The following table was used to calculate the top 3 sales figures between Jan.4) =LARGE(C4:C8.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 B C D E F G H I LARGE Page 112 of 206 J LARGE Values 120 800 100 120 250 Highest Value 2nd Highest Value 3rd Highest Value 4th Highest Value 5th Highest Value 800 250 120 120 100 =LARGE(C4:C8.500 £12. Sales North South East West Jan £5.PositionToPickFrom) Formatting No special formatting is needed. Highest Lowest £12.
through to Number29) Formatting No special formatting is needed.Number2.D6) What Does It Do ? This function calculate the Least Common Multiple.D5) =LCM(C6..Number3. .D4) =LCM(C5. which is the smallest number that can be divided by each of the given numbers. Syntax =LCM(Number1.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Numbers 6 20 12 18 34 96 Least Common Multiple 60 36 1632 B C D E F G H I LCM Page 113 of 206 J LCM =LCM(C4..Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .
The =FIND() function was used to locate position of the space between the first and second name.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Text Alan Jones Alan Jones Alan Jones Cardiff ABC123 Number Of Characters Required Left String 1 A 2 Al 3 Ala 6 Cardif 4 ABC1 B C D E F G H LEFT Page 114 of 206 I LEFT =LEFT(C4.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .NumberOfCharactersRequired) Formatting No special formatting is needed.D8) What Does It Do ? This function displays a specified number of characters from the left hand side of a piece of text.D5) =LEFT(C6. Full Name First Name Alan Jones Alan =LEFT(C27.C27)1) Bob Smith Bob =LEFT(C28. The length of the first name is therefore the position of the space minus one character.D7) =LEFT(C8.C28)1) Carol Williams Carol =LEFT(C29. The =LEFT() function can now extract the first name based on the position of the space.D6) =LEFT(C7.C29)1) .FIND(" ".FIND(" ".FIND(" ". Example The following table was used to extract the first name of a person from their full name.D4) =LEFT(C5. Syntax =LEFT(OriginalText.
Original Text Carol Williams 6 =FIND(" ". including spaces and numbers.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .C24) This is the position of the space. =RIGHT(C24. Calculated by taking the overall length of the complete name and subtracting the position of the space. in a piece of text. =LEN(C24)FIND(" ".C24)) This is just the second name.C24) This is the length of the second name.LEN(C24)FIND(" ". Syntax =LEN(Text) Formatting No Special formatting is needed. Carol Williams 8 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 B C D E F G H LEN Page 115 of 206 I LEN Text Alan Jones Bob Smith Carol Williams Cardiff ABC123 Length 10 9 14 7 6 =LEN(C4) =LEN(C5) =LEN(C6) =LEN(C7) =LEN(C8) What Does It Do ? This function counts the number of characters. Example This example shows how the =LEN() function is used in a formula which extracts the second name from a text entry containing both first and second names. Calculated by using the =RIGHT() function to extract the rightmost characters up to the length of the second name.
It always picks the data from the end of the row or column. If the table has more columns than rows : the function will look across the top row trying to find a match for the piece of information you have asked it to look for. the function will look across to the right most column to pick the last entry on the row. The way in which the function decides whether to pick from the row or column is based on the size of the table. If the table has the same amount of rows and columns : the function will look down the left most column and work in just the same way as if the table had more rows than columns. the function will then look down to the bottom cell of the column to pick the last entry of the column. so it is no good if you need to pick data from part way across a list.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 B C D E F G H I LOOKUP (Array) Page 116 of 206 J LOOKUP (Array) Name Alan Bob Carol David Eric Francis Gail Jan 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Feb 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 Eric 77 =LOOKUP(F12. When a match is found. Be careful not to include unnecessary heading in the range as these will cause errors. Example 1 In this table there are more rows than columns. and then picks an item from the last cell in the adjacent row or column. The RangeToLook in can be either horizontal or vertical. When a match is found.RangeToLookIn) The WhatToLookFor should be a single item. Syntax =LOOKUP(WhatToLookFor. as in the description above. (use VLOOKUP or HLOOKUP).Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . so the Example 2 In this table there are more columns than rows.D4:G10) Mar 97 69 45 51 77 28 73 Type a Name in this cell : The March value for this person is : What Does It Do ? This function looks for a piece of information in a list. so the row heading of Jan is not included in the . If the table has more rows than columns : the function will look down the left most column trying to find a match for the piece of information you asked it to look for.
Table 1 shows the Name column sorted alphabetically. the results of using =LOOKUP() will be correct. otherwise errors will occur.G80:J86) . but not sorted. Table 2 shows the same data. Table 1 Name Alan Bob Carol David Eric Francis Gail Name : Value : Table 2 Name David Eric Alan Bob Carol Francis Gail Name : Value : Jan 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Eric Feb 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 Mar 97 69 45 51 77 28 73 Jan 40 50 10 20 30 60 70 Eric Feb 110 120 80 90 100 130 140 Mar 51 77 97 69 45 28 73 77 =LOOKUP(C88. either as #N/A or incorrect results.B80:E86) 77 =LOOKUP(H88. Sometimes the results will be correct. E F G lookup range.2000 Peter Noneley A 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 B C D column heading of Jan is not included in the lookup range. Alan 100 H I LOOKUP (Array) Page 117 of 206 J Jan Bob 100 Carol 100 David 100 Problems The list of information to be looked through must be sorted in ascending order.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . but other times the result will be an #N/A error or incorrect figure. Jan Alan 100 Bob 100 Carol 100 David 100 Eric 100 Fred 100 Formatting No special formatting is needed.
F4:F10) Mar 97 69 45 51 77 28 73 Type a Name in this cell : The Feb value for this person is : What Does It Do ? This function looks for a piece of information in a list.RangeToLookIn. Be careful not to include unnecessary heading in the ranges as these will cause errors.C38:C43. RangeToLookIn Alan Bob Carol David Eric Fred RangeToPickFrom 15 20 5 10 25 30 Type a name : Value : Carol 15 =LOOKUP(G41.E38:J38) Problems The list of information to be looked through must be sorted in ascending order. Example The following example shows how the =LOOKUP() function was used to match a name typed in cell G41 against the list of names in C38:C43.D4:G10. The RangeToPickFrom must have the same number of cells in it as the RangeToLookin.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . When a match is found the =LOOKUP() then picks from the second range E38:J38. the match is made in the third cell of the list of names. .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 B C D E F G H LOOKUP (Vector) Page 118 of 206 I J LOOKUP (Vector) Name Alan Bob Carol David Eric Francis Gail Jan 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Feb 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 Eric 120 =LOOKUP(F12. Formatting No special formatting is needed. either as #N/A or incorrect results. If the name Carol is used. otherwise errors will occur. and then picks an item from a second range of cells. The RangeToLook in can be either horizontal or vertical. and then the function picks the third cell from the list of values.RangeToPickFrom) The WhatToLookFor should be a single item. Syntax =LOOKUP(WhatToLookFor.
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 B C D E F G LOWER Page 119 of 206 H LOWER Upper Case Text ALAN JONES BOB SMITH CAROL WILLIAMS CARDIFF ABC123 Lower Case alan jones bob smith carol williams cardiff abc123 =LOWER(C4) =LOWER(C5) =LOWER(C6) =LOWER(C7) =LOWER(C8) What Does It Do ? This function converts all characters in a piece of text to lower case. Syntax =LOWER(TextToConvert) Formatting No special formatting is needed. .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .
.1) Using 0 will look for an exact match. The Descending list gives the #NA error.I4:I7. Using 1 will look for an exact match. The Ascending list gives the exact match. The list must be sorted for this to work properly. Using 1 will look for an exact match. Ascending 10 20 30 40 20 2 Descending 40 30 20 10 20 3 =MATCH(G45. Syntax =MATCH(WhatToLookFor. 1 or 1.0) What Does It Do ? This function looks for an item in a list and shows its position. Value position : 3 =MATCH(I9.0) Wrong Value 10 20 30 40 25 #N/A Example 2 Using the 1 option suitable for a ascending list to find an exact or next lowest match. The Descending list gives the exact match. The Wrong Value list cannot find an exact match. Examples 1 Using the 0 option suitable for an exact match. The list of values being examined must be sorted for this to work correctly. It can be used with text and numbers. so the #NA is shown. If there is no exact match or next highest number the error #NA is shown.G40:G43. or the next highest number if no exact match exists. It can look for an exact match or an approximate match. The Ascending list gives the exact match. If no match is found the #NA error will be shown. If there is no match or next lowest number the error #NA is shown.WhereToLook.TypeOfMatch) The TypeOfMatch either 0.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 B C D E F G H MATCH Page 120 of 206 I MATCH Names Bob Alan David Carol Type a name to look for : Alan Type a value : Values 250 600 1000 4000 1000 The position of Alan is : 2 =MATCH(E9. or the next lowest number if no exact match exists.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .E4:E7.
The pupils scores are compared against the breakpoints. . The Wrong Value list finds the next highest number.D95:D99. The number of passengers on the tour is then entered.G57:G60.1). The list of grade breakpoints was entered in a list. Bus Size 54 50 22 15 6 Passengers on the tour : 23 Bus size needed : 50 =INDEX(D95:D99. The Ascending list gives the #NA error. Ascending 10 20 30 40 20 2 Descending 40 30 20 10 20 #N/A G H MATCH Page 121 of 206 I Wrong Value 10 20 30 40 25 2 =MATCH(G62. They need to allocate a bus with enough seats for the all the passengers. the next biggest bus will be picked.0) Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 3 Bus 4 Bus 5 Example 5 The tables below were used by a school to calculate the exam grades for pupils. the =INDEX() function has been used to look down the list again and pick out the actual bus size required. The =MATCH() function looks down the list to find the bus with enough seats.MATCH(H94.1) Example 4 The tables below were used to by a bus company taking booking for bus tours.1) Example 3 Using the 1 option suitable for a descending list to find an exact or next highest match.. The list of bus sizes has been entered in a list. After the =MATCH() function has found the bus.G74:G77. Ascending 10 20 30 40 20 2 Descending 40 30 20 10 20 3 Wrong Value 40 30 20 10 25 2 =MATCH(G79. The Descending list gives the exact match. If the number of passengers is not an exact match.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 B C D E F The Wrong Value list finds the next lowest number. The pupils scores were entered in another list.
1).MATCH(G114. Exam Score Grade 0 Fail 50 Pass 90 Merit 95 Distinction H MATCH Page 122 of 206 I Pupil Score Grade Alan 60 Pass Bob 6 Fail Carol 97 Distinction David 89 Pass =INDEX(D111:D114.2000 Peter Noneley A 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 B C D E F G If an exact match is not found. The =INDEX() function then looks down the Grade list to find the grade.C111:C114.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . the next lowest breakpoint is used.0) .
000 =MAX(C23:E23) £7.000 £10.000 Mar £4.000 £7.Range3. through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed.000 £12. Syntax =MAX(Range1..000 Overall Max £12.000 £7.000 £4.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 B C D E F G H MAX Page 123 of 206 I MAX Values 120 800 100 120 250 Maximum 800 =MAX(C4:G4) Dates 1Jan98 25Dec98 31Mar98 27Dec98 What Does It Do ? This function picks the highest value from a list of data.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .000 Feb £6.000 =MAX(E23:E26) Region Max £6.000 £12.800 £3.000 £2.000 £6.500 £3.. 4Jul98 Maximum 27Dec98 =MAX(C7:G7) Example In the following example the =MAX() function has been used to find the highest value for each region. month and overall. Sales North South East West Month Max Jan £5.Range2.000 =MAX(C23:E26) .000 £5.500 £12.000 £10.000 £10.
through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed.. . it is the half way point where half the numbers in the group are larger than it and half the numbers are less than it.Range2.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 B C D E F G H I MEDIAN Page 124 of 206 J MEDIAN Value1 20 2000 10 Value1 20 20 Value2 50 1000 20 Value2 40 20 Value3 10 10 40 Value3 30 40 Value4 30 20 40 Value4 10 20 Value5 40 8000 40 Median 30 1000 40 Median 25 20 =MEDIAN(C4:G4) =MEDIAN(C6:G6) =MEDIAN(C8:G8) =MEDIAN(C11:F11) =MEDIAN(C13:F13) What Does It Do ? This function finds the median value of a group of values. Syntax =MEDIAN(Range1.Range3. The median is not the average. If there is no exact median number in the group.. the two nearest the half way point are added and their average is used as the median.
The function needs to know at what point it should start.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Full Branch Code Postal Region DRS/STC/872 STC HDRS/FC/111 FC S/NORTH/874 NORTH HQ/K/875 K SPECIAL/UK & FR/876 UK & FR =MID(C50.5.2) WA =MID(C36.D5. Branch ID DRSCF476 DRSWA842 HLTNP190 Postal Region CF =MID(C35. other than the required text is always between two slash / symbols.C50)+1.2) Example 2 This example shows how to extract an item which is of variable length.3) =MID(C9.12.5.12.FIND("/".5.99) What Does It Do ? This function picks out a piece of text from the middle of a text entry.FIND("/".99) =MID(C13.C50.5.E5) 2 ED =MID(C6.99) =MID(C14.5.3) =MID(C10. and how many characters to pick.12. Syntax =MID(OriginalText.E4) 3 BCD =MID(C5.FIND("/".D4.2) NP =MID(C37. It is assumed that all branch ID's follow the same format with the letters identifying the postal region being in the 5th and 6th positions. If the number of characters to pick exceeds what is available.3) =MID(C12. Example 1 The following table uses the =MID() function to extract a post code from a branch ID used by a company.D6.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Text ABCDEDF ABCDEDF ABCDEDF ABC100DEF ABC200DEF ABC300DEF Item Size: Large Item Size: Medium Item Size: Small Start Position 1 2 5 100 200 300 Large Medium Small B C D E F G MID Page 125 of 206 H MID How Many Characters Mid String 3 ABC =MID(C4.E6) =MID(C8.C50)+1)FIND("/". which is inside a piece of text which has no standard format.C50)1) .PositionToStartPicking. only the available characters will be picked.5.NumberOfCharactersToPick) Formatting No special formatting is needed.
2000 Peter Noneley A 53 54 55 56 B C D E F Find the first /. by subtracting the position of the first / from the position of the second / G MID Page 126 of 206 H . Find the second /. plus 1 for the Start of the code.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . occurring after the first / Calculate the length of the text to extract.
000 Mar £4.000 £10.. Sales North South East West Month MIN Jan £5.000 Overall MIN £2.000 £3.000 £3. month and overall..000 £4.000 £5.000 =MIN(C23:E26) .000 £2.000 £6.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . 4Jul98 =MIN(C7:G7) Example In the following example the =MIN() function has been used to find the lowest value for each region.Range3.500 £12.500 £3.500 Feb £6.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 B C D E F G H MIN Page 127 of 206 I MIN Values 120 800 100 120 250 Minimum 100 Maximum 1Jan98 =MIN(C4:G4) Dates 1Jan98 25Dec98 31Mar98 27Dec98 What Does It Do ? This function picks the lowest value from a list of data. through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed.000 £7.500 =MIN(C23:E23) £3. Syntax =MIN(Range1.000 £2.000 £4.Range2.800 £3.000 £2.000 =MIN(E23:E26) Region Min £4.
75 =F38*24 =INT(F38*24) =MOD(F38*24. Only the fraction part of the number is used as it is this which relates to time of day. Enter a time in decimal format : The same time converted to hh:mm format is : To extract the hours in hh:mm format : To extract the minutes in hh:mm format : 3."00") =REPT(""."00") Related Information To convert a time in hh:mm format to decimal format.52 1. The time functions of =HOUR().Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . To update the clock press the function key F9.1)/24 .MINUTE(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(MINUTE(NOW()). =MINUTE() and =SECOND() have been used in conjunction with the =NOW() as the basis for the number of repeats. Enter a time in hh:mm format : The same time converted to a decimal : To extract the hours as a decimal : To extract the minutes as a decimal : 2:45 2.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 B C D E F G MINUTE Page 128 of 206 H I MINUTE Number 10/4/2010 6:31 9:15:00 PM 0.75 2 0.02 0.52 Minute 31 15 28 28 28 =MINUTE(D4) =MINUTE(D5) =MINUTE(D6) =MINUTE(D7) =MINUTE(D8) What Does It Do? The function will show the minute of the hour based upon a time or a number. Clock Hour  06 Minute  28 Second  35 =REPT("".75 3:45 3:00 0:45 =F49/24 =INT(F49)/24 =MOD(F49.SECOND(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(SECOND(NOW()).HOUR(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(HOUR(NOW()). Syntax =MINUTE(Number) Formatting The result will be shown as a normal number between 0 and 59. Example The =REPT() function has been used to make a digital display for the current time."00") =REPT("".1) To convert a time in decimal format to hh:mm format.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Cells. Number. MINUTE Page 129 of 206 H I .2000 Peter Noneley A 57 58 B C D E F G The three formula above have also been formatted as hh:mm using the Format. Time command.
Example The following tables were used by a company producing boxes of chocolates.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 B C D E F G H MMULT Page 130 of 206 I J MMULT What Does It Do ? This function multiplies one range of values with another range of values. The =MMULT() function was used to multiply the contents of boxes by the customer orders.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . It is an Array function and must be entered using the Ctrl+Shift+Enter combination.000 25. The number of rows in the Result should be equal to the rows in Range1. The chocolate company now needed to know what quantity of each type of chocolate to produce. The result of the =MMULT() is the total number of each type of chocolate to produce. The dimensions of the result range is in direct proportion to dimensions of the two input ranges. The keys Ctrl+Shift+Enter were pressed to confirm the entry as an array. The number of columns in the Result should be equal to the columns in Range2. Chocolates in the box Milk Dark White 50 50 50 30 20 10 20 5 5 Customers Orders Giant Standard Economy 300 400 500 Quantity To Produce Milk Dark White 37. The ranges do not have to be of equal size.C26:E28)} In all three cells How It Was Done Cells C36 to E36 were selected.Range2) Formatting No special formatting is needed. Dark and White. Example 2 The following tables were used by the chocolate company to calculate the amount of Size Giant Standard Economy . Getting The Dimensions Correct The dimensions of the Result range are directly related to the two input ranges. The company boxed the chocolates in three differing mixtures of Milk. The formula then showed the correct result. Syntax =MMULT(Range1. In the run up to Christmas customers ordered various quantities of each box. Dark and White.C26:E28) was typed. The formula =MMULT(C32:E32. (but not yet entered).500 21.500 {=MMULT(C32:E32. The types of chocolate produced were Milk.
Note the depth of the Result is the same as the depth of Range 1. each of which has to order enough Butter. set all values in Range1 and Range2 to zero 0. The Result range shows the quantities of each ingredient that will have to be ordered to meet the production target.G69:I70)} In all cells Hint To get a feel for how the =MMULT() function operates. and the width of the Result is the same as the width of Range 2. Range 2 contains the amount Butter. G H MMULT Page 131 of 206 I J The company has four factories. Range 1 Milk Dark 20 0 20 1 10 5 20 10 Result Eggs 60 62 40 80 Range 2 Eggs 3 2 Production Factory 1 Factory 2 Factory 3 Factory 4 Ingredients Milk Dark Butter 1 2 Sugar 10 5 Ingredients To Order Factory 1 Factory 2 Factory 3 Factory 4 Butter 20 22 20 40 Sugar 200 205 125 250 {=MMULT(C69:D72. then change a single value in each. Eggs and Sugar needed to make 1 unit of Milk or Plain. Range 1 contains the planned production of Milk and Dark chocolate for each factory.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . . Eggs and Sugar to ensure they can meet production targets.2000 Peter Noneley A 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 B C D E F ingredients needed to produce batches of chocolate.
. Syntax =MOD(Number.D5) =MOD(C6.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 B C D E F G H MOD Page 132 of 206 I MOD Number 12 20 18 9 24 Divisor 5 7 3 2 7 Remainder 2 6 0 1 3 =MOD(C4.D6) =MOD(C7.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .D8) What Does It Do ? This function calculates the remainder after a number has been divided by another number.Divisor) Formatting No special formatting is needed.D4) =MOD(C5.D7) =MOD(C8.
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B C D E F G H I MODE Page 133 of 206 J MODE Value1 20 40 10 20 10 10 Value2 50 20 10 20 20 20 Value3 10 40 99 99 20 30 Value4 10 10 20 10 99 40 Value5 40 40 20 10 10 50 Mode 10 40 10 10 10 =MODE(C4:G4) =MODE(C6:G6) =MODE(C8:G8) =MODE(C9:G9) =MODE(C10:G10) #VALUE! =MODE(C12:G12) What Does It Do ? This function displays the most frequently occurring number in a group of numbers.. through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed. The =MODE() function has been used to calulate this."12") Count of size 10 : Count of size 12 : .Range3. If all the values in the group are unique the function shows the error #N/A. For it to work correctly there must be at least two numbers which are the same.Range2."8") 11 =COUNTIF(D33:D52. Order 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 Note Garmet Blouse Skirt Shirt Blouse Skirt Dress Shirt Blouse Dress Shirt Dress Skirt Skirt Shirt Dress Shirt Blouse Blouse Dress Skirt Size 10 10 8 10 12 8 10 10 8 10 12 12 10 10 8 10 10 8 10 8 Most frequently ordered size : 10 =MODE(D33:D52) Count of size 8 : 6 =COUNTIF(D33:D52. Example The following table shows garments sold in a clothes shop.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .. The shopkeeper wants to keep track of the most commonly sold size. the number closest to the beginning of the group will be used. When there is more than one set of duplicates. (Which is not really an accurate answer!) Syntax =MODE(Range1."10") 3 =COUNTIF(D33:D52.
7 This figure is of no benefit to the shopkeeper as there are no garmets of this size! .2000 Peter Noneley A 55 56 MODE Page 134 of 206 J B C D E F G H I If the =AVERAGE() function had been used the answer would have been : 9.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 B C D E F MONTH Page 135 of 206 G MONTH Original Date 1Jan98 1Jan98 Month 1 December =MONTH(C4) =MONTH(C5) What Does It Do? This function extracts the month from a complete date. Example The =MONTH function has been used to calculate the name of the month for your birthday.Number.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Please enter your date of birth in the format dd/mm/yy You were born in 3/25/1962 January =MONTH(F20) . but this can be formatted to show the actual month by using Format. Syntax =MONTH(Date) Formatting Normally the result will be a number.Custom and using the code mmm or mmmm.Cells.
D8) What Does It Do ? This function rounds a number up or down to the nearest multiple specified by the user. .D7) =MROUND(C8.D4) =MROUND(C5.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Number 110 120 150 160 170 Multiple 50 50 50 50 50 Rounded Value 100 100 150 150 150 B C D E F G H I MROUND Page 136 of 206 J MROUND =MROUND(C4. Syntax =MROUND(NumberToRound.D5) =MROUND(C6.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .D6) =MROUND(C7.MultipleToUse) Formatting No special formatting is needed.
Syntax =N(NumericEntry) Formatting No special formatting is needed. Excel does not really need this function.04 =N(C7) 25Dec98 36154 =N(C8) TRUE 1 =N(C9) FALSE 0 =N(C10) Hello 0 =N(C11) 0 =N(C12) What Does It Do ? This function converts a numeric entry to its mathematical value. due to the fact that Excel calculates in this way naturally.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .50% 0. Anything which will not convert is shown as 0 zero. .5 =N(C6) 3. The function is included for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 B C D E F G H N Page 137 of 206 I J N Original Converted 1 1 =N(C4) 3 1/2 3.5 3.5 =N(C5) 3.
the Wage is still calculated. On a large spreadsheet this may go unnoticed and the wrong Wage paid. any calculations which depend upon the cell will also show #NA.C8+1) North South East West Total =NA() =NA() =SUM(D11:D14) What Does It Do ? This function is a place marker used to indicate that required information is Not Available.C7+1) =IF(ISBLANK(C8). When the =NA() is used.NA().NA().C6+1) =IF(ISBLANK(C7). The Salary and Tax percentage are entered. Table 2 Alan Bob Carol Salary 1000 1000 1000 Tax % 25% #N/A 20% Pay 750 #N/A 800 =C49C49*D49 =C50C50*D50 =C51C51*D51 . Table 1 shows that when the Tax is not entered. It can be type directly in to a cell as =NA() or it can be used as part of a calculation. Example The following table was used by a company to calculate the monthly Wage of an employee.NA().Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . It is used to indicate that all the data has not yet been entered in to the spreadsheet. Table 1 Alan Bob Carol Salary 1000 1000 1000 Tax % 25% 20% Pay 750 1000 800 =C39C39*D39 =C40C40*D40 =C41C41*D41 Table 2 shows how the =NA() has been inserted in the unknown Tax to act as a reminder that the Tax still needs to be entered.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 B C D E F G H NA Page 138 of 206 I NA #N/A =NA() Value 10 30 Test 11 #N/A 31 Sales 100 #N/A #N/A 200 #N/A =IF(ISBLANK(C6). Syntax =NA() Formatting No special formatting is required. The Tax is then deducted from the Salary to calculate the Wage.
C30.EndDate.End. =NETWORKDAYS(Start.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .C28.C33:C37) Bank Holiday Xmas New Year New Year New Year . It will exclude weekends and any holidays.D6) What Does It Do? This function will calculate the number of working days between two dates.C33:C37) =NETWORKDAYS(B30.Holidays) Holidays : This is a list of dates which will be excluded from the calculation.Holidays)+1 Example The following example shows how a list of Holidays can be created.D4) =NETWORKDAYS(C5. Note The calculation does not include the last day. such as Xmas and Bank holidays. Syntax =NETWORKDAYS(StartDate.C33:C37) =NETWORKDAYS(B29. To correct this add 1 to the result.C29. Formatting The result will be shown as a number.D5) =NETWORKDAYS(C6. The result of using 1Jan98 and 5Jan98 will give a result of 4.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 B C D E NETWORKDAYS Page 139 of 206 F NETWORKDAYS Start Date 1Mar98 25Apr98 24Dec98 End Date 7Mar98 30Jul98 5Jan99 Work Days 5 69 9 =NETWORKDAYS(C4. Start Date Mon 02Mar98 Mon 02Mar98 Mon 27Apr98 End Date Fri 06Mar98 Fri 13Mar98 Fri 01May98 Holidays 1May98 25Dec98 1Jan97 1Jan98 1Jan99 Work Days 5 10 4 =NETWORKDAYS(B28.
2000 Peter Noneley A B C D E Northern data. Used by the example for the =INDIRECT() function.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Alan Jan Feb Mar Alan 10 20 30 Bob 40 50 60 Carol 70 80 90 Total 120 150 180 F G H I NORTH Page 140 of 206 J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Total 60 150 240 450 .
The period of the Loan is entered. The date the book was returned is entered. If the test fails."OK") 15Jan98 OK =IF(NOT(D34<=B34+C34)."Overdue"."OK") 20Jan98 Overdue =IF(NOT(D35<=B35+C35). the result is TRUE.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . otherwise OK is shown."OK") . by adding the Loan value to the Taken date. Syntax =NOT(TestToPerform) The TestToPerform can be reference to cells or another calculation. Example The following table was used by a library to track books borrowed. (A type of reverse logic). If the book was not returned on time the result Overdue is shown."Overdue". then the result is FALSE. Formatting No special formatting is needed."Overdue". Taken 1Jan98 1Jan98 1Jan98 Loan 14 14 14 Returned Status 5Jan98 OK =IF(NOT(D33<=B33+C33). If the test is met. The =NOT() function has been used to calculate whether the book was returned within the correct time.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B C D E F G H NOT Page 141 of 206 I J NOT Cells To Test 10 20 10 20 10 20 1Jan98 1Feb98 Hello Goodbye Hello Hello Result TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE =NOT(C4>D4) =NOT(C5=D5) =NOT(C6<D6) =NOT(C7>D7) =NOT(C8=D8) =NOT(C9=D9) What Does It Do ? This function performs a test to see if the test fails. The date the book was Taken out is entered.
. If it is formatted to show as a number the integer part is used for the date and the decimal portion represent the time.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 B C D E F G H NOW Page 142 of 206 I NOW The current Date and Time 10/4/2010 6:32 =NOW() 10/04/10 06:32 AM =NOW() What Does It Do? This function shows the current date and time.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . The result will be updated each time the worksheet is opened and every time an entry is made anywhere on the worksheet. Syntax =NOW() Formatting The result will be shown as a date and time.
4 3.9 Rounded To Next Odd 3 3 3 3 5 5 B C D E F G H ODD Page 143 of 206 I ODD =ODD(C4) =ODD(C5) =ODD(C6) =ODD(C7) =ODD(C8) =ODD(C9) What Does It Do ? This function rounds a number up to the next highest whole odd number. Syntax =ODD(NumberToBeRounded) Formatting No special formatting is needed.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Number 2 2.9 3 3.4 2. .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .
0) £5 ££5 Order No. It can be used to test that at least one of a series of numbers meets certain conditions.E6="Delta"). Payment Type Cash Visa Cheque Delta Handling Charge £=IF(OR(E27="Visa".5. Normally the OR() function would be used in conjunction with a function such as =IF(). AB001 AB002 AB003 AB004 Cost 1000 1000 2000 5000 Payment Type Cash Visa Cheque Delta Handling Charge ££5 ££5 B C D E F G H I OR Page 144 of 206 J OR =IF(OR(E4="Visa". A handling charge of £5 is made on all orders paid by Visa or Delta cards.0) =IF(OR(E6="Visa".E4="Delta").E7="Delta"). Syntax =OR(Test1.E27="Delta").2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Order No. Example The following table shows a list of orders taken by a company.Test2) Note that there can be up to 30 possible tests. AB001 AB002 AB003 AB004 Cost 1000 1000 2000 5000 . The =OR() function has been used to determine whether the charge needs to be applied.E5="Delta").5.0) =IF(OR(E7="Visa".5.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .0) What Does It Do? This function tests two or more conditions to see if any of them are true. Formatting When used by itself it will show TRUE or FALSE.5.5.0) =IF(OR(E5="Visa".
500 £61 £6.000 £23 £13.620 £1.575 £2.000 £300 10 £31. (As a % of the stock value) : Quantity of Exhausts used per day : Admin cost each time new Exhausts are ordered : Average quantity of Exhausts in stock (As % of ordered quantity) : Ordering Intervals to evaluate.000 £210 14 £22.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .500 £315 9 £33.440 £1.875 £75 12% 10 £25 0.625 £1.890 £1.000 £92 £4.150 £925 £775 £675 £575 £525 £475 £425 £400 £375 £350 £325 £300 £275 £275 £250 £250 £225 £225 Annual Ware house Costs £45 £90 £180 £270 £360 £450 £540 £630 £720 £810 £900 £990 £1.530 £1.000 £180 16 £19.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 B C D E F G H Ordering Stock Page 145 of 206 I Ordering Stock This is an example of a spreadsheet to calculate the best time interval to order stock.000 £150 19 £16.500 £165 17 £18.525 £1.000 £330 9 .800 £1.335 £1.500 £27 £12.750 £1.550 £1.375 £1.980 The Best Annual Ordering Total Interval £9.250 £1.000 £46 £7.000 £270 11 £28.300 £1.800 £1.000 £240 12 £25. (Expressed in Days) : Suppliers first Price Break and Discount% offered : Suppliers second Price Break and Discount% offered : Output Ordering Interval In Days 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 Annual Admin Cost £9. Objective Find the time interval to order stock which will result in the lowest Admin and Warehouse costs.125 £4.350 £1.300 £1.710 £1. Input Data Cost of a single Exhaust system : Cost of keeping Exhaust in stock.500 £37 £9.225 Best £1.295 £1.315 £1.350 £1. Each time an order is made for new stock.665 £2.480 £1.500 £285 10 £30.305 £1. The exhausts are kept in stock until needed. Keeping the exhausts in stock incurs a cost due to capital tied up and warehouse costs.500 £255 11 £27.510 £1.450 £1.500 £1.260 £1.500 £21 £15.500 £183 £3.000 £31 £10.400 £1.170 £1.795 £1.675 £1.5 2 200 750 1% 5% Quantity Per Order 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 Order Order Orders Value Discount Per Year £750 £365 £1.500 £225 13 £24.170 £4. The supplier of the Exhausts gives a discount on large orders.080 £1.500 £195 15 £21. The manager orders the exhausts on a regular basis. Scenario A garage fits exhaust systems. there is a fixed administrative cost.
000 £43. but below the second Price Break.IF(B29>=$G$25.350 £2.250 £2.925 £2. =C29*IF(AND(B29>=$G$24. . =C29*IF(AND(B29>=$G$24. Change the Ordering Interval to 1 or 30.520 £2. =C29*IF(AND(B29>=$G$24.$H$24.425 I  52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 Things To Try Change the Discount % to 0% and 0%.610 £2. the second Price Break discount is used.IF(B29>=$G$25.000 D £345 £360 £375 £390 £405 £420 £435 £450 E 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 F £200 £200 £200 £200 £175 £175 £175 £175 G £2.0)) If the OrderQuantity is equal to or above the second Price Break.$H$25.500 £45.0)) If the OrderQuantity does not qualify for a discount. Calculation : OrderingInterval * QuantityUsedPerDay Column C Order Value This is the value of the Order before any discount. which would require stock to be ordered every day.700 Ordering Stock Page 146 of 206 H £1.000 £2. If the OrderQuantity is equal to or above the first Price Break.200 £2.2000 Peter Noneley A 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 B 460 480 500 520 540 560 580 600 C £34.500 £42. The second cell picks the ordering interval from the Input Data table. The discount is only given on orders which are equal to or greater than the Price Break values set by the supplier.150 £2.IF(B29>=$G$25.B29<$G$25).$H$25.500 £39.075 £2.430 £2. This is the smallest ordering period.275 £2. The third and subsequent cells add the ordering interval to the previous cell to create a list of values of the same interval. Explanation Column A Ordering Interval In Days The first of these cells has the value 1 entered in it. Column B Quantity Per Order This is the number of Exhausts which will need to be ordered.B29<$G$25). zero discount is used.340 £2.070 £2.$H$25. Change the Cost of the Exhaust making it cheaper or more expensive.160 £2. then the first Price Break discount is used.$H$24. Calculation : QuantityOrdered * CostOfExhaust Column D Order Discount The discount which can be subtracted from the order value. Calculation : OrderValue * SupplierDiscount The supplier discount is calculated using the =IF() and the =AND() functions.000 £40.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Change the Quantity used per day to a larger or smaller number.B29<$G$25).0)) Column E Orders Per Year This is how many orders will need to be made based upon the ordering interval.$H$24.000 £37.500 £36.
The =CEILING() function has been used to 'round up' any decimals to the next highest whole number. the Discount figure is taken into account as this can be used to offset some of the overheads. giving the lowest annual overheads. However. G H Ordering Stock Page 147 of 206 I Calculation : 365/OrderingInterval This calculation may give results which are decimal.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Calculation : OrdersPerYear * AdminCost =E29*$G$20 Column G Annual Warehouse Costs This is the cost of keeping the stock in the warehouse. It does not take in to account the actual costs of the Exhausts. Calculation : QuantityOrdered * AverageStockLevel) * ExhaustCost * WarehousingCost =(B29*$G$21)*$G$17*$G$18 Column H Annual Total This is the full yearly cost of ordering the Exhausts. otherwise a dash is shown. there will have to be 365 orders."Best".3 This decimal will cause problems. =CEILING(365/A29.2000 Peter Noneley A 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 B C D E F With an interval of 1.OrderDiscount =F29+G29D29 Column I The Best Ordering Interval This shows the Best ordering interval. It is based on the managers knowledge that on average the stock level is 50% of the quantity ordered. such as 2. It compares the value in column H against the minimum value for all of column H. based upon how frequently the orders are made. as the manager only wants to know what the lowest values for the overheads associated with ordering and storing the exhaust systems."") .1) Column F Annual Admin Costs This is the administration costs involved in making the orders. =IF(H29=MIN($H$29:$H$59). due to the fact that the number of orders must always be a whole number. If the two values match the word Best is shown. Calculation : AnnualAdminCosts + AnnualWarehouseCosts .
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 B Box size Small Medium Large Small Medium Large Small Medium Large Box size C Sample 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Sample D E F G H I PACKERS Page 148 of 206 J Packer1 Packer2 Packer3 Packer4 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 21 30 28 35 30 11 9 10 10 21 20 0 20 31 28 30 30 8 10 12 10 22 20 20 19 32 28 30 30 Packer1 Packer2 Packer3 Packer4 .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .
928.ItemsInAGroup) Formatting No special formatting is needed. the following twelve permutations would be possible. C and D. It could be used to calculate the possible number of 4 digit passwords from the digits 0 to 9. Letter In Alphabet Password Size Permutations 26 8 62.D5) =PERMUT(C6.D7) What Does It Do ? This function calculates the maximum number of permutations given a fixed number of items.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 B C D E F G PERMUT Page 149 of 206 H PERMUT Pool Of Items 4 4 10 26 Items In A Group 2 3 4 6 Permutations 12 24 5040 165.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Example The following table was used to calculate the total number of 8 letter passwords which can be created by using all 26 letters of the alphabet. B.000 In the case of a two letter password made from the letter A.765.D4) =PERMUT(C5. Syntax =PERMUT(PoolToPickFrom.990. ABCD Password 1 Password 2 Password 3 Password 4 Password 5 Password 6 AB AC AD BC BD CD Password 7 Password 8 Password 9 Password 10 Password 11 Password 12 BA CA DA CB DB DC . The internal order is significant.600 =PERMUT(C4. so AB and BA will be considered as two possible permutations.D6) =PERMUT(C7.
It does not need any input.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 B C D E F G PI Page 150 of 206 H I PI π 3.54 1963.14159265358979 =PI() What Does It Do ? This function is equal to the value of Pi. Radius 5 25 Area 78. Syntax =PI() Formatting No special formatting is needed. It is correct to 15 decimal places.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Example To calculate the area of a circle.50 =PI()*(C21^2) . it is a self contained function.
D5) =POWER(C6.D6) =POWER(C7. It is the same as using the ^ operator.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 B C D E F G POWER Page 151 of 206 H I POWER Number 3 3 5 5 Power 2 4 2 4 Result 9 81 25 625 =POWER(C4. Syntax =POWER(NumberToBeRaised. which result is 81.50 =PI()*POWER(C22. Example To calculate the area of a circle. Radius 5 25 Area 78.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .D4) =POWER(C5.54 1963.D7) What Does It Do ? This function raises a number to a user specified power.2) . Both the POWER() function and the ^ operator are the same as using 3*3*3*3.Power) Formatting No special formatting is needed. such as 3^4.
It is the same as using 2*3*5*10*3*7..) Formatting No special formatting is needed.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 B C D E F G PRODUCT Page 152 of 206 H I PRODUCT Numbers 2 5 3 3 10 7 Product 6 50 210 6300 =PRODUCT(C4..Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . .Number2.Number2. through to Number30) or =PRODUCT(RangeOfNumbers) or =PRODUCT(Number1.Range...10) =PRODUCT(C4:D6) What Does It Do ? This function multiples a group of numbers together.D4) =PRODUCT(C5:D5) =PRODUCT(C6:D6.Number3. Syntax =PRODUCT(Number1. which results in 6300.
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 B C D E F G PROPER Page 153 of 206 H I PROPER Original Text alan jones bob smith caRol wILLIAMS cardiff ABC123 Proper Alan Jones Bob Smith Carol Williams Cardiff Abc123 =PROPER(C4) =PROPER(C5) =PROPER(C6) =PROPER(C7) =PROPER(C8) What Does It Do ? This function converts the first letter of each word to uppercase. Syntax =PROPER(TextToConvert) Formatting No special formatting is needed.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . and all subsequent letters are converted to lower case. .
Syntax =QUARTILE(RangeToBeExamined. Quartile 0 1 =QUARTILE(C4:C8.E7) 4 100 =QUARTILE(C4:C8.3 or 4.H12) 1 285. 3rd and 4th quarters of the data. The Quartile of 0 (zero) is actually lowest value. which can be obtained using the =MIN() function. which can be obtained using the =MAX() function.E8) Values 817 748 372 487 140 104 756 993 384 607 640 369 294 185 894 767 703 261 491 182 Quarter No.H14) 3 750 =QUARTILE(C12:F16. 2nd.2.75 =QUARTILE(C12:F16.H13) 2 489 =QUARTILE(C12:F16.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 B C D E F G H I J QUARTILE Page 154 of 206 K QUARTILE Values 1 25 50 75 100 Quarter No.E5) 2 50 =QUARTILE(C4:C8.H15) 4 993 =QUARTILE(C12:F16.QuartileValue) The QuartileValue can only be 0.E4) 1 25 =QUARTILE(C4:C8. Formatting No special formatting is needed.E6) 3 75 =QUARTILE(C4:C8. Quartile 0 104 =QUARTILE(C12:F16.1.H16) What Does It Do ? This function examines a group of values and then shows the values which are of the upper limits of the 1st. The Quartile of 4 is actually highest value. .
5 25 3. Table 1 calculates the crates by simple division.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 B C D E F G QUOTIENT Page 155 of 206 H QUOTIENT Number 12 20 46 Divisor 5 3 15 Result 2 6 3 =QUOTIENT(C4.E39) .D5) =QUOTIENT(C6.Divisor) Formatting No special formatting is needed. only showing the whole number. It ignores any remainder.5 =D28/E28 Table 2 uses the =QUOTIENT() function to remove the decimal fraction to give the correct result. This however shows decimal fractions which are not needed. The merchant can only sell full crates. Table 2 Bottles Item To Pack Wine 126 Champagne 200 Rum 15 Beer 250 Bottles Per Crate 12 8 6 20 Crates Needed 10 25 2 12 =QUOTIENT(D39.75 12.D4) =QUOTIENT(C5.D6) What Does It Do ? This function calculates the number of times a number can be divided by another number. Example The following example was used by a drinks merchant to calculate the number of crates which could be packed using bottles in stock.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Syntax =QUOTIENT(NumberToBeDivided. Table 1 Bottles Item To Pack Wine 126 Champagne 200 Rum 15 Beer 250 Bottles Per Crate 12 8 4 20 Crates Needed 10.
71 0. The same technique has been used to generate a list of six winning lottery numbers.03 0.41 0.5 0. and =RAND() in column D.72 Lottery 29 34 30 41 40 37 26 32 21 19 7 10 16 8 48 43 44 4 3 45 47 Random 0.21 0.44 0.9 0.06 0. By clicking inside the random numbers and then using Data.83 0.67 0.49 . 0.71 Random between 5 and 10.28 0.76 0 0.46 0.71 0. or when F9 is pressed.18 0.17 0.13 0. The number will change each time the worksheet recalculates.21 0.69 Random greater than or equal to 0 but less than 10 8.83 0.67 0.66 0.65 0. Sort or the Sort button the cards will be shuffled.77 0.43 0. A list of cards has been entered in column C.17 0.37 0.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 B C D E F G H RAND Page 156 of 206 I RAND Random greater than or equal to 0 but less than 1. 7.09 0.05 0.06 0.74 =RAND()*(105)+5 =RAND()*10 =RAND() What Does It Do ? This function creates a random number >=0 but <1.89 0.33 0. Examples The following examples show how the =RAND() function has been used to randomly sort list of information.14 0. Card Clubs 8 Clubs 6 Diamond 9 Spades 13 Clubs 9 Diamond 7 Diamond 4 Clubs 10 Spades 3 Hearts 6 Hearts 4 Diamond 8 Hearts 11 Clubs 3 Clubs 13 Spades 5 Diamond 3 Spades 2 Diamond 6 Clubs 5 Spades 1 Random 0.71 0.64 0.25 0.9 0.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .19 0.56 0.66 0. Syntax =RAND() Formatting No special formatting is needed.
61 0.5 0.04 0.69 0.3 0.78 0.24 0.68 0.6 0.13 0.14 0.27 0.47 0.37 0.92 0.79 0.54 0.96 0.84 0.86 0.98 E F 49 35 27 1 13 31 5 18 39 23 12 11 20 33 42 24 2 14 25 9 38 15 28 17 6 22 46 36 G 0.64 0.87 0.08 0.69 0.06 0.32 0.03 0.16 0.27 0.12 0.49 H RAND Page 157 of 206 I .12 0.38 0.82 0.17 0.79 0.18 0.71 0.58 0.62 0.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .05 0.36 0.03 0.12 0.87 0.29 0.02 0.26 0.51 0.98 0.57 0.81 0.62 0.59 0.63 0.2000 Peter Noneley A 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 B C Clubs 12 Hearts 10 Hearts 13 Spades 7 Spades 6 Diamond 12 Hearts 3 Hearts 5 Hearts 8 Hearts 1 Diamond 13 Hearts 9 Clubs 4 Diamond 5 Spades 4 Clubs 1 Spades 8 Hearts 7 Diamond 1 Clubs 2 Hearts 2 Diamond 11 Clubs 7 Spades 12 Spades 10 Clubs 11 Diamond 2 Diamond 10 Spades 9 Spades 11 Hearts 12 D 0.59 0.17 0.23 0.
. Example The following table shows how the =RANDBETWEEN() has been used to generate six numbers to use for the National Lottery."All OK")} This formula is used to determine whether all the numbers are different.$D$24) Number 1 Number 2 Number 3 Number 4 Number 5 Number 6 Bonus ball Duplicates! Spin again {=IF(SUM(1/COUNTIF(E24:E30.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .$D$24) =RANDBETWEEN($C$24.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 B C D E F G H RANDBETWEEN Page 158 of 206 I RANDBETWEEN Low 5 1 High 10 49 Random 9 11 =RANDBETWEEN(C4. Syntax =RANDOMBETWEEN(LowLimit.HighLimit) Formatting No special formatting is needed.D5) What Does It Do ? This function produces a random whole number between two specified numbers.$D$24) =RANDBETWEEN($C$24. the same number could be generated twice or more. Note that the function does not check to ensure all numbers are unique.E24:E30))<>7.$D$24) =RANDBETWEEN($C$24.$D$24) =RANDBETWEEN($C$24.$D$24) =RANDBETWEEN($C$24. It is entered as an array using Ctrl+Shift+Enter."Duplicates! Spin again". =RANDBETWEEN($C$24. The random number will change each time the spreadsheet is recalculated or F9 is pressed.$D$24) =RANDBETWEEN($C$24. The Winning Ticket! 17 27 5 25 10 34 10 Lottery Numbers 1 49 Press function Key F9 to recalculate.D4) =RANDBETWEEN(C5.
If there are duplicate values in the list. they will be assigned the same rank.C18:C22) =RANK(C20. and the 10 would be ranked as 4.C4:C8) Ranking Position Low to High 2 1 5 3 4 =RANK(C11. Example .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . 20 and 10 were ranked. Using 0 will rank larger numbers at the top.C11:C15. Using 1 will rank small numbers at the top.C4:C8) =RANK(C7.RankOrder) The RankOrder can be 0 zero or 1. A typical usage would be to rank the times of athletes in a race to find the winner.1) =RANK(C15.C4:C8) =RANK(C5.B34:B37) =RANK(B36. Value 30 20 20 10 Rank 1 2 2 4 =RANK(B34.1) Ranking Position High to Low 5 2 4 2 1 =RANK(C18.B34:B37) Syntax =RANK(NumberToRank.C18:C22) =RANK(C19.C11:C15. leaving it out has the same effect).C18:C22) What Does It Do ? This function calculates the position of a value in a list relative to the other values in the list.B34:B37) =RANK(B35.C4:C8) =RANK(C8. but would take into account the fact that there were duplicates.C18:C22) =RANK(C21.C11:C15.1) =RANK(C12. 30 is ranked as 1.C18:C22) =RANK(C22. both 20's are ranked as 2.C11:C15. If the numbers 30.C4:C8) =RANK(C6.ListOfNumbers. The ranking can be done on an ascending (low to high) or descending (high to low) basis.C11:C15. Formatting No special formatting is needed.1) =RANK(C13. Subsequent ranks would not follow on sequentially.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Values 10 30 20 30 40 Values 7 4 25 8 16 Values 7 4 25 8 16 Ranking Position High to Low 4 5 1 3 2 B C D E F G H RANK Page 159 of 206 I RANK =RANK(C4. (This is optional.1) =RANK(C14.B34:B37) =RANK(B37. 20.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .1) .C53:C58.C53:C58.C53:C58. Athlete John Alan David Brian Sue Alex Time 1:30 1:45 1:02 1:36 1:27 1:03 Race Position 4 6 1 5 3 2 =RANK(C53.1) =RANK(C54.1) =RANK(C55.1) =RANK(C56.1) =RANK(C58.1) =RANK(C57.C53:C58.2000 Peter Noneley A 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 RANK Page 160 of 206 B C D E F G H I The following table was used to record the times for athletes competing in a race. The =RANK() function was then used to find their race positions based upon the finishing times.C53:C58.C53:C58.
NewText) Formatting No special formatting is needed.E6.D6. You need to specify where the replacement should start.F6) ABCDEFGH 2 5 hello AhelloGH =REPLACE(C7.StartPosition.D4.F4) ABCDEFGH 2 5 x AxGH =REPLACE(C5. Syntax =REPLACE(OriginalText.E7.D7. how many characters to remove and what the new replacement text should be.E4.NumberOfCharactersToReplace.E5.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .F7) What Does It Do ? This function replaces a portion of text with a new piece of text.D5.F5) ABCDEFGH 2 1 hello AhelloCDEFGH =REPLACE(C6.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 B C D E F G H REPLACE Page 161 of 206 I REPLACE Start Characters New Modified Original Text Position To Replace Character Text ABCDEFGH 2 1 x AxCDEFGH =REPLACE(C4. .
Clock Hour  06 Minute  28 Second  51 =REPT(""."00") =REPT("". =MINUTE() and =SECOND() have been used in conjunction with the =NOW() as the basis for the number of repeats.000 £2. Month Jan Feb Mar Apr Sales £1. Example 1 The following table was used to display a simple histogram of sales figures.000     =REPT("". The =REPT() function uses the value of Sales."00") .000 £5. Formatting No special formatting is needed. To update the clock press the function key F9. but this is divided by 100 to scale down the number of repetitions to below the maximum of 200. The time functions of =HOUR().D6) =REPT(C7. Syntax =REPT(TextToRepeat.MINUTE(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(MINUTE(NOW()).D4) =REPT(C5.D29/100) Example 2 The =REPT() function has been used to make a digital display for the current time.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Text To Repeat A AB  Number Of Repeats 3 3 10 10 Repeated Text AAA ABABAB  B C D E F G H REPT Page 162 of 206 I REPT =REPT(C4.D7) What Does It Do ? This function repeats a piece of text a specified number of times.Repetitions) The maximum number of repetitions is 200. You need to specify the text to be repeated and how many times to repeat it.SECOND(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(SECOND(NOW()).HOUR(NOW()))&" "&TEXT(HOUR(NOW()).Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .000 £3."00") =REPT("".D5) =REPT(C6.
LEN(C29)FIND(" ". The length of the second name is calculated by subtracting the position of the space from the overall length of the full name.D7) =RIGHT(C8. Syntax =RIGHT(OriginalText.D5) =RIGHT(C6.D8) What Does It Do ? This function displays a specified number of characters from the right hand side of a piece of text. Example The following table was used to extract the second name of a person from their full name.C28)) Bob Smith Smith =RIGHT(C29. Full Name Second Name Alan Jones Jones =RIGHT(C28. The =RIGHT() function can then extract the second name.NumberOfCharactersRequired) Formatting No special formatting is needed.LEN(C30)FIND(" ".D6) =RIGHT(C7.D4) =RIGHT(C5.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Original Text Alan Jones Alan Jones Alan Jones Cardiff ABC123 Number Of Characters Required 1 2 3 6 4 Right String s es nes ardiff C123 B C D E F G H RIGHT Page 163 of 206 I RIGHT =RIGHT(C4.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .LEN(C28)FIND(" ". The =FIND() function locates the position of the space between the first and second name.C29)) Carol Williams Williams =RIGHT(C30.C30)) .
FALSE) What Does It Do ? This function produces a number shown as Roman numerals in various formats. TRUE is Classic FALSE is Simplified Formatting No special formatting is needed.TRUE) =ROMAN(C16. Note There is no function to do the opposite calculation of Roman to normal.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 B C D E F G H ROMAN Page 164 of 206 I ROMAN Number Roman 1 I 2 II 3 III 5 V 10 X 1998 MCMXCVIII 1998 MCMXCVIII 1998 MLMVLIII 1998 MXMVIII 1998 MVMIII 1998 MVMIII 1998 MLMVLIII 1998 MCMXCVIII =ROMAN(C4) =ROMAN(C5) =ROMAN(C6) =ROMAN(C7) =ROMAN(C8) =ROMAN(C9) =ROMAN(C10. 1 is more Concise. 0 is Classic.2) =ROMAN(C13. This is used if no format is specified.0) =ROMAN(C11. Syntax =ROMAN(NormalNumber. .RomanNumberFormat) The RomanNumberFormat can be any of the following.3) =ROMAN(C14. 3 is even more Concise still.4) =ROMAN(C15.1) =ROMAN(C12. 2 is even more Concise. 4 is Simplified.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .
48 13643.48 Places To Rounded Round Number 0 1 =ROUND(C4.DecimalPlacesToUse) Formatting No special formatting is needed.D5) 2 1. If 0 is used the number is rounded to the nearest whole number.48 =ROUND(C6. If a negative amount of rounding is used the figures to the left of the decimal point are rounded.D6) 1 13640 =ROUND(C7.48 1. .Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Syntax =ROUND(NumberToRound.D9) B C D E F G H ROUND Page 165 of 206 I ROUND What Does It Do ? This function rounds a number to a specified amount od decimal places.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 Number 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1.48 13643.48 13643.48 1.D8) 3 14000 =ROUND(C9.D7) 2 13600 =ROUND(C8.5 =ROUND(C5.D4) 1 1.
48 13643.48 13643.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .48 1.DecimalPlacesToUse) Formatting No special formatting is needed. If a negative amount of rounding is used the figures to the left of the decimal point are rounded.D8) 3 13000 =ROUNDDOWN(C9.D6) 1 13640 =ROUNDDOWN(C7.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Number 1. If 0 is used the number is rounded down to the nearest whole number.D4) 1 1. Syntax =ROUNDDOWN(NumberToRound.48 Places To Rounded Round Down 0 1 =ROUNDDOWN(C4.4 =ROUNDDOWN(C5.D9) B C D E F G H I ROUNDDOWN Page 166 of 206 J ROUNDDOWN What Does It Do ? This function rounds a number down to a specified amount of decimal places.D5) 2 1. .48 1.48 13643.D7) 2 13600 =ROUNDDOWN(C8.47 =ROUNDDOWN(C6.
D9) B C D E F G H I ROUNDUP Page 167 of 206 J ROUNDUP What Does It Do ? This function rounds a number up to a specified amount of decimal places.D6) 1 13650 =ROUNDUP(C7. Syntax =ROUNDUPNumberToRound.DecimalPlacesToUse) Formatting No special formatting is needed.48 13643.D7) 2 13700 =ROUNDUP(C8.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .D4) 1 1.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Number 1.5 =ROUNDUP(C5.48 1. .D8) 3 14000 =ROUNDUP(C9.48 13643.48 13643.D5) 2 1. If 0 is used the number is rounded up to the nearest whole number.48 Places To Rounded Round Up 0 2 =ROUNDUP(C4. If a negative amount of rounding is used the figures to the left of the decimal point are rounded.48 =ROUNDUP(C6.48 1.
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 B C D E F G SECOND Page 168 of 206 H SECOND Number 04/Oct/10 06:32:42 12:00:00 PM 0.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . The =SECOND() function calculates the total number of seconds. The telephone company only deals in seconds which are a multiple of 5.50 0. Example The following table was used by a telephone compnay to calculate the cost of a call.01 Duration 0:01:08 0:02:03 0:01:47 Billed Duration Minutes Seconds Cost 1 10 £0. The =MINUTES() function calculates the total number of minutes. Only the fraction part of the number is used as it is this which relates to time of day. The Duration of the call is entered.51 1. The seconds in a call are rounded up to the nearest multiple of 5 before the bill is calculated. The =CEILING() function rounds the seconds up to the nearest muliple of 5.51 Second 42 0 0 24 24 =SECOND(C4) =SECOND(C5) =SECOND(C6) =SECOND(C7) =SECOND(C8) What Does It Do? The function will show the second of the minute based upon a time or a number.10 =CEILING(SECOND(C36). The Cost of the call is then calculated. Syntax =SECOND(Number) Formatting The result will be shown as a normal number between 0 and 59.25 1 50 £1.70 2 5 £1.5) . Cost Per Second : £0.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Value 10 20 0 10 20 Positive or Negative 1 1 0 1 1 B C D E F G H
SIGN Page 169 of 206 I J
SIGN
=SIGN(C4) =SIGN(C5) =SIGN(C6) =SIGN(C7) =SIGN(C8)
What Does It Do ? This function tests a value to determine whether it is positive or negative. If the value is positive the result is 1. If the value is negative the result is 1. If the value is zero 0 the result is 0. Syntax =SIGN(CellToTest) The CellToTest can be a cell or a calculation. Formatting No special formatting is needed.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 B C D E F G H
SLN Page 170 of 206 I
SLN
Cost Salvage Life Straight Line Depreciation £12,000 £2,000 4 £2,500 =SLN(F3,F4,F5)
Purchase Value Of A New Car Second Hand Value Number Of Years Ownership Annual Straight Line Depreciation
£20,000 £8,000 6 £2,000 =SLN(F9,F10,F11)
What Does It Do ? This function calculates the Straight Line Depreciation of an item. (Also known as Fixed Instalment method). The Straight Line Depreciation is how much the value of an item reduced during a specific period of time. The result is a uniform depreciation value. An example would be if you bought a new car for £20,000, then kept it for 6 years. At the end of your ownership you sell the car for £8,000. The difference between the original and the trade in price is £20,000  £8,000 which is £12,000. Because you owned the car for 6 years, the SLN is calculated as £12,000 / 6 which is £2,000. Syntax =SLN(OriginalCost,SellingPrice,LengthOfOwnership) The LengthOfOwnership can be any time period, days, months or years. However, the SLN which is calculated will, be for that time, specifying 2 years ownership as 24 months will give an SLN per month. Formatting No special formatting is needed.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 B C D E F G H I
SMALL Page 171 of 206 J
SMALL
Values 120 800 100 120 250 Lowest Value 2nd Lowest Value 3rd Lowest Value 4th Lowest Value 5th Lowest Value 100 120 120 250 800 =SMALL(C4:C8,1) =SMALL(C4:C8,2) =SMALL(C4:C8,3) =SMALL(C4:C8,4) =SMALL(C4:C8,5)
What Does It Do ? This function examines a list of values and picks the value at a user specified position in the list. Syntax =SMALL(ListOfNumbersToExamine,PositionToPickFrom) Formatting No special formatting is needed. Example The following table was used to calculate the bottom 3 sales figures between Jan, Feb and Mar. Sales North South East West Jan £5,000 £5,800 £3,500 £12,000 Feb £6,000 £7,000 £2,000 £4,000 £2,000 £3,000 £3,500 Mar £4,500 £3,000 £10,000 £6,000 =SMALL(D24:F27,1) =SMALL(D24:F27,2) =SMALL(D24:F27,3)
Lowest Value 2nd Lowest Value 3rd Lowest Value
Note Another way to find the Highest and Lowest values would have been to use the =MAX() and =MIN() functions. Highest Lowest £12,000 £2,000 =MAX(D24:F27) =MIN(D24:F27)
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998  2000 Peter Noneley A B C D E Southern data. Used by the example for the =INDIRECT() function. Jan 100 400 700 1200 Feb 200 500 800 1500 Mar 300 600 900 1800 F G H I
SOUTH Page 172 of 206 J
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Alan Bob Carol Total
Total 600 1500 2400 4500
6 1.0816 1.7 1.5 1.4 1. =MIN(H34:H36) This finds the position of the lowest value.MATCH(MIN(H34:H36).1291 The smallest deviation is : 0.5 =STDEV(C4:C7) Values 10 10 11 10 0. The boxes were weighed and the =STDEV() function used as these boxes only represented a sample of the complete days production. Syntax =STDEV(Range1.Range3 through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed.5 =STDEV(E4:E7) Values 10 11 9 12 1. Soap Powder Box Filling Machine Test Results Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Variance 1. At the end of the day four boxes of soap powder were picked at random from the production of each machine.Range2.H34:H36. Three machines were short listed and allow to run for a day. A sample population is used when the list of values represents a sample of a population. Example The table below was used by a company interested in buying a new machine to pack washing powder.6 1. The machine with the smallest deviation was the most consistent.H34:H36.MATCH(MIN(H34:H36).0500 Machine 1 Machine 2 Machine 3 =STDEV(D34:G34) =STDEV(D35:G35) =STDEV(D36:G36) =MIN(H34:H36) The machine with the smallest deviation is : Machine 2 =INDEX(C34:C36.5 1.5 1.0500 1.5 1.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .4 1. .29 =STDEV(G4:G7) What Does It Do ? This function calculates the sample population standard deviation of a list of values.8 0.0)) find the machine name.5 0.0)) Explanation of formula: This finds the lowest value.H34:H36.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 B C D E F G H I STDEV Page 173 of 206 J K STDEV Values 10 10 9 10 0.0) This looks down the Machine column to =INDEX(C34:C36.5 0. =MATCH(MIN(H34:H36).
7 1.4 1.MATCH(MIN(H32:H34). Syntax =STDEVP(Range1.0)) Explanation of formula: This finds the lowest value. =MATCH(MIN(H32:H34). .8 0. Example The table below was used by a company interested in buying a new machine to pack washing powder.0)) find the machine name.43 =STDEVP(C4:C7) Values 10 10 11 10 0.4 1.12 =STDEVP(G4:G7) What Does It Do ? This function calculates the standard deviation of a list of values.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .43 =STDEVP(E4:E7) Values 10 11 9 12 1. ???????????????????? Soap Powder Box Filling Machine Test Results Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Variance 1.5 1.1118 The smallest variance is : 0.0707 1.H32:H34.H32:H34. The result is calculated on the basis that the values represent the entire population.Range2.6 1. A trial run of just four boxes per machine were produced.H32:H34. The boxes were weighed and the =STDEVP() function used as these boxes represented the entire test run.6 1.5 1.0433 Machine 1 Machine 2 Machine 3 =STDEVP(D32:G32) =STDEVP(D33:G33) =STDEVP(D34:G34) =MIN(H32:H34) The machine with the smallest variance is : Machine 2 =INDEX(C32:C34.Range3 through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed.0433 1.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 B C D E F G H I STDEVP Page 174 of 206 J K STDEVP Values 10 10 9 10 0. The machine with the smallest variance was the most consistent.MATCH(MIN(H32:H34).5 1.5 0.5 1. =(MIN(H32:H34) This finds the position of the lowest value.5 0.0) This looks down the Machine column to =INDEX(C32:C34.
C7.TextToInsert. Formatting No special formatting is needed.D4) ABCDABCD CD hello ABhelloABhello =SUBSTITUTE(B5.C10. It can either replace all occurrences of the text.C39.D11.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B C D E F SUBSTITUTE Page 175 of 206 G H SUBSTITUTE Old Text New Text Original Text To Remove To Insert Updated Text ABCDEF CD hello ABhelloEF =SUBSTITUTE(B4.C11.D6) Sand and Cement and & S& & Cement =SUBSTITUTE(B7.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .E11) What Does It Do ? This function replaces a specified piece of text with a different piece of text.TextToRemove. Note To cope with upper or lower case in the substitution you can use other text functions such as =UPPER().D7) Old Text New Text Original Text To Remove To Insert ABCABCABC ABC hello Sand and Cement and & Instance To Be Replaced 3 2 Updated Text ABCABChello Sand & Cement =SUBSTITUTE(B10.C6.D39) Table 2 shows how the =PROPER() function has been used to take account of the mixed cases. if it is omitted all instances will be substituted. or a specific instance.InstanceToUse) The InstanceToUse is optional.C4.D5) Northern Region Region Area Northern Area =SUBSTITUTE(B6. Table 1 shows how differing text cases alter the result of the substitution. Table 2 Old Text New Text Original Text To Remove To Insert Northern Region Region Area Region Area Northern region Northern Region region Area Northern Region Region area Northern Region region area Updated Text Northern Area Northern Area Northern Area Northern Area Northern Area . Syntax =SUBSTITUTE(OriginalText. =LOWER() or =PROPER() to ensure that the substitution will take place.E10) =SUBSTITUTE(B11. Table 1 Old Text New Text Original Text To Remove To Insert Updated Text Northern Region Region Area Northern Area Region Area Northern region Northern region Northern Region region Area Northern Region Northern Region Region area Northern area Northern Region region area Northern Region =SUBSTITUTE(B39. The function is case sensitive.D10.C5.
PROPER(D50)) H .PROPER(C50).Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 51 B SUBSTITUTE Page 176 of 206 C D E F G =SUBSTITUTE(PROPER(B50).
Syntax =SUM(Range1.MAX(E23:E25)) What Does It Do ? This function creates a total from a list of numbers.. The formula is actually doing more work than needed.E17:E19) 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 =SUM(AVERAGE(C23:C25). Formatting No special formatting is needed.D14. It can be used either horizontally or vertically. through to Range30). Note Many people use the =SUM() function incorrectly. The numbers can be in single cells.E13) 400 500 600 4800 Functions =SUM(C17:C19.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 B C D E F G H SUM Page 177 of 206 I J SUM Horizontal 100 Vertical 100 200 300 600 200 300 600 =SUM(C4:E4) =SUM(C7:C9) Single Cells 100 200 Multiple Ranges 100 200 3000 300 600 =SUM(C13.Range3.Range2. It should have been entered as either =C48+C49+C50 or =SUM(C48:C50). This example shows how the SUM has been combined with plus + symbols. ranges are from other functions. 100 200 300 600 =SUM(C48+C49+C50) =SUM(C48:C50) =C48+C49+C50 Wrong! Correct Correct ..Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .
$D$7:D10.0)) =SUM(IF(D11. . The function can be tidied up to show 0 zero when there is no adjacent value by using the =IF() function.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 B C D E F G H SUM_as_Running_Total Page 178 of 206 I J SUM (Running Total) Using =SUM() For A Running Total Running Total 10 60 90 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Sales 10 50 30 20 =SUM($D$7:D7) =SUM($D$7:D8) =SUM($D$7:D9) =SUM($D$7:D10) =SUM($D$7:D11) =SUM($D$7:D12) =SUM($D$7:D13) =SUM($D$7:D14) =SUM($D$7:D15) =SUM($D$7:D16) =SUM($D$7:D17) =SUM($D$7:D18) Type the formula =SUM($D$7:D7) in cell E7 and then copy down the table.0)) The =SUM() only takes place when there is data in column D.0)) =SUM(IF(D9.$D$7:D11.$D$7:D8. Otherwise the value 0 zero is entered.0)) =SUM(IF(D8. Each occurrence of the =SUM() then adds all the numbers from the first cell down. Running Total 10 60 90 110 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Sales 10 50 30 20 =SUM(IF(D7.$D$7:D7.$D$7:D12. It works because the first reference uses dollar symbols $ to keep $D$7 static as the formula is copied down.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .0)) =SUM(IF(D12.$D$7:D9.0)) =SUM(IF(D10.
The result is that just cell F45 is used as the range F45:F45 for the sum function to calculate.2)) This example uses E34 as the starting point and offsets 2 cols to pick out cell G34 resulting in a the range E34:G34 being summed.0. One solution would be to retype the calculation each time new data is entered. 1.0)) This example uses E24 as the starting point and offsets no rows or columns which results in the range being summed as E24:E24.0. 410 10 400 500 600 700 =SUM(E29:OFFSET(E29.0.1):OFFSET(E51. How many rows it should look up or down from the starting point. Using =OFFSET() Twice In A Formula The following examples use =OFFSET() to pick both the start and end of the range which needs to be totalled.0.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B C D E F G H I SUM_with_OFFSET Page 179 of 206 J SUM and the =OFFSET function Sometimes it is necessary to base a calculation on a set of cells in different locations. the first offset is offset by 1 column.0.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Total Jan Feb Mar Apr May 400 10 400 500 600 700 =SUM(OFFSET(E45. How many columns it should look left or right from the starting point. 2. A better way is to indicate the start and end point of the range to be calculated by using the =OFFSET() function.1)) The cell E45 has been used as the starting point for both offsets and each has been offset by just 1 column. 900 10 400 500 600 700 =SUM(OFFSET(E51.0. we can then indicate how far away the end cell should be and the =OFFSET() will give us the address of cell which will be the end of the range to be totalled. An example would be when a total is required from certain months of the year. 3. The =OFFSET() picks out a cell a certain number of cells away from another cell. The =OFFSET() needs to know three things. the second by 2 columns. By giving the =OFFSET() the address of the first cell in the range which needs to be totalled. such as the last 3 months in relation to the current date. Total Jan Feb Mar Apr May 10 10 400 500 600 700 =SUM(E24:OFFSET(E24. A cell address to use as the fixed point from where it should base the offset.0.2)) The cell E51 has been used as the starting point of both offsets. but this would be time consuming and open to human error. The result is the range F51:G51 which .1):OFFSET(E45.1)) This example uses E29 as the starting point and offsets 1 col to pick out cell F29 resulting in a the range E29:F29 being summed. 910 10 400 500 600 700 =SUM(E34:OFFSET(E34.
0. Type in the Start month.0.MONTH(3)) ) This shows how the =MONTH function calculates the month number. Feb98 Type in the End month.MONTH(F71)) : OFFSET(D79. the first offset is offset by 1 column.MONTH(2)) : OFFSET(D79.0. Formula 2 =SUM( OFFSET(D79. but they will update as you enter dates into cells F71 and F72. Formula 1 =SUM( OFFSET(D79.2) : OFFSET(D79.MONTH(F71)):OFFSET(D79.0.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .MONTH(F72))) Explanation The following formula represent a breakdown of what the =OFFSET function does. To calculate the total of a specific group of months the =OFFSET() function has been used. E F G H I SUM_with_OFFSET Page 180 of 206 J 1500 10 400 500 600 700 =SUM(OFFSET(E57.3)) The cell E57 has been used as the starting point for both offsets.0.0.0. The formula displayed below are only dummies. The Start and End dates entered in cells F71 and F72 are used as the offset to produce a range which can be totalled. These values are the 'offsets' relative to cell D79. Mar98 Total 900 1020 Jan98 10 15 Feb98 400 20 Mar98 500 1000 Apr98 600 2000 May98 700 3000 13 5 3 10 800 900 =SUM(OFFSET(D79.0.0. .1):OFFSET(E57. Example The following table shows five months of data. Formula 4 =SUM( F79:G79 ) This shows how the =OFFSET eventually equates to cell addresses to be used as a range for the =SUM function.0. The result is the range F57:H57 which is then totalled. In this example the values of the months are 2 and 3 for Feb and Mar.3) ) This shows where the month numbers are used in the =OFFSET function. the second by 3 columns.2000 Peter Noneley A 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 B C D is then totalled. Formula 3 =SUM( OFFSET(D79.MONTH(F72)) ) This is the actual formula entered by the user.
Total cost of all Tyres bought.E4:E12) This examines the names of products in C4:C12.E4:E12) =SUMIF(E4:E12."Brakes".">=100") =SUMIF(C4:C12.RangeOfValuesToTotal) =SUMIF(C4:C12. Total of item typed in following cell."Brakes". Formatting No special formatting is needed. If the value is >=100 the value is added to the total. Syntax =SUMIF(RangeOfThingsToBeExamined. What Does It Do ? This function adds the value of items which match criteria set by the user.CriteriaToBeMatched. .E4:E12) =SUMIF(C4:C12. Total of items costing £100 or above.E4:E12) Total cost of all Brakes bought. It then identifies the entries for Brakes."Tyres".2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B C D E F G H SUMIF Page 181 of 206 I SUMIF Item Brakes Tyres Brakes Service Service Window Tyres Tyres Clutch Date 1Jan98 10May98 1Feb98 1Mar98 5Jan98 1Jun98 1Apr98 1Mar98 1May98 Cost 80 25 80 150 300 50 200 100 250 160 325 1000 service 450 =SUMIF(C4:C12.E18.">=100") This examines the values in E4:E12.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . It then totals the respective figures in E4:E12 =SUMIF(E4:E12.
00 £2. takinging into account the markup percentage.13 =F39+F39*G39 Total Value Of Stock : Total Selling Price Of Stock : Profit : £7. Product Red Wine White Wine Champagne Beer Lager Cases In Stock 10 8 5 50 100 Case Price £120 £130 £200 £24 £30 Bottles In Case 10 10 6 12 12 Bottle Markup Cost £12.00 25% £13.790 =SUMPRODUCT(C35:C39.D35:D39) £9.00 £16.00 25% £33.E35:E39.E4:E6) Total Sales Value : What Does It Do ? This function uses at least two columns of values. The merchant needed to know the total purchase value of the stock. The =SUMPRODUCT() function is used to multiply the Cases In Stock with the Case Price to calculate what the merchant spent in buying the stock. and the potential value of the stock when it is sold.25 £60. to calculate the potential value of the stock if it is all sold. The values in the first column are multipled with the corresponding value in the second column.H35:H39) £2.50 25% =D39/E39 Bottle Selling Price £15.440 =SUMPRODUCT(C35:C39.350 =E44E43 . The total of all the values is the result of the calculation. Syntax =SUMPRODUCT(Range1.33 80% £2. Example The following table was used by a drinks merchant to keep track of stock. Range3 through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed.00 20% £2.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 B C D E F G H SUMPRODUCT Page 182 of 206 I SUMPRODUCT Item Tyres Filters Bulbs Sold 5 2 3 price 100 10 2 526 =SUMPRODUCT(D4:D6. The =SUMPRODUCT() function is used to multiply the Cases In Stock with the Bottles In Case and the Bottle Setting Price.40 £3.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Range.
Example 1 Purchase Price Of A Car : Salvage Value : Expected Life in Years : Depreciation in Year 1 : Depreciation in Year 2 : Depreciation in Year 3 : £10.1. Invert the year digits.F4.5 0.500 ===> =SYD(E39.000 =SUM(F7:F12) What Does It Do ? This function calculates the depreciation of an item throughout its life. £9.E41.33 0.F5.000 £1.2) =SYD(F3.714 £1.429 £2. 1. Subtract the Salvage from the Purchase Price to get Total Deprectation.2. £3000. 2. The depreciation is greatest in the earlier part of the items life.F5. 5. year 1 is $4500. What is the Sum Of The Years Digits ? The sum of the years digits adds together the each of the years of the life.5) =SYD(F3. Add together the digits of the Life to get the SumOfTheYearsDigits.000 £1.857 £2.286 £1. The total depreciation of the item is then allocated on the basis of these percentages.000 £8.3) As % Of Total Depreciation 0. .F5. £10000£1000=£9000.F5.000 £4.500 £3.F4.F4.F4.1 by £1500 to get £4500.E40.143 £571 =SYD(F3.F4. 1+2+3=6.000 6 £3.6) £12. Multiply 3. using the sum of the years digits.500 1 2 3 17% 33% 50% As the greater part of the depreciation is allocated to the earliest years the values are inverted. 3.2.3) =SYD(F3.2. A life of 3 years has a sum of 1+2+3 equalling 6. 4. Year 3 is 50% of 6. A depreciation of £9000 is allocated as 50% being £4500.4) =SYD(F3.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .F5. £1500. these values are the depreciation values for each of the three years in the life of the item. Divide the Total Deprectation by the SumOfTheYearsDigits.500 ===> £3.3 becomes 3.1) =SYD(F3.F5. Each of the years is then calculated as a percentage of the sum of the years. 33% being £3000.F4. year 1 is 17% 6.000 3 £4. 17% being £1500.17 1. year 2 is £3000 and year 1 is £1500. £9000/6=£1500.000 ===> £1. year 2 is 33% of 6.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B C D E F G H SYD Page 183 of 206 I SYD Purchase Value Of A New Car Second Hand Value Number Of Years Ownership Deprecation in year 1 Deprecation in year 2 Deprecation in year 3 Deprecation in year 4 Deprecation in year 5 Deprecation in year 6 Total Depreciation : £20.
2000 Peter Noneley A 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 B C D Example 2 The same example using 4 years.4 0.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .800 £900 £9.607 £1. 100% . Purchase Price Of A Car : Salvage Value : Expected Life in Years (1 to 10) : Year Year Year Year Year Year Year Year Year Year 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 £10.000 £1.600 £2.286 £964 £643 £321 As % Of Total Depriciation 25% 21% 18% 14% 11% 7% 4% £9. Purchase Price Of A Car : Salvage Value : Expected Life in Years : Depreciation in Year 1 : Depreciation in Year 2 : Depreciation in Year 3 : Depreciation in Year 4 : Total Depreciation : E F G H SYD Page 184 of 206 I £10.000 As % Of Total Depriciation 0.929 £1.1 100% Example 3 This example will adjust itself to accommodate any number of years between 1 and 10.000 7 £2.3 0.SalvageValue.250 £1.2 0.Life.000 £1.700 £1.000 4 £3.PeriodToCalculate) Formatting No special formatting is needed.000 Syntax =SYD(OriginalCost.
the result is a blank. . Syntax =T(CellToTest) Formatting No special formatting is needed. but is included for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs. The function is not specifically needed by Excel. then the text is the result of the function If the value is not text. If the value is text.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B C D E F G H T Page 185 of 206 I J T Cell To Test Hello 10 1Jan98 Result Hello =T(D4) =T(D5) =T(D6) =T(D7) What Does It Do ? This function examines an entry to determine whether it is text or not.
The formatting for the text needs to be specified in the function.FormatForConversion) Formatting No special formatting is required.00") =TEXT(C6.00 £10. Syntax =TEXT(NumberToConvert.25 Converted To Text 10."£0") =TEXT(C8."£0. .00") =TEXT(C5.00 10 £10 10."0") =TEXT(C7.3 £10.0") What Does It Do ? This function converts a number to a piece of text."0."0.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 ."£0.0") =TEXT(C9.3 B C D E F G H TEXT Page 186 of 206 I J TEXT =TEXT(C4.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Original Number 10 10 10 10 10.25 10.
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 B C D E F G H TIME Page 187 of 206 I TIME Hour 14 14 14 Minute 30 30 30 Second 59 59 59 Time 14:30:59 2:30:59 PM 0.D4.D6.E5) =TIME(C6. . Syntax =TIME(Hour.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . If a normal number format is applied a decimal fraction is shown which represents the time as a fraction of the day.Second) Formatting The result will be shown as a time which can be formatted either as 12 or 24 hour style.E6) What Does It Do? This function will convert three separate numbers to an actual time.Minute.D5.60485 =TIME(C4.E4) =TIME(C5.
2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 B C D E F TIMEVALUE Page 188 of 206 G H TIMEVALUE Text 14:30:59 14:30:59 14:30:59 Time 0. It is useful when data is imported from other applications. . Syntax =TIMEVALUE(Text) Formatting The result will be shown as a number representing the time a fraction of the day. such as from mainframe computers. Formatting can be applied for either the 12 or 24 hour clock system.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .6 14:30:59 2:30:59 PM =TIMEVALUE(C4) =TIMEVALUE(C5) =TIMEVALUE(C6) What Does It Do? This function will show an actual time based on a piece of text which looks like a time. which convert all values to text.
Example The following example shows how the Today function is used to calculate the number of days since a particular day. Date 1Jan97 10Aug97 Days Since 5025 4804 =TODAY()C28+1 =TODAY()C29+1 Example The following example shows the number of days from today until the year 2000.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 B C D E F G TODAY Page 189 of 206 H TODAY Today Is 4Oct10 =TODAY() What Does It Do? Use this to show the current date. Syntax =TODAY() Formatting The result will normally be displayed using the DDMMMYY format. Year 2000 01Jan2000 Days Until 03/28/89 =C36TODAY() . To calculate a result which includes the current date an extra 1 will need to be added. Date 1Jan97 10Aug97 Days Since 10/02/13 02/23/13 =TODAY()C20 =TODAY()C21 Note that the result is actually the number of days before todays date.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .
the edits can then be made and the Ctrl+Shift+Enter used to confirm it. and the data originally in rows is in columns. . such as =TRANSPOSE(A1:A5). Finally press Ctrl+Shift+Enter to confirm it. To enter an array formula you must first highlight all the cells where the formula is required. the entire array has to be highlighted. and places in it in a new range. Next type the formula. Syntax =TRANSPOSE(Range) Formatting No special formatting is needed.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . The transpose range must be the same size as the original range. If changes need to be made to the formula.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 B C D E F G H I TRANSPOSE Page 190 of 206 J TRANSPOSE Alan Bob Carol Total Jan 10 40 70 120 Alan 10 30 Feb 30 50 80 160 Bob 40 50 Carol 70 80 Total 120 160 Jan Feb {=TRANSPOSE(C3:E7)} As an array formula in all these cells What Does It Do ? This function copies data from a range. turning it so that the data originally in columns is now in rows. The function needs to be entered as an array formula.
226 14 £1. Example The following tables were used by a company to predict when they would start to make a profit.Constant) The KnownYs is the range of values.800 9 £3.500 12 £2.774 11 £7. The function is an array function and must be entered using Ctrl+Shift+Enter.B5:B10.B5:B10.000 3 £2.B5:B10.B5:B10.KnownXs.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . The prediction is based upon the Linear Trend of the original values. The months to predict were entered.750 5 £4.800 How To Enter An Array Formula Predicted Values Month Profit 13 £2.B8:B13.000 2 £2.709 16 £1.451 17 £1. The KnownXs is the intervals used when collecting the data.551 9 £6. 13 to 24.E5:E10)} {=TREND(C5:C10.E5:E10)} {=TREND(C5:C10.500 4 £3. the bank would no longer provide an overdraft facility.800 3 £4.386 12 £7.000 {=TREND(C8:C13. such as Sales Figures.193 18 £935 19 £676 20 £418 21 £160 22 £98 23 £356 24 £615 {=TREND(C41:C52. months 1 to 12.000 2 £4. such as Months.E41:E52)} The same function used in all cells as an array formula . Their bank manager had told the company that unless they could show a profit by the end of the next year.B41:B52. The =TREND() function shows that it will be month 22 before the company make a profit. The RequiredXs is the range for which you want to make the prediction.997 Historical Data Month Sales 1 £1. the =TREND() function was used.600 4 £4.300 10 £2.800 6 £4.800 6 £4.940 8 £5. To prove to the bank that. based upon the past years performance.163 10 £6. such as Months. Historical Data Month Profit 1 £5.E8:E13)} {=TREND(C5:C10.968 15 £1.E5:E10)} {=TREND(C5:C10.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B C D E F G H I TREND Page 191 of 206 J TREND WHAT IS CONST b ? Predicted Values Month Sales 7 £4. Syntax =TREND(KnownYs.000 8 £3.500 5 £3. the company would start to make a profit at the end of the next year. Formatting No special formatting is needed.RequiredXs.B5:B10.000 11 £2.500 7 £4. The historical data for the past year was entered.E5:E10)} {=TREND(C5:C10.E5:E10)} What Does It Do ? This function predicts values based upon three sets of related values.
B41:B52.E41:E52). Hold the Ctrl+Shift keys down. such as F41 to F52. Type the formula such as =TREND(C41:C52. but do not press Enter.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 55 56 57 58 TREND Page 192 of 206 J B C D E F G H I Select all the cells where the array is required. . Press Enter to enter the formula as an array.
The spaces before and after the text will be removed completely. Multiple spaces within the text will be trimmed to a single space Syntax =TRIM(TextToTrim) Formatting No special formatting is needed.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 B C D E F G TRIM Page 193 of 206 H I TRIM Original Text ABCD A B C D Alan Jones ABCD Trimmed Text ABCD ABCD Alan Jones ABCD =TRIM(C4) =TRIM(C5) =TRIM(C6) =TRIM(C7) What Does It Do ? This function removes unwanted spaces from a piece of text.
48 13643. Syntax =TRUNC(NumberToTuncate.47 =TRUNC(C6.48 Precision For Truncated Truncation Number 0 1 =TRUNC(C4.48 13643.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . it does not actually round the number.48 1.4 =TRUNC(C5.D4) 1 1.D6) 1 1.Precision) Formatting No special formatting is needed.48 13643.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Number 1.48 1.D11) B C D E F G H I TRUNC Page 194 of 206 J TRUNC What Does It Do ? This function removes the decimal part of a number.D10) 3 13000 =TRUNC(C11.D5) 2 1.D9) 2 13600 =TRUNC(C10.D7) 2 1.47 =TRUNC(C8. .48 1.48 1.D8) 1 13640 =TRUNC(C9.4 =TRUNC(C7.
.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B C D E F G UPPER Page 195 of 206 H UPPER Original Text alan jones bob smith carOl wiLLiamS cardiff abc123 Upper Case ALAN JONES BOB SMITH CAROL WILLIAMS CARDIFF ABC123 =UPPER(C4) =UPPER(C5) =UPPER(C6) =UPPER(C7) =UPPER(C8) What Does It Do ? This function converts all characters in a piece of text to upper case. Syntax =UPPER(TextToConvert) Formatting No special formatting is needed.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Example See the example for FREQUENCY.
" ". If the number in the middle of a long piece of text it will have to be extracted using other text functions such as =SEARCH(). =VALUE(MID(SUBSTITUTE(C52.SEARCH("£". two or three digits long. There was a 100% increase in sales. To get around the problem the =SUBSTITUTE() function was used to increase the size of the spaces in the text. =VALUE(MID(SUBSTITUTE(C11." ")). There was a 50% increase in sales.4)) .4)) =VALUE(MID(C14. Syntax =VALUE(TextToConvert) Formatting No special formatting is needed. Explanation of formula shown above.SEARCH("??:??". If the original text format appears as a time hh:mm the result will be a time.5)) =VALUE(MID(C15. errors will occur when the percentage is only one digit long." ".SEARCH("??:??". The winning time was 0:30 seconds. #VALUE! There was a 50% increase in sales.5)) What Does It Do ? This function converts a piece of text which resembles a number into an actual value. The winning time was 10:30 seconds.5)) =VALUE(MID(C16. To extract the values from the following text is complicated! The actual percentage value is of variable length. #VALUE! * See explanation below.5)) =VALUE(MID(C17." #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE! "). If the % sign is included in the text. The main problem is calculating the length of the value to extract." ".SUBSTITUTE(C52.2000 Peter Noneley A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C D E F G VALUE Page 196 of 206 H VALUE Text Containing A Number Annual turnover was £5000 Value Err:502 =VALUE(MID(C4.C16). Now when the extraction takes place any unnecessary characters will be spaces which are ignored by the =VALUE() function.C15). based upon the original text. There was a 2% increase in sales. =LEFT() or =RIGHT(). =SUBSTITUTE. #VALUE! Approx 50% increase in sales.SUBSTITUTE(C11. #VALUE! Only a 2% increase in sales. the result will be a decimal fraction which can then be formatted as a percentage.C4). #VALUE! A 100% increase was achieved. #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE! ")).SEARCH("???%"." "). The result will be shown as a value.C14).C17).Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . #VALUE! There was a 100% increase in sales. The only way to identify the value is the fact it always ends with the % sign.SEARCH("??:??". The same will be true for other recognised formats. other than it is preceded by a space. =FIND(). The winning time was 1:30 seconds. There is no way to identify the beginning of the value. as alphabetic characters will be included. it can be either one.99)) There was a 2% increase in sales." The winning time was 1:30 seconds. =MID(). If the extraction assumes the maximum length of three digits and the % sign. If the £ sign is included in the text it will be ignored." ".SEARCH("???%".SEARCH("??:??".
=MIN(H34:H36) This finds the position of the lowest value. The machine with the smallest variance was the most consistent.0) This looks down the Machine column to =INDEX(C34:C36. Example The table below was used by a company interested in buying a new machine to pack washing powder.4 1.5 0.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .5 1.8 0.Range3 through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed. A sample population is used when the list of values represents a sample of a population.0025 1. The boxes were weighed and the =VAR() function used as these boxes only represented a sample of the complete days production.6 1.4 1.5 1. At the end of the day four boxes of soap powder were picked at random from the production of each machine.MATCH(MIN(H34:H36).0067 1.Range2.0167 The smallest variance is : 0. .5 0. =MATCH(MIN(H34:H36).0)) find the machine name. Syntax =VAR(Range1.H34:H36.25 =VAR(E4:E7) Values 10 11 9 12 1.H34:H36.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 B C D E F G H VAR Page 197 of 206 I J VAR Values 10 10 9 10 0.25 =VAR(C4:C7) Values 10 10 11 10 0.0025 Machine 1 Machine 2 Machine 3 =VAR(D34:G34) =VAR(D35:G35) =VAR(D36:G36) =MIN(H34:H36) The machine with the smallest variance is : Machine 2 =INDEX(C34:C36.6 1.67 =VAR(G4:G7) What Does It Do ? This function calculates the sample population variance of a list of values.5 1.H34:H36. Soap Powder Box Filling Machine Test Results Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Variance 1.MATCH(MIN(H34:H36).5 1. Three machines were short listed and allow to run for a day.0)) Explanation of formula: This finds the lowest value.7 1.
5 0.8 0. A trial run a just four boxes per machine were produced.6 1.0125 The smallest variance is : 0. =MATCH(MIN(H32:H34).0)) Explanation of formula: This finds the lowest value.MATCH(MIN(H32:H34).0019 Machine 1 Machine 2 Machine 3 =VARP(D32:G32) =VARP(D33:G33) =VARP(D34:G34) =MIN(H32:H34) The machine with the smallest variance is : Machine 2 =INDEX(C32:C34.25 =VARP(G4:G7) What Does It Do ? This function calculates the variance of a list of values.Range3 through to Range30) Formatting No special formatting is needed. The variance is calculated on the basis that the values represent the entire population.5 1.4 1.0) This looks down the Machine column to =INDEX(C32:C34.0050 1.H32:H34.H32:H34. The machine with the smallest variance was the most consistent. .7 1.5 1. The boxes were weighed and the =VARP() function used as these boxes represented the entire test run. Example The table below was used by a company interested in buying a new machine to pack washing powder.5 1.0)) find the machine name. Soap Powder Box Filling Machine Test Results Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Variance 1.H32:H34.0019 1.6 1. =(MIN(H32:H34) This finds the position of the lowest value.Range2.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 B C D E F G H VARP Page 198 of 206 I J VARP Values 10 10 9 10 0.5 1. Syntax =VARP(Range1.19 =VARP(E4:E7) Values 10 11 9 12 1.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .19 =VARP(C4:C7) Values 10 10 11 10 0.MATCH(MIN(H32:H34).5 0.4 1.
they are part of the illustration. so and extra 1 is added to compensate.FALSE) What Does It Do ? This function scans down the row headings at the side of a table to find a specified item. The problem arises when we need to scan across to find the month column. it then scans across to pick a cell entry. FALSE for no. Example 1 This table is used to find a value based on a specified name and month. When the item is found. Bob Eric Alan Carol David Jan 10 20 30 40 50 Feb 80 90 100 110 120 Mar 97 69 45 51 77 . To solve the problem the =MATCH() function is used. The Sorted/Unsorted is whether the column headings are sorted. The =MATCH() looks through the list of names to find the month we require. the =MATCH() number is 1 less than we require.G12. col 1 col 2 col 3 col 4 col 5 col 6 Jan Feb Mar 10 80 97 20 90 69 30 100 45 40 110 51 50 120 77 Type a month to look for : Which column needs to be picked out : The result is : Feb 4 100 =VLOOKUP(G11.SortedOrUnsorted) The ItemToFind is a single item specified by the user. The RangeToLookIn is the range of data with the row headings at the left hand side.ColumnToPickFrom. The =VLOOKUP() is used to scan down to find the name.RangeToLookIn. The =VLOOKUP() uses FALSE at the end of the function to indicate to Excel that the row headings are not sorted. Formatting No special formatting is needed. because the list of months is not as wide as the lookup range.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Unfortunately. It then calculates the position of the month in the list. The =VLOOKUP() now uses this =MATCH() number to look across the columns and picks out the correct cell entry.C6:H8.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B C D E F G H I VLOOKUP Page 199 of 206 J VLOOKUP The column numbers are not needed. The ColumnToPickFrom is how far across the table the function should look to pick from. TRUE for yes. Syntax =VLOOKUP(ItemToFind.
Trying to match an order of 125 will drop down to 100.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . The Unit Cost of the item is then looked up in the Unit Cost Table.C50:F54. If a match is not found. The Orders Table is used to enter the orders and calculate the Total. The TRUE option has been used at the end of the function to indicate that the values down the side of the Discount Table are sorted.2000 Peter Noneley A 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 B C D E F eric mar G H I VLOOKUP Page 200 of 206 J Type a name to look for : Type a month to look for : The result is : 69 =VLOOKUP(F56.0)+1.200 =VLOOKUP(C81. The name of the Item is typed in column C of the Orders Table.0)+1.2. This ensures that when the formula is copied to more cells. the function will produce an error. All the calculations take place in the Orders Table. When the make is found. The Discount Table holds the various discounts for different quantities of each product.MATCH(F57.200 Engine 1000 1200 800 £275 Steering 250 350 275 £70 Ignition 50 70 45 £290 CYHead 300 290 310 £500 £1. the =VLOOKUP() then scans across to find the price. the ranges for =VLOOKUP() and =MATCH() do not change. The =VLOOKUP() scans down row headings in column F for the spare part entered in column C. Maker Vauxhall VW Ford VW Ford Ford Vauxhall Ford Spare Ignition GearBox Engine Steering Ignition CYHead GearBox Engine Cost Lookup Table £50 Vauxhall Ford VW £600 GearBox 500 450 600 £1. Wood and Glass. Using the FALSE option forces the function to search for an exact match.C114:D116.F75:I79. =VLOOKUP(C126. Using TRUE will allow the function to make an approximate match. The FALSE option has been used at the end of the function to indicate that the product names down the side of the Unit Cost Table are not sorted.FALSE) The discount is then looked up in the Discount Table If the Quantity Ordered matches a value at the side of the Discount Table the =VLOOKUP will look across to find the correct discount.FALSE) Example 2 This example shows how the =VLOOKUP() is used to pick the cost of a spare part for different makes of cars. If the Quantity Ordered does not match a value at the side of the Discount Table. The functions use the absolute ranges indicated by the dollar symbol .G74:I74. and the discount from .MATCH(B81.FALSE) Example 3 In the following example a builders merchant is offering discount on large orders. using the result of the =MATCH() function to find the position of the make of car.D49:F49. the next lowest value is used. The Unit Cost Table holds the cost of 1 unit of Brick.
C114:D116.0)+1.0)+1.TRUE) H I VLOOKUP Page 201 of 206 J Unit Cost Table Brick £2 Wood £1 Glass £3 Discount Table Brick Wood Glass 1 0% 0% 0% 100 6% 3% 12% 300 8% 5% 15% Item Brick Wood Glass Brick Wood Glass Units 100 200 150 225 50 500 Orders Table Unit Cost Discount £2 6% £1 3% £3 12% £2 6% £1 0% £3 15% Total £188 £194 £396 £423 £50 £1.TRUE) Total =(D126*E126)(D126*E126*F126) B C D E F G the 100 row is used.F114:I116.FALSE) Discount =VLOOKUP(D126.G113:I113.2.MATCH(C126.G113:I113.MATCH(C126. =VLOOKUP(D126.F114:I116.2000 Peter Noneley A 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 Formula for : Unit Cost =VLOOKUP(C126.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .275 .
C39:D45) Booking Rates Day Of Week Cost 1 £50 2 £25 3 £25 4 £30 5 £40 6 £50 7 £100 . To show the result as the name of the day. 3 : will set Monday as 0 through to Sunday as 6.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . Example The following table was used by a hotel which rented a function room. The Booking Date is entered. 1 : will set Sunday as 1 through to Saturday as 7 2 : will set Monday as 1 through to Sunday as 7.1) =WEEKDAY(C7. The hotel charged different rates depending upon which day of the week the booking was for. The Actual Day is calculated. Cells.Type) Type : This is used to indicate the week day numbering system. Booking Date Actual Day 7Jan98 Wednesday Booking Cost £30. Syntax =WEEKDAY(Date. Formatting The result will be shown as a normal number. Custom and set the Type to ddd or dddd. Excel will use 1. If no number is specified.00 =LOOKUP(WEEKDAY(C34). use Format.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 B C D E F G WEEKDAY Page 202 of 206 H WEEKDAY Date Thu 01Jan98 Thu 01Jan98 Thu 01Jan98 Thu 01Jan98 Thu 01Jan98 Weekday 5 5 5 4 3 =WEEKDAY(C4) =WEEKDAY(C5) =WEEKDAY(C6.2) =WEEKDAY(C8. The Booking Cost is picked from a list of rates using the =LOOKUP() function.3) What Does It Do? This function shows the day of the week from a date.
D28:D32) Bank Holiday Xmas New Year New Year New Year .Number. The function excludes weekends and holidays and can therefore be used to calculate delivery dates or invoice dates.E5) What Does It Do? Use this function to calculate a past or future date based on a starting date and a specified number of days.E25.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 B C D E F G WORKDAY Page 203 of 206 H WORKDAY StartDate 1Jan98 1Jan98 Days 28 28 Result 35836 10Feb98 =WORKDAY(D4.Date. Order Date Mon 02Feb98 Tue 15Dec98 Holidays Fri 01May98 Fri 25Dec98 Wed 01Jan97 Thu 01Jan98 Fri 01Jan99 Delivery Days 2 28 Delivery Date Wed 04Feb98 Tue 26Jan99 =WORKDAY(D25. Example The following example shows how the function can be used to calculate delivery dates based upon an initial Order Date and estimated Delivery Days. Syntax =WORKDAY(StartDate.Holidays) Formatting The result will normally be shown as a number which can be formatted to a normal date by using Format.E4) =WORKDAY(D5.Cells.Days.
Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 B C D E F G H I YEAR Page 204 of 206 J YEAR Date 25Dec98 Year 1998 =YEAR(C4) What Does It Do? This function extracts the year number from a date. . Syntax =YEAR(Date) Formatting The result is shown as a number.
D5) =YEARFRAC(C6. 2 : 29 or 30 or 31 days per month divided by 360.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 B C D E F G YEARFRAC Page 205 of 206 H YEARFRAC Start Date 1Jan98 1Jan98 1Jan98 End Date 1Apr98 31Dec98 1Apr98 Fraction 0.000 £3.000 =YEARFRAC(B34. 0 : or omitted USA style 30 days per month divided by 360.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 . the End date.C33+1. 1 : 29 or 30 or 31 days per month divided by 365. The Pro Rata Salary which represents the annual salary is entered.25 1 25% =YEARFRAC(C4.4)*D34 Note The extra 1 has been added to the End date to compensate for the fact that the =YEARFRAC() function calculates from the Start date up to. 3 : 29 or 30 0r 31 days per month divided by 365.C34+1. The Start and End dates of the contract are entered.EndData. Syntax =YEARFRAC(StartDate. but not including. Formatting The result will be shown as a decimal fraction. 4 : European 29 or 30 or 31 days divided by 360.D4) =YEARFRAC(C5. Example The following table was used by a company which hired people on short term contracts for a part of the year.D6) What Does It Do? This function calculates the difference between two dates and expresses the result as a decimal fraction. Start 1Jan98 1Jan98 1Jan98 End Pro Rata Salary Actual Salary 31Dec98 £12.000 =YEARFRAC(B32.000 =YEARFRAC(B33.4)*D33 30Jun98 £12. .Basis) Basis : Defines the calendar system to be used in the function.4)*D32 31Mar98 £12. The =YEARFRAC() function is used to calculate Actual Salary for the portion of the year.C32+1.000 £6. but can be formatted as a percent.000 £12.
400 £2.000 £4.400 £1.Excel Function Dictionary © 1998 .000 £2.000 £800 £400 £300 Total Cost Budget % Total £1.000 Job Stage Survey Foundation Walls Roof Electrics Actual Delivery Against Target Total Days Start Date Mon 05Jan98 Mon 12Jan98 Fri 16Jan98 Wed 21Jan98 Thu 29Jan98 Tue 03Feb98 5 days behind 22 End Date Fri 09Jan98 Thu 15Jan98 Tue 20Jan98 Wed 28Jan98 Tue 03Feb98 Daily Cost £200 £1.200 £11.2000 Peter Noneley A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 B C D E F G Project Dates Page 206 of 206 H I Project Dates Target Delivery Tue 27Jan98 House Building Target Budget Days Required 5 4 3 6 4 £12.000 92% .
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
We've moved you to where you read on your other device.
Get the full title to continue listening from where you left off, or restart the preview.